How To Sell Your Programs Through Speaking with April Beach and Heather Sager (Episode 290)

    How To Sell Your Programs Through Speaking



    In this podcast episode, April Beach teams up with Heather Sager, a pro at using speaking engagements to sell programs. They share a simple framework for getting booked as a speaker and closing deals to sell your programs. Whether you have a big program or want to license your content, this episode explains the two types of speaking business models and gives three important steps to successfully sell your programs. Discover how to leverage speaking engagements, market your programs, and partner with companies to grow your business!
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Types of Speaking Business Models—being a paid speaker and using speaking engagements to sell programs. Understand which model aligns with your goals and strategies.
    2. ​Step-by-Step Guide: Follow the step-by-step process shared in the episode to effectively use speaking engagements to market and sell your programs. Explore communication techniques and approaches for building partnerships with companies and organizations.
    3. ​Selling and Licensing Programs: Explore the potential of using speaking engagements to sell and license programs, such as courses, consulting services, and certification programs. Discover how this method can help you expand your reach and generate revenue by collaborating with other entities.
      ​​Tune in to this podcast episode and gain valuable insights from Heather Sager, an industry expert, on using speaking engagements to successfully sell your programs. Unlock the secrets of leveraging stages to grow your business and reach more people interested in your offerings!
    Resources mentioned: 
    Work with us to license your course to other companies:

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:45] April: Hi guys. This is episode number 290 and we’re diving into the business model of. Speaking, my very good friend, and I’m so grateful to say that she’s also an expert that comes into our ecosystem and works with our clients. Heather Sager is back on the [00:01:00] podcast again, and if you’ve ever wondered how to actually use stages to sell your programs on the backside, This is a very important episode for you to tune into.

    [00:01:11] April: As you know, you can be a paid speaker. That is a different type of business model. We are not talking about that today. We are also not talking about being a speaker on podcasts, and we’re not talking about being a speaker on summits. That is not what we’re talking about here today. So I wanna make sure that you’re not showing up and being like, oh, I know this already. I give a free opt-in. That is not at all what we’re saying on this show.

    [00:01:34] April: In this particular episode, we are diving into the framework of how to get booked to speak and actually close deals in the process of communications with companies to sell your program on the backside of speaking, whether you’re paid to speak or not. It’s a really powerful episode. It’s actually so powerful. And the framework that we’re talking about scratches the surface of what Heather comes in and works with [00:02:00] our clients on, especially our clients that have million dollar programs in our content, in our licensing, their programs to companies and organizations.

    [00:02:09] April: This is one of the powerful ways that we use to sell and license their programs to other companies, nonprofits, and even other businesses. So if you’ve been listening to the last couple episodes on licensing, you also should be listening to this because it’s one of the methods we use to sell your licensed program.

    [00:02:29] April: Again, Heather’s absolutely amazing. I can’t wait for you to get to know her if you’ve never met her before. At the end of this, you’re gonna know the two different types of speaking business models. And you’re gonna know the three steps and what you need to do to use the model that we’re talking about here to sell your programs on the backside.

    [00:02:46] April: It could be your course, could be your consulting, and it could be your licensed program or certification program. It’s a powerful episode. Tune in with us and let’s go ahead and dive in. All right, [00:03:00] everybody. Welcome back with my friend Heather Sager. If you’ve been listening to the show for a while, you know that Heather is one of my favorite people to bring in here because we unpack strategies that you can instantly take to the bank of which means taking to your business first, especially in regards to speaking.

    [00:03:17] April: And so, Heather, it’s been a bit. Since you’ve been on the show, but give every everybody a quick update about what you’ve been up to in your business lately and all of the amazing action your clients are taking.

    [00:03:28] Heather: Yeah. Thanks for having me on the show. April. So the, the biggest new thing in my business, I think last time I was here, I had had my podcast go in for like a year and a half, and we just had a wonderful pivot.

    [00:03:40] Heather: The new name of my podcast is now Hint of Hustle, and what I really focus on with entrepreneurs teaching them with speaking is I’m a huge believer that the time you spend on stage. Should give you more freedom and flexibility offstage. So I’m on a mission to help more entrepreneurs who are personal brands, trying to make money with their information products, how [00:04:00] to leverage stages so they get their time back. And that’s what my podcast is all

    [00:04:04] April: Oh, I love it. I love it. And that’s why we we’re saying, you know, we’re a match made in heaven for, for what we do. And it’s really interesting because before we dive into what we’re gonna say here in a minute, I hear from so many entrepreneurs say they want to speak.

    [00:04:17] April: But it just sounds so exhausting traveling around being on this speaking quote unquote circuit, if you will, and that really isn’t what they want in their business. So I’m very glad that, that we’re talking about this today. So let’s talk about the business of speaking, the business model of speaking. As we dive into today’s show.

    [00:04:37] April: What should our listeners know about that?

    [00:04:40] Heather: Yeah, so exactly what you just said is a lot of people go on this path thinking, oh, speaking means I travel to conferences or organizations and I deliver keynotes, and I could get paid very well for it, which is very true. That’s actually how I started full-time in my business.

    [00:04:55] Heather: I jumped from the corporate space where I was planning multimillion dollar events, bringing in the world’s [00:05:00] best speakers for my conferences, and I love what they were doing. And I knew I was really good on stages, so I thought I could do what they do. I, I, I decided I’m gonna go out and become a professional speaker, and that’s how I started.

    [00:05:11] Heather: And very quickly I realized that the professional speaker route was not giving me my time back because I was committed to organizations. A year, 18 months out for these contracts. Like my time was being booked even further out and I had multiple bosses versus just my old former boss. So I thought like, hold on.

    [00:05:31] Heather: I love being on stages. I’m really good at it and I have really good messages to share. So there has to be a different way. So when it comes to speaking, I think most people think when they think professional speaking, they think professional means I’m gonna get paid for my time on stage. Which is that traditional speaking model, which most people end up hiring or bringing on like an agent or a speaker’s bureau to have them book on their behalf to get on stages, which is really great [00:06:00] when you wanna get paid for your time on stage.

    [00:06:02] Heather: So that is a very relevant business model. It’s very profitable because the margins are low. You don’t have to have a big team. A lot of professional speakers have a part-time assistant. And really what you need is a damn good talk and a system to book stages that that is what you need now to get started.

    [00:06:20] Heather: Like there’s some other things with it, but that’s one model. My clients that I work with, we operate, offer a different business model, and that is the, the model where instead of speaking, being the product. You’re using speaking to grow your products. So this is for, if you’re a coach, you’re an entrepreneur who has digital courses, membership consulting, um, you do any of those types of things with information products and you wanna make money offstage, we have to look at a different business model and that’s where.

    [00:06:47] Heather: You can still get paid to speak on stage, but that moment on stage opens far more opportunities both with the organizations and with the audience. Yeah, and,

    [00:06:57] April: and that’s exactly what we talk about behind the [00:07:00] scenes. Uh, as some of you guys know, Heather is one of our experts that comes in and, and works with our clients at the Sweet Life Company because we’re selling these game-changing very valuable offers in.

    [00:07:11] April: There’s no better way to get in front of a perfect audience than using stages to sell those programs, sell those offers on the backside. So I’m super, super excited to dive into that second business model, selling programs, selling your intellectual property on the backside of stages. So how does somebody get started with this process if they’re like, yes, this is totally what I was looking for, but I didn’t actually know how to go

    [00:07:39] Heather: about doing that.

    [00:07:41] Heather: Yeah, I, I love this topic so much because a lot of times I’m focused with people just on their talks and we don’t even get to the point of them making the business on the back end. So this, I’m gonna geek out with you today. So you know how I mentioned in a professional speaking model, you really need two things, the damn good talk.

    [00:07:54] Heather: You need the system to book the stages. So when you’re leveraging those stage opportunities, and let [00:08:00] me just clarify. When I say a speaking opportunity or a stage opportunity, it could be you being paid to speak at a conference. It could be you coming into an organization teaching a workshop. It also could be you speaking virtually, maybe for an organization, but also you might be going direct to your ideal clients and speaking at virtual summits.

    [00:08:18] Heather: Or hosting your own events. A stage is simply a platform to share your message, so you have a lot of opportunities available for you, but to you speaking as a way to grow your business, you actually need three things in this business model number one. It’s not just good enough to have a damn good talk.

    [00:08:35] Heather: It doesn’t matter if you’re charismatic or you’re a great storyteller. You have to have an effective talk, which means not only do you wow your audience and the client who booked you, but you have to ensure that you’re driving demand and desire for your offers. So that’s why you have to have an effective talk.

    [00:08:54] Heather: That is number one. That’s what I spend most of my type. Time helping clients with, because most entrepreneurs, we [00:09:00] believe were really, really great speakers, but we’re really good at getting praise. We’re not good at organically driving sales from our messages. Right? And I teach people how to be persuasive without being schmucky.

    [00:09:11] Heather: I love that. Number one, effective talk. Number two, of course, you have to have a system to book talks. It’s the same on both ends, but who you’re booking, you’re being a little bit more csy. Mm-hmm. And more intentional with the types of clients you’re after. But then number three, you have to have a system on the back end for how you make money after your talk.

    [00:09:31] Heather: Because it’s not just about your time on stage, it’s what’s happened next. And part of that is what happens next for the audience. But a big part about speaking when you’re an expert is you can make money through consulting, booking additional gigs. There are so many opportunities on the backend when you’re booking corporate and organizations.

    [00:09:50] Heather: Yes, yes,

    [00:09:50] April: yes. And licensing. And that’s what we love to talk about, right? It’s just selling your program. Selling your consulting to the organization. So let me just repeat for our [00:10:00] listeners, what I just heard you say is that, There are really two audiences that you actually get to sell to in business model of speaking.

    [00:10:09] April: Number two, first of all, the audience, and second the company that you’re speaking for. And how powerful is that? So you really have two people that you can serve. So how, if somebody really wants to get started with this, what are some of the steps? To build, first of all, the effective talk. So my question for you is, how important do you believe is it that their effective talk connects with the solution they provide in the offers that they’re selling on the backside?

    [00:10:43] Heather: If you wanna be effective in your selling, you want it to be very closely aligned. The, the more distant your, uh, stage topic is from your offer, the harder the hill you have to climb with your audience. And the longer the nurture window and the more connection you have to create in terms of connecting [00:11:00] the dots for them.

    [00:11:00] Heather: But the closer aligned your solution is to what you’re speaking about. The closer you are to your audience with them being aware of their problem. So I like to align those things. It’s why what we do to build an effective talk for the majority of my clients, we build something called a Signature Talk, which very much coordinates with what you teach in your signature method.

    [00:11:20] Heather: So what we do is we focus on how do we create the context for the signature solution so that people are excited about it. And that’s what we do inside my program called the Signature Talk Accelerator. Where we geek out over that, we obsess over it and say, how do you build the narrative in a way that gets people excited and you’re able to pitch it to organizations so that they see the benefit for them too.

    [00:11:42] April:

    [00:11:42] April: Right, And it’s so fascinating. I mean, when I talk to clients, I think there is so much confusion around people thinking, oh, I need that motivational talk. I need the one that feels so super good. And I really do think there’s a disconnect between what you’re saying, between an [00:12:00] effective talk. And not that it’s not motivational, not that it’s not inspiring, of course it encompasses all those things, but you’re bringing somebody through, would you call it, that framework and you’re saying in their method of what they teach in that process.

    [00:12:16] April: And I really think that it’s just, ,muddied waters a bit for people that just don’t understand that if they do not have that framework. Extracted from their offer as part of their talk. They’re working against themselves. I was actually just working with a client. I need her, I need to send her over to you.

    [00:12:37] April: As I’m saying this, I’m realizing, oh my gosh, I need to make sure she’s getting introduced to Heather. Um, and she has an amazing program she’s working through at a certification program. She’s booked all the time on stages and the talk that she has been given, giving for years. Now that we have this program that we’ve built for her, right?

    [00:12:58] April: It’s totally the wrong talk. [00:13:00] It’s a great talk. She’s known for this talk. She’s getting booked for this talk, but now she really needs to pivot that.

    [00:13:07] Heather: Yeah, and she could probably keep it. So one of the things I talk about with my clients is you’re gonna have a speaking ecosystem. So your signature talk is the one that is most directly aligned, aligned with your offer, right?

    [00:13:18] Heather: So that one there, and that’s why I help clients. We start there because if you have a method or if you have a program, and if you don’t have a method, see April, right? She helps with that. This is what you do is, uh, we wanna align those. A lot of people go, oh, I’m gonna start with my signature talk and then I’m gonna figure out what to sell.

    [00:13:34] Heather: It’s kind of ass backwards. I mean, you could do that, but you’re gonna be far more, again, the word is effective. Mm-hmm. If we start with what is the goal, what ultimately is the offer you wanna be known for? What is the thing that you wanna sell? And then we build your signature story and all of the messaging around that.

    [00:13:51] Heather: But you also will have other talks. So for me, I’m still a professional speaker. That is part of the revenue in my business. I love speaking. I don’t think that’s ever [00:14:00] gonna go away. I have a variety of keynotes and workshops that I deliver that are not my signature. Now, the majority of them are connected back in some way to my signature talk because I wanna be known for something.

    [00:14:13] Heather: But let me give you an example here. I specifically work with entrepreneurs who have. Mostly online programs, so again, experts, co coaches, consultants, educators. Now with this type of business, I’m very specific in what I teach on speaking. However, when I work with organizations, I’m hired a lot by companies to come in to train their sales team, to hire, um, to come in and train their executives on more effective communication.

    [00:14:39] Heather: Now, communication, giving presentations. That’s really not the same for sales, like a sales force or an executive, right? But the principles of effective communication, they transfer. So I have talks that are modified that aren’t completely different than what I do, but the point is you can have multiple talks, but you wanna know which ones are gonna be the best money makers [00:15:00] for your business on and off stage.

    [00:15:02] April: Fabulous. I love the ecosystem language around that, as you know. That’s just awesome. Okay, so they have their talk, they have their framework, they have their outline of what they’re gonna speak on, and then the next step, you said that it, you need something after that. What comes after that, after you’ve booked that talk?

    [00:15:23] April: What? What happens on the backside to actually sell the programs? What does that usually look like in your experience?

    [00:15:31] Heather: Well, a lot of times this starts actually well before the engagement itself. So we, we create our talk I recommend for my clients is we practice, uh, we, we book some low stakes talk that are not your ideal client that you’re after.

    [00:15:43] Heather: So we can, uh, hammer out the, the weird parts of your talk. People struggle with transitions, the stories, right? We have all that done. But let’s say that you’ve booked. An epic stage talk and now you’re going, how do I make money on the backend? Well, the reality is most organizations when you come in or conferences you speak [00:16:00] at, they are not gonna be a fan or allowed to any capacity of you saying, here’s my program, here’s my offer.

    [00:16:07] Heather: Selling from the stage is, is a very unique thing. And what I’m finding with today’s consumers, most people are turned off by it. And what you’ll hear oftentimes is people are like, but it’s so effective. And it is. But what we also find is consumers who purchase from those selling from the stage moments they buy despite feeling kind of yucky about it.

    [00:16:27] Heather: Mm-hmm. There is a high pressure stakes piece of it. So yes is effective. I’ve done it before and multiple people have done it before, but you go with it knowing that it might not be the best experience for the audience. Now I say that, I know a lot of people disagree with me, that’s totally fine. But what I find with most of my clients is it works.

    [00:16:45] Heather: And it’s not always the most positive experience. Sometimes it is. There’s like people like Brennan Burchard, he’s phenomenal at it. Mm-hmm. Um, however, I bought a 10 K BN Burchard offer once, and I remember feeling like this was not, I don’t feel great about it anyways, so, but I love the offer. [00:17:00] Um, I, I digress here, but going to the back end.

    [00:17:03] Heather: Your back end selling starts before the talk. So we talked about you have two audiences. You have the ultimate for the, for the client audience or the people in there. And then you also have the client who booked you. So what I like to start out with is if you’re having a pre-call with an organization, you’re scoping.

    [00:17:22] Heather: What they’re looking for, and I’ve taught your group this before April, around how to lead these calls around how you actually start gathering information for your client to understand. She’s so

    [00:17:31] April: good at this, you guys. It’s ridiculous. I’m very, it’s like ninja skills. It’s insane. Sorry, go ahead.

    [00:17:38] Heather: Yes. Is where, no, it’s great.

    [00:17:39] Heather: Thank you. You can say more nicely. All time. Like she’s incredible at it.

    [00:17:42] April: It’s crazy. My clients are so powered

    [00:17:44] Heather: up. Oh yeah. Most people, they go into these inquiry calls like thinking like, I wanna, I wanna get the information so I can pitch. I wanna understand the scope and the context so I can offer a bigger transformation.

    [00:17:57] Heather: Mm-hmm. That’s how I go through it. So I ask the [00:18:00] questions I need for my specific talk, but I’m also asking rooted questions around what is the overall impact in this organization? What is the bigger picture for the people in the audience? I wanna know context, because context allows me. To paint a bigger picture for them because nine times outta 10, well probably 10, 10 times outta 10 most meeting organization, uh, organizers or HR professionals, when they book you, they’re filling a spot for a conference, right?

    [00:18:25] Heather: They’re not thinking, oh, your program would be amazing for our fleet of salespeople. Like they’re not really thinking there. Job, their scope is the meeting planner or the HR person to bring in people for this one training event. That’s like point blank. That’s what they are focused on. However, if you have a conversation with them and even nod the fact that this goes in alignment with your program, and in fact most of your clients you work with, you end up working with them on a more long-term basis through consulting or through your program licensed [00:19:00] out for them.

    [00:19:01] Heather: You can drop these breadcrumbs in your planning conversations with them on a very soft nod. And you normalize it by saying how you typically work with clients, which opens up the door often when you’re on site with them at an event. This is how I used to book speakers. We’d bring them in because we were auditioning them and we had spots to fill, but the ones who, our audiences went bananas over that we, you better believe I took them to lunch.

    [00:19:26] Heather: Ask more follow-up questions, and those often led to multiple six-figure contracts for those people consulting in an organization. So you never know what a lead, but you do not wait until that you step off stage to start selling. It starts way at the beginning, at the start of the relationship.

    [00:19:41] April:

    [00:19:41] April: Oh this is so powerful. And it, it’s a different thought process. It’s about being very proactive and not shooting from the hip and being in incre incredibly strategic about the steps in the time that you take in every moment that you have with a potential [00:20:00] organization, a potential buyer. A potential client, which again, Is of course the, the audience that’s listening.

    [00:20:08] April: But I really love in this conversation here, we’re honing in on the company side of it. And one of the things that you have said when you, you’ve come in and work with our clients that are licensing their products and selling their programs to companies, Is being a great listener, and this is not what we’re talking about on this show, but the feedback that our clients when they leave one of your master teachings in our ecosystem is, wow, I’m not being a good enough listener.

    [00:20:39] April: I haven’t been a good enough listener, or I haven’t really, like you were saying, understand what their bigger picture is. What words did you say? I think you said under. Understanding the greater mission of the organization, not just the micro mission of the spot they are trying to [00:21:00] fill as a speaker. I think that’s so powerful.

    [00:21:04] Heather: It, it’s critical, and I think this is the, there’s a lot of things that go into this, but one of the mis biggest misconceptions people have with speaking is that it’s your responsibility to stand up on a stage and grab the mic, and it’s your moment to share whatever’s on your heart. Whatever message, what do you wanna know?

    [00:21:20] Heather: And that works if you’re trying to become a motivational or inspirational speaker or there’s a lot of very successful. Athletes. Yeah. Or celebrities with a story. They have a story to share and that’s great, but again, we’re not speaking for just monetizing that time on stage. We’re business owners and there is a bigger mission we have, and it’s not just about making money.

    [00:21:40] Heather: I think this is the critical takeaway here to connect back with listening. The people that I work with, they genuinely. Want to help solve the problems they were put on this earth to solve. Yes, they know that what they have to do, there are people who need it, and they feel the sense of duty to teach it in a way that are gonna reach these people.

    [00:21:58] Heather: Now, the the [00:22:00] dichotomy that we have here is because we have to play expert role. We think that we have to know everything and therefore share everything with a prospect in front of us or people on stage. But your most powerful connection and sales tool. Is to listen. You need to understand what types of questions should you be asking so that people open up to you.

    [00:22:19] Heather: One of the most important parts of sales calls, whether it’s booking for a stage or you’re selling your licensing deal, is you need to understand what questions you can ask to help the person in front of you. Better understand their own problem. And if you take anything away from this interview, remind back that 10 seconds.

    [00:22:37] Heather: Because if you can learn how to do that, which is what I do all the time, that right there it become, you become the linchpin for that organization where they’re like, oh, you ha like we, you’re pointing out things that we weren’t even aware of, but yes. Organizations, they want to pay to solve the immediate pain, but what they really want is they want to solve the root problems.

    [00:22:59] Heather: The [00:23:00] problem is they do not understand what those are, and that’s where you come in.

    [00:23:03] April: Powerful. That is something that people don’t talk about enough and. I know that we’re, we’re super lucky to tap into your genius at our company and, uh, now our listeners can tap into you again. So, in summary, there are two types of speaking business models.

    [00:23:20] April: Number one, it’s the business of being a speaker, getting paid to. Speak very well known people understand this business model. I think people are scared of this business model and frankly, uh, that business model personally to me doesn’t sound great at all. That sounds not, especially as you were explaining how far in advance you were booked to speak.

    [00:23:40] April: My goodness. I, you know, for people that are really looking for, Time control and time freedom. That is not an ideal business model. And then we have this other one, which is the ecosystem of speaking and the offers that you sell on the backside. And you said the importance of having, not necessarily a [00:24:00] heartfelt motivational, the type of a talk, but an effective talk that’s connected to the offers and the solutions that you provide on the backside.

    [00:24:09] April: And then the process. This is so powerful you guys. Seriously, like you should re, you should rewind this and, and please share this episode on social media with you, with your friends. Maybe don’t share it with your, don’t share it with your competition. Just share it with your friends. Is. Listening in these conversations.

    [00:24:30] April: And can you say that one more time before we end? When, when you help them understand, finish

    [00:24:37] Heather: that for me. Can you understand the, the context of their problem? If you help them start seeing really what the environment is around their product and not just sitting in the pain of the annoyance. You, it’s a game changer because they start trusting you.

    [00:24:51] Heather: Because here’s what other people, here’s what your competition does is they go through and they ask the generic questions to unearth the, oh yeah, oh, you’re struggling with this. Yep. [00:25:00] Check the box. Oh yeah, you want this? Yep. Okay. Check. I have pain check, I have desire check. I have like ultimate timeframe.

    [00:25:07] Heather: Check. I have budget. So then they pitch back. Okay, cool. You said this, I, I think this, here’s what we should do. Point and done. But when you get good at asking questions, when you ask them some more contextual things, and I’m not saying go into their life story, like we’re not gonna go into their childhood trauma and like understand this, but they’re very pointed, intentional questions that I teach my clients.

    [00:25:28] Heather: It’s what we’re doing is we’re raising their level of awareness. To their own problem. And when you do that, you instantly put yourself in a different category from your competitor cuz they see you not as someone who’s just a wham bam, thank you ma’am speaker, where you’re coming in for a paid gig to get in and get out.

    [00:25:46] Heather: You actually care about the results and the impact your message has for their clients, their audience, their uh, employees, whoever their group is. When you demonstrate that by taking the time to ask pointed questions, [00:26:00] you become more valuable. Boom, mic

    [00:26:02] April: drop right there. Thank you so much for being back again on the show and for, uh, your giving first and all the ways that you do that, not only in our community, but I know in so many places that you do that online.

    [00:26:15] April: If you guys are not following Heather, please make sure that you are following her. And Cruz over to heather Heather, how are you working with clients right now? Outta curiosity, but if you’re listening to this in two years, guys, it might not be the same.

    [00:26:31] Heather: Go. The website’s the best place to keep up to date that you get the podcast, the hint of hustle.

    [00:26:35] Heather: That’s a great place to go right now if you’re like, Ooh, I like her fire. I’m like this every week on my show. Cheers. So hint of hustle where you can find me. Um, but I’m working with clients these days have really honed in and I focus primarily with the starting point for every successful speaking business, right?

    [00:26:49] Heather: Making money through speaking is having a damn good signature talk. So I’ve taken all of my training that I’ve been doing for the last five years plus, um, I’ve been speaking on stages for the last 20 years. But I’ve [00:27:00] taken all of my programs and have actually simplified it into one three Day Accelerator to help experts get their story, get their effective message, get everything out of their head into what we call a shitty rough draft.

    [00:27:12] Heather: So you have that version we can work from, you go deliver a beta talk. We get feedback, we work on it together. Um, but that is the best way, my favorite way that I’m working with clients right now. So you can find all about that on my website to see when the next time is coming up. And if we’re not teaching that live, there’ll be an alternative for that.

    [00:27:27] Heather: Yeah. But getting your signature talk down. That is the place to start.

    [00:27:30] April: You know, when you, uh, texted me that three day, day accelerator, I was like, oh my gosh, this is fire. That’s what all of us want. Right? To get solutions fast. Uh, so yes, I I I don’t have it. It makes me wanna have a three day accelerator.

    [00:27:44] April: Now I’m

    [00:27:45] Heather: gonna, it blew my mind. The, we just taught it a couple months ago and the, like it within a number of hours. We were getting posts from people that they were already having wins. They were already booking talks just from the micro time we had spent [00:28:00] together. It blew my mind. I’ve been working with clients for years, and the volume of transformations we’ve gotten out of this three day accelerator is just.

    [00:28:07] Heather: I’m like, all right, rinse and repeat. We’re just gonna keep doing it this way. Ah,

    [00:28:10] April: love it, love it, love it. Well, thank you so much for just being so rad and just being who you are and bringing all your smarts from all of your decades of experience in sales and working with companies and consulting companies, and teaching people how to kill it from the stage and build a profitable business on the backside.

    [00:28:26] April: We absolutely love you and appreciate you again. Um, all of the show notes will be found over We will include all of the links for this episode so you guys can connect with Heather. Thank you so much, my friend.

    [00:28:39] April: All right, you guys, let’s wrap up this episode here. Isn’t Heather awesome? Again, cruise over to We are big fans and, and as you know, I bring Heather in to work with our clients who are licensing their programs and trying to sell their courses to companies, organizations, and other small businesses. So, What are [00:29:00] your action items here? After this, what is the first thing you’re gonna do?

    [00:29:02] April: Oftentimes you can listen to a podcast episode and there’s so many great things and you’re not really sure where to start. So let’s start by asking yourself, this is this business model, so the speaking to sell your program’s model one that you’re interested in, one that you’ve been looking for the solution to.

    [00:29:20] April: You’ve been looking for for a while. If that answer is yes, then hey, let’s go ahead and take it to the next step. Do we have your products created? Do we have your courses, your trainings created in a way that they give people guaranteed transformation? So if you don’t, then you can cruise over to where we and we will help you build your transformational million dollar programs.

    [00:29:43] April: And then the third part of that is, If you are really interested in diving into learning this business model of speaking, unpacking your ideas outta your head, I don’t know about you, but I can help other people unpack their ideas. But when it comes to my own, especially when it comes to [00:30:00] my signature talk, it’s really hard for me to see it.

    [00:30:04] April: It’s like a lot of smoke in the air. It’s always harder for me to see my own things than it is. So I go to people like Heather. For help in this area. So Heather’s amazing and you can find her programs over at Heather Sager. It’s S A G E And of course, we will give all of the resources on the show notes for that and they can be found

    [00:30:28] April: This is episode number 290 and as we mentioned, it is a perfect pair with licensing your program to other companies and one of the many powerful tools that we have to sell your programs. So if that’s what you’re interested in, you are certainly in the right place. Thank you so much for tuning into this show.

    [00:30:49] April: I hope you got as much out of this as I know that I did. I always have notes after I leave listening to Heather speak. She is just a rockstar, as I’m sure you can tell. And, [00:31:00] cruza over on social media and. Tell Heather hello as well, assuring this episode. We’d really appreciate that. All right, you guys have an awesome week. I will talk to you next week. Cruise over on YouTube and you can see our video podcast as well now. Talk to you soon. Bye-bye.


    How To Sell Your Online Courses B2B with April Beach (Episode 289)

    How To Sell Your Online Courses B2B



    If you’re a course creator and you’re ready to take your business and profit to the next level think about the power of adding a couple more zeros at the end of the price that you sell your program for. In this episode and in this entire podcast series we are unpacking how to sell your course and training program to corporations agencies organizations and other entrepreneurs.
    This is a powerful nextlevel move that is underutilized. In this show, April Beach is unpacking the five most common ways to package your online course or training program for sale to other companies and corporations. Think about the power of taking the work that you’ve already done and instead of selling it to one person at a time, selling it to one buyer and allowing 100 or 1000 people to access it. That is the power of licensing your online course and programs to other companies and what we’re talking about in this show. 
    In this episode, we covered the five most common ways to model and package your training program for other companies to license and utilize. Additionally, you will hear a specific case studies and examples of clients of the Sweetlife and how they have licensed their courses to corporations. This episode is an extension of our course licensing series, and course licensing made simple. 
    At the end of this episode, you will: 
    1. Understand the five most common ways package your online course and license to other companies
    2. Learn how to sell your courses B2B fast
    3. Be able to choose which method would best suit your current business
    4. Blow your mind by opening up the door of possibilities that you didn’t know existed to build millions of dollars in revenue from courses you’ve already created.
    Resources mentioned: 
    Work with us to license your course to other companies:
    Apply to work with us specifically for Licensing, visit

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:



    [00:00:45] Hi guys, and welcome back to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast. I’m Beach and I am excited about this episode. We are continuing to dive into the power of selling your trainings, your courses, your programs, your [00:01:00] frameworks, and your content to corporations, organizations, other entrepreneurs, agencies, even educational institutions. This is a nexts level business move. In the last five episodes on this podcast have been completely dedicated to unpacking the steps.

    [00:01:17] To help you move forward in this area. So if you are an established coach, consultant, speaker, subject matter expert, if you are a trainer, if you have a proven process and you have been selling your proven process with the results one-on-one, even if you deliver it in a group format and you’re ready to bring your business and your profit to the next level.

    [00:01:42] Licensing is the fastest way to do that. I can personally speak to that and I do unpack a lot of stories here on the Sweet Life Podcast about how I have changed my business and my life, and I’ve been coaching other entrepreneurs to do it for 10 years through licensing.

    [00:01:55] So you are getting trusted, proven, true take it [00:02:00] to the bank business consulting here on the show, and this episode is like all of the others. All of the resources you can find for this episode can be found by visiting sweet life Click on the podcast and this is episode number 289. In addition to this, we have tons of actual, actual actionable resources for you to start moving in the direction of licensing.

    [00:02:27] So if you aren’t even sure what licensing is and you just want to dip your toe in, we have videos that you can watch. We have resources that you can download. If you’re ready to get started, but you’re not really even sure you wanna commit to it, please cruise over to licensing where I will bring you up to the launchpad of licensing and help you determine if this is a good move for your business or if you are ready to totally dive into licensing or if you have had a business already approach you.

    [00:02:56] Who wants to license your program? You don’t know how to price it, you [00:03:00] don’t know how to release it. You’re not exactly sure how to navigate this. Cruise over to sweet life and apply to work with us in our licensing accelerator or with me privately, and I will take you through the finish line here on this podcast.

    [00:03:14] We are diving into the five most common ways. To package and release your license material, your license program. There are tons of questions regarding licenses and certifications and train the trainer programs, and we’re breaking those apart here on the show. Some of you might be thinking, Hey, you know, I kind of wanna do a certification, but what does that relate to a license?

    [00:03:39] And what if I wanna other, you know, certify other people in my method? And what about a Train the trainer program? Those questions should be clarified for you today on this show to help you be able to move forward and determine which one is best for you in your particular business situation. So if that’s what you’re here for, if that sounds good.

    [00:03:57] That’s what we’re downloading on the show. [00:04:00] So let’s go ahead and dive right on in. There are five common ways that our clients typically. Package up their courses, trainings, and materials, and license them to other companies. By the way, a little sidebar here, if you don’t actually know what licensing is, let me tell you.

    [00:04:18] It’s like renting your programs for other companies to use internally or client facing. And definitely go back and listen to all the other podcast episodes that I have recorded for you on this. You can even cruise a to our website and there are tracks on licensing where you can binge how to get started with licensing.

    [00:04:36] So let me make sure I created that, that foundational understanding for you here. So when we’re talking about taking your programs and you’re thinking, well, how do I do this? What, what, what does this actually look like? Here are the five most common ways, and granted, we can create anything, but I’m just covering the five most common ways here.

    [00:04:52] The first one is what we call straight As. It is licensing. It’s just a straight license. What that means is that [00:05:00] you take, we’re gonna take an example. If you have a course that you have created and you are ready to add a lot of zeros behind what you’ve been selling that course for, we can literally allow for other organizations to distribute your course.

    [00:05:15] And so what that is, is it’s literally packaging up your material and allowing other organizations to access it. They may want to deliver it in their own learning management system. A lot of our clients work with big corporations and they have their own LMS. They have their own internal learning systems where they wanna bring your content in, or you may end up hosting it yourself, but either way, how it works is you have an awesome program you have an awesome course, a company. Once they’re people getting those results, you sign a contract, you agree upon the number of users and the some parameters about that, and I talked about parameters in other episodes, and you take the money and you move on. And what’s so beautiful about a straight license [00:06:00] agreement is that then they come back to renew it and after the content is delivered, you literally get to walk away.

    [00:06:06] So lemme give you a case study of that. My trainings and my programs are literally licensed by other entrepreneurs in small businesses in 13 countries. They line up once a year. I have a waiting list and I approve or disapprove. People to license my courses. I have eight to different courses and I license.

    [00:06:26] I approve them or disapprove them to license my courses. I send them a bill. I take the money and I don’t see them again for another two years until it’s time to license that renew their license. That’s how it works for me. So think about that and think about that case study and how that could work for you.

    [00:06:44] The second way where you can release and model and package your training for licensing is a license plus consulting. This is really beautiful, as long as it works with your life, that’s where we do exactly as I said, it’s the license release [00:07:00] of the materials. But you are the expert and a lot of companies want you to help their people facilitate the expertise that they are learning from you in the license program.

    [00:07:12] So adding consulting or workshops or facilitating groups may be something that you may also wanna choose to add on top of licensing your training program. What’s so powerful about that is that. It really helps for organizations to get even better use out of your content. Now, one of the things that we always tell our clients is that you don’t have to do this in the license term for their content.

    [00:07:38] For the content usually lasts longer than your agreement to consult, so just make sure that you are creating a consulting agreement. Where other people can actually come in and consult for you. It doesn’t always have to be just you. We wanna build your teams and scale you and that it is not un, it is not just ever ending, right?

    [00:07:58] The consulting contract and the [00:08:00] licensing agreement are usually two separate agreements. So the second way you could release your training and course for licensing is the license of the material, but then adding on some consulting and workshops on top of it. The third way that you may choose to do this is again, starting with just the licensing of the material.

    [00:08:19] But then also creating what we call Train the Trainer program, where you may then level up their own team members to facilitate and deliver your training. It’s not a certification, but you can create a Train the trainer guide to guide their. Leaders to guide people through your trainings. It can be just a delivery of the guide, or you can add in some consulting and coaching and some support for their leaders.

    [00:08:45] So the third way that you can package your material is the course, is the content or the material plus some form of a train the trainer. The fourth way where you can package up your programmer course for [00:09:00] licensing is with the license, like I talked about for the material and. A certification on top of that.

    [00:09:07] So a certification is where we certify that people understand how to seamlessly execute your methodology, and you validate that, and you verify that. So it’s a step above that. Train the trainer. It still starts with the licensing of the content, but then you may want to certify individuals within their organization.

    [00:09:30] Or within a group or a business who you actually say, Hey, this person is absolutely excellent and understands the processes in which to keep people, get people results according to my training. And you actually certify that. You can even add continuing education onto that and build a certification bigger, which we’ll talk about here in a second.

    [00:09:52] But that fourth way of releasing your program for licensing can be. The license of the training program and then [00:10:00] adding a certification program for either leaders or individuals that actually complete your training program. And the fifth way, and I don’t want you to get confused, we’re gonna flip those two words, whereas number four is the licensing is the bulk, the primary product and the certification would be secondary in number five.

    [00:10:19] The certification is primary and the licensing is secondary. Now, let me explain this to you in the best way possible that I can do here on this podcast. What it means that your primary product is a certification program in your course, in your training, in your method that you’re teaching. That is the primary product you’re selling.

    [00:10:41] And then those individuals who are certified in your method then may have the ability to use your training. And so we’d license your training to them with your product. So hopefully that made sense. I obviously consult people on this [00:11:00] in much more details when we’re building this in your business, but I, I’m trying to simplify this for you.

    [00:11:05] Number four, option is we start with the licensing first. Usually releasing it to a corporation, an organization, university’s agencies, and we may certify individuals that are their employees. In your process. Whereas the fifth way is we first certify the in, certify the individuals, and then we allow for those certified individuals to license your content and deliver it within their services.

    [00:11:34] So the fifth way and the fourth way that they seem the same, but they they are not the same. They’re two separate business models. One is primary and one is secondary. So I wanted to record this show for you because out of all the questions I answer about licensing, number one, everybody wants to know how to price it, and I’ve talked about it in the other episodes, exactly the steps that we lead up to in understanding how to price your program.

    [00:11:57] This one is, How do I actually [00:12:00] package it? What? What am I giving them? What does that look like? And so let me recap the five most common ways. Now, there are many decisions within each one of these methods that we can not get into in today’s show. If you would like cruise over to sweet life, jump into our programs that I will tell you about all those other intricacies and help you get clear on them.

    [00:12:22] But for today, We are just recapping the five most common ways for you to get your wheels spinning on how you can release your content. Number one is the content itself straightaway license your content. Thank you. See you later. Bye. I’ll see you in whatever timeframe when you wanna renew it, and it is a beautiful thing.

    [00:12:41] The second way is licensing your content, but including consulting or support or facilitation, whether it’s for you from you directly. Or one of your team members. The third way is the licensing of the program or the process, and then building Train the trainer support on [00:13:00] top of that for people that may be facilitating that within a larger organization.

    [00:13:04] The fourth way is licensing your content. You’re training your course to a company and then certifying people who have completed that training within the organization. And then the fifth way is building the certification first. So first we certify people in the method, in your course, in your process, and then on the backside of that, we give those individuals the ability to license out your training because they are certified in your amazing genius method because you’re so amazing.

    [00:13:39] Ah, that is the summary of today’s show. I’ve tried to keep these shows very short and simple for you. I would love to help you move into the n Nick’s phase of adding ones and twos and zeros behind your sales on your established courses. Trainings, programs, [00:14:00] processes and methods through licensing it to other organizations, companies, small businesses, large businesses, mid-size businesses, agencies, nonprofit organizations.

    [00:14:13] I think I already said that the sky is the limit. Basically, what I want you to realize in the summary of all of this is there’s a lot of businesses out there that don’t have what you’ve created. Most people don’t know the value of their content and their trainings in companies. They don’t wanna create these themselves.

    [00:14:31] It costs them money, and it takes them time to try to create things that you have already had, that you’ve already created and built, and you’ve already tested your systems. It saves companies money to buy what you have rather than build it themselves, and that is the shift I want you to understand with the potential of where we can take your consulting coaching business to the next level through licensing.

    [00:14:58] It’s perfect for those of you guys who are [00:15:00] speakers, your advi, your advisors, or your subject matter experts as well. If you want more information on this, Cruise over to sweet life Just click on the licensing button and we have tons of resources there for you. And if you just wanna jump into licensing launchpad, you can do that right now by visiting licensinglaunchpad.Com and I will be there with three short videos at totals like 43 minutes max.

    [00:15:27] And the worksheets to unpack your, your genius out of your brain and move you forward into licensing. This is episode number 289 here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast, and we have some amazing experts coming up in the next few weeks on the show. I’m so excited to bring in these powerful people.

    [00:15:45] We’re talking about selling licensing programs, creating sales pitches, sales deck, how to close million dollar licensing deals, and then we’re diving into brand new series with. Other amazing well vetted experts here coming up on the show. So please [00:16:00] make sure you click subscribe and you share the show with your friends. We really appreciate you for, for you for being here, and I will talk to you guys next week. Bye-bye for now.


    Course Licensing Made Simple: A Guide for Consultants, Speakers and Coaches with April Beach (Episode 288)

    Course Licensing Made Simple: A Guide for Consultants, Speakers and Coaches



    You’ve created the outline, outlined the modules, designed the curriculum and built  and launched the course. Now what? 
    Start Selling Your Online Course To Businesses. In this episode, we’re going to discuss some key factors that can help you decide if selling your courses directly or licensing them to other businesses is the best choice for you. We’ll cover the advantages and disadvantages of each option and how licensing might affect your work-life balance and personal goals. Our aim is to help you make a decision that aligns with the life you want to live.
    Additionally, we’ll explore how to determine if you’re ready to create a new pricing plan for licensing your courses and understand the potential benefits and drawbacks of different strategies. We’ll also talk about the importance of building strong relationships with other businesses and networking to ensure your B2B licensing is successful. We’ll share some practical tips on finding the right clients to collaborate with, so you can feel confident and prepared as you embark on your B2B licensing journey.


    At the end of this episode, you’ll walk away with:

        1. A clearer understanding of whether B2B licensing is the right path for your business
        2. Actionable steps to prepare your programs for a successful licensing transition
        3. Strategies to build a strong network of partners and clients
    Don’t miss this insightful conversation designed to help you make informed decisions for the future of your business.
    Resources mentioned: 
    Get the plan and get started licensing your course, training, process, method, framework or content to companies at
    Apply to work with us specifically for Licensing, visit

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:45] Hi everybody, and welcome back to another episode here on the Sweetlife Entrepreneur and Business podcast. I’m April Beach, your host. Thank you so much for spending some time with me today. This is episode number 288 and it is jam packed with [00:01:00] insights for you to make strategic decisions for your business and your future.

    [00:01:05] Today we are talking about licensing made simple, and we’re diving into how you as an expert, can actually scale your business exponentially by taking the courses and the trainings that you have already created and licensing them to corporations, organizations, and other entrepreneurs. But we’ve been talking about this for a couple weeks here on the show.

    [00:01:27] As you know, if you’ve listened to other episodes, I started licensing my own training 14 years ago. I’ve been teaching entrepreneurs how to license their trainings for the last 10 years, but even before that, I started teaching coaches, consultants, and experts how to create their online courses way back in 2006, 7 and 8.

    [00:01:48] And so this topic that we’re talking about is not new, even though it seems to becoming new because it’s so oversaturated. Meaning course creation. Course creation coaches, [00:02:00] because it is a profitable way to build your business. Courses in trainings, in extracting your expertise from your brain and scaling your business through these types of business models is a very powerful way.

    [00:02:14] We all know that you have done the work, you have created the outlines. You’ve created your method. You have created your courses. You have taught people in your framework. And now what? What is that next step for you? That next step is content licensing. That is allowing other businesses to distribute your trainings and utilize your programs, but is that really the right fit for you?

    [00:02:40] And as I mentioned, we’ve been talking about this a lot here on the show. We’ve talked about the steps to licensure program, strategies for licensing, strategies for pricing, and as a side note, All of the resources we have for you are available wherever you are in this licensing process cruise over to sweet life [00:03:00] and you can tap into all of our licensing resources and use them for yourself.

    [00:03:06] But in this show, I wanted to have a little bit of a fireside chat with you about who this is really for, who is in a position for licensing, because this is a big choice. I was just meeting with a new client yesterday. And talking to her about the process that we take businesses through to, to have them licensed in, in seller training courses to corporations.

    [00:03:31] And she said to me, she said, what if I changed my mind? And that is a really, really great question because unlike when you may have launched a course and you realize you might not wanna do it anymore, you can just stop selling that course. When we talk about licensing, We are delivering your intellectual property, your content, your trainings to other corporations to use, and you can’t take it back.

    [00:03:56] And besides licensing a course [00:04:00] creation, if you and I have hung out any virtual time together, you know, I am a second generation lifestyle entrepreneur, which means that I design companies around lifestyle, not lifestyle around companies. And so it’s important just as if we’re talking about any other business model.

    [00:04:17] That we have this conversation about what licensing will actually look like for you and your lifestyle and for your business moving forward. So in this episode, we’re making licensing very simple, and we’re coming back to the first and foremost important questions that you should be answering for yourself is, is licensing the right choice for your business?

    [00:04:42] And so if you’re ready for that, That’s what we’re gonna go ahead and dive into. I’m gonna share with you the pros and cons of licensing. I’m gonna tell you what your life looks like in having a productive, profitable licensing business model, and I wanna help you unpack whether or not you are ready to move forward into this.[00:05:00]

    [00:05:00] Licensing is not new. It’s been around forever, lot longer than the whole online course creation boom. But if you are. A keynote speaker, if you are a corporate consultant, if you are a subject matter expert and you have processes that you have taught people, and especially for those of you that already have relationships with established businesses, Licensing is a very powerful way to utilize the content and the trainings that you have already created and not have to sell them to one person, but sell them to one company, and that company distributes them a hundred times or a thousand times.

    [00:05:42] Imagine the profit piece in that for you. One sale for a thousand seats. Instead of having to sell your training a thousand times for that same amount of money, that’s what we’re diving into today. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and do it. You can find all of the show notes by visiting sweet life [00:06:00]

    [00:06:00] Again, this is more of a casual fireside chat, and you can always message us your questions by connecting with me on LinkedIn at April Beach. Okay, let’s talk about. What does it look like when you are licensing your courses and trainings? What does that, operational, agenda look like for you on a weekly basis?

    [00:06:20] So the first consideration I want you to think about is selling direct versus licensing. So the difference is currently if you are a course creator, if you are a consultant or a strategist, you are probably selling your programs one-to-one. Now I’m not talking about delivering your programs one-to-one.

    [00:06:39] You know, I teach and we talk about how to create programs at scale here all the time on the show and in the Sweet Life company we’re talking about, it’s still an individual sale. You may be delivering it group, but you’re still selling it to one person at a time. Even if it’s on a webinar and there’s a hundred people there, even if you are [00:07:00] speaking from a stage and there’s a thousand people there, even if you are running ads and you’re hitting 10,000 people, you’re still only selling to one person at a time.

    [00:07:09] One person has to go through the process to put in their credit card information and pay you. And so that is the current state of a scaling company that’s serving individuals. You, again, may be serving them in a group atmosphere, but you’re still selling to them one-on-one. And so the question that we bring up and why licensing is so powerful is because.

    [00:07:34] We can change that. We can take you out of that launch mode if you had been in there with that enrollment, those sales closers, and we can move you into a place where we’re actually selling the same program, but more people are accessing it within each transaction. A few episodes ago, I made a statement and I’ve received actually so many comments [00:08:00] about this statement, and I wanna, so I wanna say it again because I think that this simplifies the licensing process, and that’s what we’re talking about here.

    [00:08:08] Licensing made simple. So when we talk about licensing and releasing your training, we are taught, we are not changing the product, okay? So we don’t change the product. We change the buyer. Let me say that again. The product or the training of the course doesn’t change. The buyer does. That’s the pivot in licensing.

    [00:08:29] It’s a very, very simple pivot. So the first consideration I want you to think about for yourself is how do you love your current business operations? Do you love the way you sell? Do you still want to work with people in your group consulting program, in your mastermind, in your courses? You can still totally do this.

    [00:08:48] And still license your trainings, but that’s the difference of the sales process. So the selling process of licensing versus selling to individuals is a [00:09:00] big differentiating factor in what I want you to consider. The next consideration that I wanna review with you is your work life. I hate the word balance, so I’m not gonna use that.

    [00:09:11] We’ll call it work life flow. Work life cadence. What does that look like to you? So currently, as you are working with your clients, What does a typical week look like to you? Are you still consulting people? Do you love consulting people? I was just meeting with a client who is joining one of our accelerators here soon, and she was very honest and I loved this, and she said, you know, I just really don’t love coaching.

    [00:09:41] I’m very good at what I do. I’m very good at my area of expertise. I love teaching. I love implementing systems into other businesses, but I just really don’t love coaching. And you know what? I think there are a lot of course graders and coaches out there that actually just really don’t love coaching.

    [00:09:58] Some of them do, [00:10:00] some of them don’t. So I wanted to bring that up because it was pretty fresh when somebody said that to me, and I think there may be some of you who could relate to that, or I wanted to at least pose that question. Do you love the way that you are working with your clients, whether it’s one-on-one or whether it’s in a group setting?

    [00:10:18] And if you have on-demand programs, do you love that cadence of selling one-to-one? Especially with Evergreen programs, we can sell them to companies and just change your weekly cadence. So the first question is, is are you utilizing your strengths as an individual? Some of you love to teach, some of you love to speak, some of you love to be more hands-on in the trenches with clients.

    [00:10:47] What does your strength align with best? Because when we’re working in the scale side of working with clients, offering group programs, those [00:11:00] strengths are utilized. But when we’re working in the licensing side, it can actually make it totally hands off. So I wanted to give you some case studies here about how this can apply to your business.

    [00:11:12] I’m gonna share with you my very own case study. So with, I have a few different programs that I license with my easiest, most simple licensing package. This is how I do it. I have a series of eight online courses that are available. And companies line up. I only release them one month out of the year. I have a wait list.

    [00:11:34] They get the programs, they get the trainings. I package them up, deliver them the trainings. They pay me my money, they sign their contract, and I don’t see them again until it’s time to renew. It is really hands off for me. I only work at that one month a year, and even within that month, it’s the month of November and I usually take off the third and fourth week for the holidays here.

    [00:11:55] So it’s very, very little work for me, and I’ve designed it that way [00:12:00] strategically. So what does that look like for you? How do you want your work life to flow? What do you want that cadence to be for the next five or 10 years of your life? What does that look like to you? Consideration. Number three I want you to think about is your pricing and revenue model.

    [00:12:17] Okay? So although we all love what we do, I know we all love it. We’re not in business as a hobby. We need to be profitable. How profitable is based on your own personal and professional and business goals. But when we are moving from a course individual sales model to a licensing bottle, you need to ask yourself your level of readiness for that.

    [00:12:40] Have you created the structures in place to deliver programs in bulk? That is really, really important. Some very specific case studies. The average first sale contract for my clients, we’re talking first. Licensing contract sale is anywhere from 30 to $80,000, so it [00:13:00] comes out to like $56,000 is the average.

    [00:13:03] And when you were getting a check from somebody for $56,000 for the same modules in the same course that you were selling to individuals for maybe 500 bucks, there is a, there’s a greater level of responsibility, let’s just be honest, right? So there’s more money on the table, there’s more responsibility.

    [00:13:21] And is that something that you’re okay with? Listen, I have the bestest friends. That’s improper English I know that have the most simple lives. And they make like 80,000 bucks a year, and they’re as happy as claims because they live a very simple life. Money doesn’t buy happiness. I know I might get some comments from you guys about that.

    [00:13:45] That’s not what buys happiness, right? What buys happiness is you taking a second. To ask yourself, what feeds your soul? Where do you wanna be? Who do you wanna be there with? What do you wanna be doing? What do you want that cadence to flow like [00:14:00] if selling a half a million dollar program in having sales conversations and closing deals, Makes you uncomfortable.

    [00:14:10] You will never sell your license program. The thing about licensing is you have to have a level of confidence in humble ego. You have to know that you are really good at what you do, and you have to know that the results that you deliver are gonna be awesome for the licensee and their end user. If you’re not sure of that, you could go down the road and work really hard to try to license your programs.

    [00:14:38] But if your mindset isn’t right, if you don’t know and believe that your program can change something within their organization or help their customers or help their students, or help their clients, You are never going to sell it. And I, you know, I’m not here to sell you on the, the business model of licensing.

    [00:14:56] I mean, the, the numbers are enticing [00:15:00] enough. The case studies of my clients who’ve had successful licensing programs, they’re the, they speak for themselves. It’s no sweat off my back if you don’t license your things or not. My job, my conviction as a business mentor and leader. Is to open up the possibilities for you so that you can make the best choices for yourself.

    [00:15:22] So I wanna be really honest when we’re talking about a revenue model, are you ready to walk into closing million dollar deals? I have a client right now who has an A $1.5 million deal that she has been negotiating, and that is for an eight module course. Okay, so you need to decide if that’s something that totally lights you up and you’re like, yes, let’s go for it.

    [00:15:47] This is gonna be amazing. That is you and only you that can decide that. So that’s consideration number three. And then consideration number four is who do you wanna work with? So it’s, it’s networking, it’s [00:16:00] collaborating. What type of people do you want in your sphere? Because when we move into licensing, we’re moving into much more of a networking and a partnership type of a business model We are having.

    [00:16:12] You go to incredible events. And shake hands and meet just amazing people who are part of these organizations that you can create great change for. Do you wanna connect with those people? Do you wanna hang out with those people? Are they people that would light you up, that can bring you up to the next level?

    [00:16:31] Are they the type of people that you wanna spend your business time with? Because. The significance of these strong partnerships is very important when we’re talking about licensing. Your network plays a very powerful role in selling your programs, and so we want to make sure that you have, the confidence in the joy to spend time with those people.

    [00:16:57] Tell me if you’ve ever had this happen to [00:17:00] you, where a client really, really wants to work with you and they’re willing to pay you whatever it is that you ask, but your personalities just don’t jive. And you know that if you take this client’s 10, 20, $50,000, that you’re pretty much gonna be stuck with them and they’re a big pain in the ass.

    [00:17:22] Okay? Just be honest. I keep it real here on the show. If working with companies and organizations and corporations are not the people that you wanna work with, I’m not saying they’re a pain in the ass. I was just using that as an example. Don’t send me a message about that. But if they aren’t the people that really light you up, Then this might not be the right fit for you.

    [00:17:43] So I wanted to share that example with you so that you can really think about this. So let’s kind of do a little bit of a recap. This is just a shorter fireside chat conversation between you and me. And again, we have a million resources for you. You can get started and just dive in with [00:18:00] no commitment at all to our licensing launchpad.

    [00:18:03] Where I’ll take you through the first steps of deciding how you wanna licensing and who you wanna sell it to. It’s a powerful new little training program that we have and, and you’re not gonna get stuck there. And if you’re thinking about it at all, I would highly recommend moving into licensing launch pattern that direction so that you can start filling out these waters.

    [00:18:24] But between me and you, I wanna be really honest about what this. Lifestyle looks like. It’s very, very, very easy for me. I love the way I set up my licensing programs. My clients love the way they have set up their licensing programs, but the thing about licensing that I mentioned in the beginning is once you release it, You can’t take it back.

    [00:18:47] And so I wanna make sure, like with any business model we talk about here on the show, whether it’s an MRR or a Mastermind or a hybrid program or a course or a membership, you know, especially in membership, cuz you get stuck in those [00:19:00] babies for a long time. I wanna make sure licensing is, is really gonna float your boat, right?

    [00:19:04] And you might not know it until you dive into it, so feel free to take. The next couple of steps here and dive into licensing with us. We have all of the resources available for you You can click on licensing, and we have everything from a beginner licensing training called Licensing Launchpad to a free 45 minute in depth, like unpacking your licensing ideas and sharing with you the ways that you can package your program.

    [00:19:35] All the way to working with me privately in applying to work in our accelerator where we even give you everything down to the templates and contract. Wherever you are in this process, I’m a big advocate for it because I love it, but I will never be one of those business coaches that tells you what you should do.

    [00:19:51] Nobody should be telling you that. So this particular episode, I really wanted to record for us so that you and I can have this kind of behind the [00:20:00] scenes chat. Because we have done so many episodes on how to license, who to sell to, how to price it, all these things, right? And I never wanted to come across here on the show where I’m saying, you have to do this because that is not the case.

    [00:20:12] You don’t have to do anything. You can create any business model. You can create any offer. You can work with anybody you want. You can create whatever change of whatever life you want. This is just another option that is the most profitable. I will say that it’s the most profitable and it scales experts faster than any other way I’ve ever seen, but it doesn’t mean it’s right for you.

    [00:20:34] So I wanted to sit here and create this little fireside chat message with you and introduce you to the concept of licensing, but also have a real come to Jesus together on whether or not this is the right fit for you and who thrives in a licensing environment and, and who, who might actually struggle.

    [00:20:51] If you don’t know that, you know that the program that you have created is absolutely amazing, then maybe we need to take a couple of steps [00:21:00] back. We need to maybe apply. The process of transformational program design that we teach to create your courses. Maybe we need to take a few steps back, and if that’s where you are, that’s awesome.

    [00:21:12] But if you know you have amazing programs or if you’re already consulting corporations, or if you’re already a speaker, licensing is a beautiful next step. For exponential profitability that is just sitting there on the table for the taking. And so that is our little fireside chat today. Feel free to message me on LinkedIn with any questions you have about this.

    [00:21:34] I have a live show over there as well, and we talk about licensing all the time. I’m at April Beach on LinkedIn. And you can also check us out on our new YouTube podcast and see behind the scenes. I do a lot of talking with my hands here in all my podcast notes, which is so funny on my, on my chicken scratch paper here next to me.

    [00:21:57] But, I’m so glad you’re here and I really appreciate you, [00:22:00] and I hope you felt like, although it wasn’t a step-by-step training that I usually do, I hope you felt like this was informative. My goal was to help you determine whether or not this is a good avenue for you to dive into and to share with you the resources when you’re ready.

    [00:22:15] Again, those can be or you can dive right into and I will be waiting in there for you with worksheets and a step-by-step guide to get you started. Thank you so much for tuning into today’s show, and I will talk to you next week where I will be unpacking the five ways.

    [00:22:36] To package your license program. We’ll be talking about licenses and certifications and train the trainer programs. We’re kind of getting into some really cool dorky licensing scaling stuff next week. So if you’re interested in that, listen to that episode too. All right, I’ll talk to you soon. Bye-bye.[00:23:00]


    6 Steps To License Your Course, Training, Program to Companies with April Beach (Episode 287)

    6 Steps To License Your Course, Training, Program to Companies



    Who is this episode for? 

    This show is perfect for coaches, speakers, consultants, and experts looking to expand their reach, generate passive income, and build their brand through licensing their courses, training programs, or other intellectual property.
    Licensing might sound complicated, but trust us – it’s not. As industry leaders, we’re here to guide you every step of the way, helping you create your first licensed package and transform your expertise into a thriving, scalable, and impactful business. So, what are you waiting for? Embrace the power of licensing and watch your business soar to new heights!


    At the end of this episode, you will:

          1. Know the 6 steps to get started to license your program
          2. Understand strategic decisions to be made about licensing your program
          3. Know what to do when you still want to directly sell the course you are licensing
          4. Know where to find companies to buy your course or training 
          5. Learn about trademark and copyright protection 
          6. Have resources to get started
    Resources mentioned: 
    Get the plan and get started licensing your course, training, process, method, framework or content to companies at
    Also referenced in this weeks episode is last weeks episode -Unlock the Power of Licensing Your Course, Training or Content To Companies
    Apply to work with us specifically for Licensing, visit

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:45] Hi everybody, and welcome back to the show. This is episode number 287 and we’re continuing our teachings and strategy and conversations on licensing. We’ve been diving in for the last couple of weeks on how to take the [00:01:00] programs you’ve already created, how to make more money with the trainings and frameworks and methods and systems and processes that you have already worked hard and invested your time and money to create into scale your reach and your profit.

    [00:01:14] Absolutely exponentially blow you out of the water. Content licensing is a way to do it. It’s a way I’ve done it. I’ve licensed my courses and programs to businesses in 13 countries starting in 2009, and I’ve been teaching other entrepreneurs and experts to do it for over a decade. In fact, we have a complete licensing step-by-step project plan.

    [00:01:34] And we work with our clients very personally, including giving them all of the contracts, all of this sales processes, and everything they need to license their program successfully. If you would like to apply to work with us, cruise over to Click on licensing and you can apply to work with us in Amplify.

    [00:01:54] Amplify is our accelerator. We work with experts just like you to speed up the process [00:02:00] and get your content licensed to other companies as fast as possible so you can receive all the benefits that we talked about in last week’s episode 286.

    [00:02:10] If you’re not really sure and you’re not totally ready to dive into licensing yet, maybe you came across this episode and you haven’t even heard of licensing before. We have a great starting place for you. It’s called Licensing launchpad. You can go to licensing It is a short and powerful training that’s gonna take you for the, through the first three steps of licensing your program, understanding what you have, understanding the value of it, and we’re actually giving you an entire cheat sheet of what the top 10 industries are looking for right now in exact programs like yours. So you can grab that by going over to licensing

    [00:02:52] All right, so as I said, we’re talking about licensing. Let me give you a brief definition of what it is. Licensing is [00:03:00] like renting your programs, trainings, processes, methods, and frameworks to other companies to use. Okay, so a couple of things. Let me make sure that I am clarifying. Number one, it doesn’t have to be this totally done program. You don’t have to have a built in, have a bow on it in Kajabi or some other online portal somewhere. It can just be your outline of your process and your training from a group coaching program, from things that you’ve been doing with maybe other businesses or other people one-on-one.

    [00:03:31] It doesn’t have to be an online course. It can absolutely be an online course, an online training, an established certification. There are so many things that we can license, but I want you, if you haven’t ever thought about this, to think about all the trainings and processes and programs that you’ve created that other companies can benefit from using, they may even be your competition. Licensing is a way where we can move you from B2C into b2b, and we can turn your competition into your [00:04:00] clients. It’s a beautiful thing in whatever your objective for licensing is. So I wanna let you know that that is the gist of what we’re talking about.

    [00:04:08] We’re talking about renting it to other companies and renting it for two uses. Number one, they might wanna use it as an internal training for their teams. Maybe you’re a sales expert or a marketing expert. Maybe you’re a communication specialist and you teach teams how to communicate. Maybe you teach equity, diversity, and inclusion, and you can help HR departments.

    [00:04:27] Maybe you just teach employees to think entrepreneurially. Okay, so we use them for internal benefits in leveling up of skills. We also love programs. We, I should say, companies also love programs that lend to the quality of life, lend to health and wellness. So if you teach meditation or weight loss, or how to reduce anxiety or how to communicate with your spouse, Those are also great programs to tee up for licensing, and companies are also looking for client [00:05:00] facing programs so they can actually sell with their own programs or augment their own programs, so hopefully that gets your wheels spinning.

    [00:05:06] Again, we have so many resources for you wherever you’re at in this process, if you’re just learning about it. If you’ve been trying to work on this. Or if you’ve already had a company that’s approached you and want to license your content, you are absolutely in the right place and we are here to link arms with you and equip you. So again, go to, click on the tab for licensing and all the resources for wherever you are are there.

    [00:05:30] Now let’s go ahead and dive into the six steps to actually license your program. Now we have an entire project plan and obviously, Okay, this is like Captain obvious. There are numerous steps under these steps, but the purpose of this is to give you a high level understanding of the process of actually going through and identifying your content and actually releasing it for license.

    [00:05:55] All right, so if you’re ready for that, again, this is episode number 287. All of the show [00:06:00] notes can also be found by visiting our website. Let’s dive in. Step number one is to do exactly like I had just explained in that intro. I want you to identify your unique intellectual property and what you already have to sell.

    [00:06:14] This could be lessons, videos, quizzes, systems, processes, methods, SOPs. It could be short trainings, it could be written content, it could be an entire program. Many of our clients will license out an entire eight module program or a series of trainings or courses for other companies to use. What do you have that’s unique to you that has been proven to get people results in the past?

    [00:06:47] That’s step number one. And with that, within step number one, I want you to ask yourself, what do I wanna do with my business future? The reason why I want you to ask this is because I want you to [00:07:00] understand how you wanna work with clients in the future. Are these things that you plan to still deliver directly through your own business?

    [00:07:07] Or are you willing to totally give these away for exclusivity for another company to distribute? Guess what? You can do whatever you want. You can still license and them to other companies and continue to sell products on your own. There are some things we wanna talk about with that as far as ethics and integrity that we are not getting into, but you get to choose your own adventure.

    [00:07:29] So step number one is identifying what you have. And it doesn’t have to be a big program, it can be a smaller training. And, and then step number two is identify what you want to be known for in the future and what you wanna do with that. That’s step number one. Step number two is you need to protect your ip.

    [00:07:48] All right? We need to make sure that your intellectual property, your processes, your thoughts, everything is copyright protected, your trademark protected, and you wanna go through and make sure you’re getting the legal protection for [00:08:00] your course, for your trainings. It’s very important that we protect your content and we don’t wanna license your content until that is done.

    [00:08:10] So step number two is making sure everything is buttoned up the way it should be to protect your ip. Step number three, you get to decide what I call the parameters of release. Okay. These are like your rules for how you wanna allow another company or an organization to share and distribute your materials, including how long do they get it for?

    [00:08:34] How many people have access to it, what are the fees? Are you gonna collect royalties? What is the actual rule on the distribution of your training? Does a company have exclusivity to it or not? Is it branded or is it white labeled? Step number three is deciding what with this program or multiple programs, what the parameters are in, in what you’re okay with in [00:09:00] the distribution of it.

    [00:09:01] And if you see the process I’m taking you through, you’re gonna get much more clarity on making the decisions in step number three, after you’ve decided in step one how, how much you wanna keep distributing this for yourself, right? If you wanna keep it exclusively in, you know, sell it also, then you’re gonna have tighter parameters on what you allow other companies to do.

    [00:09:23] But if you are, like in one of my instances, I white label. The sky’s the limit. I let companies make as much money as they can off it because I no longer license those or sell those programs myself. Right, so you get to think about what you want for the future regarding a particular product or program that you’re considering as we go through this.

    [00:09:45] So again, step number one, identify what you have and identify your long-term business goals. Step number two, make sure they’re protected and you’re covering your legal ars. Step number three is identifying the parameters around relief. Step number four is actually [00:10:00] selling it. So going out there promoting your course or training program to potential licensees in various marketing channels like networking, like speaking at events.

    [00:10:11] Many of our clients, the primary way that is so powerful to sell is. Presenting and being a speaker in, in meeting with other businesses and being in masterminds and collaborating with other companies. So these industry specific events to create awareness and social marketing channels like LinkedIn.

    [00:10:30] Also, I want you to identify that in this selling process that you have decided your parameters, which we talked about, and that’s what we call your licensing program out of the box. But with this being said, you can also choose that after you have a discussion with a potential buyer about your parameters that you may also want to consider.

    [00:10:57] Altering some of it or adding some other [00:11:00] things to it to meet that company’s needs. So I’m always a big advocate of listening to what the company wants in terms of the solution that you deliver, understanding what their needs are and what the end of their results and mission is and what. That company is really looking for as far as a benefit from your program.

    [00:11:19] And then you may be willing to be outside of the box, may be willing to edit some of your parameters to help them meet their needs. And then the third part of the selling is signing the agreement and collecting your money. So the sales process is totally different than the overkill of massive funnels and online marketing that you’re probably used to.

    [00:11:39] It’s actually very simple. And so this process, after you’ve identified your parameters, you can choose if you wanna just sell it as it is, you’re not willing to do any edits or altering, or if you want to even increase the value of your program, maybe by adding some consulting or coaching with your licensed product as well.

    [00:11:58] Step number, I’m going through my, [00:12:00] my list here. Step number five is actually onboarding and delivering your program. So you need to have a really great system for doing this, and I want you to think about going through the process of just creating a seamless system and communication channels. So when you give this program to another company to distribute, it is off and away like a bird flying away.

    [00:12:20] You have your money, they are a happy company, and deciding whether or not you’re gonna continue to provide ongoing consulting or support. So step number five is the onboarding and delivery of your program. If your program is still housed in your L M S, so if you have your program still in your kajabi and you’re licensing it, but you’re still housing it, or if they are completely taking it and distributing it in their own channels, that is gonna change your step number five delivery method.

    [00:12:52] And then step number six is compliance and monitoring. Okay, so each of you have a different brand integrity and [00:13:00] you may find that you wanna update your materials, you may wanna add to it. And so compliance or updating or continuing to provide them with, with marketing support and marketing, swipe copy, those are all things that fit into step number six, as well as renewing the license agreement for ongoing.

    [00:13:19] Opportunities for you to make more money. So let me go through these five steps of actually licensing and releasing your program. Excuse me, six steps. We usually have more, but I really wanna simplify this here for you. Step number one is identifying what you have in order to, align with your future.

    [00:13:41] Step number two is protecting your ideas, making sure that your legal abduction in a row. Step number three is deciding the parameters of release. How long did they get it for? Is it exclusive? Where does it live? Like is it in your LMS or their lms? What is the branding? Are you taking royalties? All of those things are actually seven different [00:14:00] levers, so we work with our clients to determine the pricing.

    [00:14:03] Step number three for you here is just understanding. What that kind of outside of the box program is that you wanna start with in the parameters of that. Step number four is selling it, promoting it, connecting with people, signing the contract, and being willing to maybe even listen if they want you to add coaching or consulting on top of that and adding it to, to another agreement where you can support this company.

    [00:14:24] And then step number five is the actual delivery and onboarding, which will be dictated by where the program lives in step number six or renewals in continuing to support the clients as far as getting them to resign the license agreement. But also you are gonna wanna make sure that you have any sort of check points in place if you need to update the content for any sort of reason.

    [00:14:49] And this is actually a very simple process, especially if you already have established trainings and programs that you have created before. It seems a [00:15:00] little overwhelming because I, I know you haven’t been here before. I know you haven’t done this before and that’s why you’re here listening to me and watching me talk with my hands on the video.

    [00:15:12] I have done this before, but I’ve also been in the place where I did it the first time and I had no freaking clue what I was doing. I know what it feels like to be on the other end of a sales call with a corporation that wants to license your material and feel like you’re a total fish out of the water and that you don’t deserve to be there.

    [00:15:33] But I figured that out and I created a step-by-step process that I’ve been teaching for over a decade. Companies like you, and I’m telling you as a girl that did not receive a college degree, okay, that has lived on my own since I was 13, who has started over seven different companies, never having any idea what I was doing with any of them.

    [00:15:56] I am telling you that if I can do this, You [00:16:00] can do this, I promise you that process is not that difficult and companies are out there right now looking for programs like yours to help increase the skills in the systems, in the sales, and even provide SOPs that provide seamless scalability to increase time and also to pour into their clients for benefits and lifestyle and wellness.

    [00:16:27] As well as they’re constantly looking for programs to augment their other forward facing programs. An example of that is if you are a marketing expert and there’s a branding company out there that might not be as great at teaching video marketing as you are. Great. They’re the first ones to reach out to license your expert.

    [00:16:48] How to make great marketing videos to a branding agency that isn’t an expert at that. It’s in their benefit. And I want you to hear me on this because this is a mindset shift. It [00:17:00] is in a company’s benefit to pay you for what you’ve created over taking the time and spending the money to try to create it themself.

    [00:17:10] Okay. Especially if you are licensing to smaller established businesses and, and these are businesses with under a hundred employees, right? They don’t want to spend the time to try to, to have an employee be leveled up on something to create an expert training that they could never compete with. Your area of expertise on that.

    [00:17:29] They want yours and it’s a smart business decision for them to get yours. And so don’t think that maybe you haven’t done this before and you can’t do this. This is a simple process. We’ve introduced you to the first six steps here, very high level, and I would obviously love to invite you to dive in more.

    [00:17:47] I, this has personally changed my life. When I had a company approach me to license my courses, I literally had three little boys, my ba, my three baby boys working from home, which I [00:18:00] still work from home. They were around my ankles. I had no childcare. I had an international business consulting firm at the time, and I was working my ass off.

    [00:18:10] And a company approached me because they wanted my courses, they wanted my content and they wanted me to consult them. And this wasn’t a little company. This was a huge healthcare corporation. And I remember feeling like, wow, I’m so, I can’t believe I’m here. But I also remember realizing. Wow. They really want this because it’s something that they could never recreate the way that I have done it on my own for them, and it’s in their benefit to pay me.

    [00:18:40] To take what I’ve done to make themselves look better, be more efficient, make more money, and in this case, you know, lead, lead in the marketing race that they, that they were trying to lead in in that particular case way back when. So I wanna encourage you that they’re out there looking for your program.

    [00:18:58] Right now, whether [00:19:00] it’s client facing or internal, whether it is something that can be measured through increase in sales, or it’s something that it’s kind of tough to measure through reducing anxiety or helping people sleep better. I promise you that your genius is more valuable than you have even tapped into yet, and this is the place for you to start.

    [00:19:22] We are so happy to be able to support you in this. So to move forward and actually work on implementing, like I said, we have a ton of resources for you. You can cruise over to sweet life And click on licensing. You can get started just at the beginning with our licensing launchpad. You can listen to our free licensing Foundations video.

    [00:19:43] You can take one of our workshops, which is a live workshop where I get to work with you, or you can join our accelerator where you get all of our project plans, including our license contract, which I paid $14,000 for way back when. We just give it all to our clients. [00:20:00] So whatever you are looking for, we would love to be that go-to place that you trust, and it is such a reward for me to be able to see you guys.

    [00:20:08] Actually reach exponential, like massive explosion with your genius because frankly, we, we work with companies that you guys really care about what you do, and you’re really interested in impacting companies and people with your good work, and that’s what this is all about.

    [00:20:28] All right, I’m gonna wrap this up. Almost to 20 minutes here. This is episode number 287. Thank you for listening to this podcast we’ve been producing for over six years. If this benefited you, bless you, please share this. I have refused advertisers forever. I hate freaking advertising on podcasts, so we really rely on our listeners to share this episode and I would really appreciate it if you did that.

    [00:20:51] Okay. You guys have an awesome. Day, thanks for being here, and I look forward to hearing from you and how we can support you in the future. Bye-bye for now.[00:21:00]


    Unlock the Power of Licensing Your Course, Training or Content To Companies with April Beach (Episode 286)

    Unlock the Power of Licensing Your Course, Training or Content To Companies



    Who is this episode for? 

    Are you a coach, speaker, subject matter expert, or consultant looking for new ways to scale your business and reach a broader audience? This episode is tailored specifically for you. We’ll discuss the benefits of allowing others to distribute your content and how it applies to your unique business model, offering valuable insights and actionable tips to get started.
    What you can expect:
    Get ready to dive deep into the world of content distribution as we discuss how it can benefit your business. We’ll provide an overview of granting distribution rights for your courses, programs, and trainings, exploring the many advantages it offers for coaches, speakers, SMEs, and consultants. You’ll also learn practical tips and steps to start partnering with other companies or individuals, maximizing the value of your existing content and expertise.
    1. Discover the potential of granting distribution rights as a powerful tool for generating additional revenue, expanding your reach, and increasing brand recognition. Learn how this approach can help you grow your business while maximizing the value of your existing content.
    2. Find out how partnering with others for content distribution is a cost-effective way to grow your business without the need for additional staff or office space. We’ll share insights on how this approach allows you to focus on your core skills and passion while still reaching new audiences and scaling your operations.
    3. Uncover the opportunities that come from allowing others to distribute your content, leading to collaboration and personal and business brand growth. Learn how partnering with like-minded individuals, affiliates, and collaborators can further expand your reach and impact.


    At the end of this episode, you will:

    Top 3 Takeaways:
          1. An introduction to licensing and how it applies to your business
          2. An overview of the benefits of licensing for coaches, speakers, SMEs, and consultants
          3. Practical tips and steps to start licensing your courses, trainings, and programs
    Resources mentioned: 
    Get the plan and get started licensing your course, training, process, method, framework or content to companies at – get it free by April 30th 2023
    Also referenced in this weeks episode is last weeks episode –  How to Sell Your $99 Course for $99K  –
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:45] Hi everybody. If you are watching on the video stream of this episode, and welcome to the Listening Stream. I’m April Beach and you are tuned in to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. This is episode number 286, and I [00:01:00] want you to know that there are a couple bonuses that are really powerful that go along with this episode to help you further implement what we are talking about here in this show.

    [00:01:09] First and foremost, cruise over to licensing It is our newest training to get you to the starting gate. To package your intellectual property, package, your course, and really even understand the potential ahead of you that can be had through content licensing. It’s truly my pleasure to unlock the licensing world to you.

    [00:01:33] Let me give you a little bit of a backstory. I started licensing my own online courses. Back in 2009, I absolutely had no clue what I was doing at the time, but since then, I’ve gone on to license my own trainings and programs to businesses in 13 different countries and coach other consultants and experts on how to do this as well for over a decade.

    [00:01:57] And so this particular series that [00:02:00] we’re doing here on the show, And a lot of the focus of our show is helping you establish coaches, consultants, experts, scale your business, and I wanna introduce you to this world of licensing your course or training or method or process. And so in this particular episode, we’re actually just talking about the benefits of licensing.

    [00:02:19] I want to help you to understand whether or not this is something that it’s a good idea for you. If you’ve been listening to me for any period of time, you know that I am a lifestyle entrepreneur. What does that mean? It means I’m a life first entrepreneur. It means that just because there’s a great business model doesn’t mean it’s a great business model for me, and I believe that for you as well.

    [00:02:40] And so I wanna introduce you to the option of licensing. Just like we’ve introduced you to the option of creating courses and doing masterminds and doing MRIs and doing memberships and doing V I P days. We talk a lot about building million dollar programs and million dollar offer suite [00:03:00] ecosystems here on this show because that’s what we do.

    [00:03:03] At the Sweet Life Company, we help establish coaches, consultants, speakers, authors, and experts, extract your genius and build your million dollar product ecosystem. But how you release your programs, whether it is through a group coaching program, whether you are consulting individuals or individual companies, whether you dive into the opportunity to license your training or program, that’s up to you.

    [00:03:28] My job here is to open up the options for you so that you can make the best decisions for. For yourself. So welcome to the show. If you’ve ever listened to us before, if you’ve never listened to us before, it’s so great to be connected with you. So couple of resources we have. First of all, go over to licensing

    [00:03:46] It is a really powerful like 45 minute five part video training. I know you’re a busy C E O. You can plow through it and get a massive amount of information. We’re even giving you the entire cheat sheet of what the top 10 [00:04:00] industries are buying right now in terms of programs just like yours. So go to licensing to grab that and for all the show notes, if you wanna apply to work with us or join any of our other workshops or masterclass, you can cruise over to

    [00:04:16] This is episode number 286. Okay, so let’s talk about actually who this is for. So it’s for those of you guys who are established and you want to understand the steps to successfully. License your courses, trainings, and the opportunities ahead of you. So we’re gonna actually dive into the process of the benefits of licensing and it is really, really important because again, I want to open up the opportunity for you to understand whether or not this is actually something that is, is a good use of your time, resources, and your brain power.

    [00:04:59] All right, let’s go [00:05:00] ahead and dive right on in. Let’s talk about the benefits of licensing, but let me start with a basic description. If you actually don’t even know what licensing is, so licensing is like taking your course or your training, your material, your framework, your process of getting people results and renting it to other companies.

    [00:05:19] Okay? So when we say sell your course to other companies, we actually don’t mean selling it. Selling it would mean they own all the rights. And all the interest to your intellectual property. When we license it, it’s like renting it. So it’s allowing other companies to use your intellectual property, your genius that you’ve created in the form that you have created in.

    [00:05:43] For their own benefits. Now, let’s talk about the form that you have created in. It could be a totally done course. Maybe it’s a course you haven’t even built yet. But if you have a proven process, method, or framework that you’ve been teaching that you know gets people results, that’s of interest to other companies because [00:06:00] other companies don’t want to take the time and spend the money on the resources to develop a solution for something they can just frankly license from you.

    [00:06:10] And so it’s beneficial to them and it’s beneficial for you, so it doesn’t even have to be a co totally completed course. Here are the two prerequisites that we love to tell people. You have to be good at what you do. We don’t wanna license out a program that, you know, you’re just kind of winging it. So we need to make sure you’re established.

    [00:06:27] You are very well versed in, and the second thing is that you have gotten people results using this method, framework, or training before in another capacity. So you’re an established business. You’ve been using this process, even if it’s in another delivery method to get people results, and you deliver predictable results with the amazing framework in IP and training or course that you have created.

    [00:06:51] That’s the prerequisite here. So what we’re talking about is why would you wanna do this? What is the benefit to this? And, and as I mentioned, [00:07:00] I, I value time over money and I want any time that you put into your business to give you the outcome that you want. Obviously a great financial outcome is fantastic too, but I have to admit, I’m also the girl that would love to like camp with a campfire and van life and just.

    [00:07:19] Surf all day, and I would probably be just as happy barefoot on the beach with no money in my pocket. I say the word probably, I really do like having money, but Sounds good. So whatever that is for you, I wanna honor that. If we’re talking about the benefits of licensing, so you get paid up front. So in the past, In the marketing online business space, right?

    [00:07:40] When we’re doing this launch mode, we wanna reach so many people in order to convert your sales at a certain rate. So let’s say we want a hundred people on your webinar to try to convert it at, you know, over 50%. So we don’t have to do that. We have licensing. You sell it once to one buyer, but you sell more seats with it so you [00:08:00] get paid up front.

    [00:08:00] So benefit number one is taking that same training that you’ve already created and instead of having to sell it, A hundred times. You get to sell it once and go back and listen to the last week’s episode where I broke down the steps to get started where I talk about turning a $99 course into a $99,000 sale without changing the course at all.

    [00:08:20] Okay? Today I just really want to unpack whether or not this is a great option for you to move forward. Number two, it helps you to expand fast. So if you want to. Grow quickly. If you wanna reach more people, grow your business seriously faster than you ever thought possible. Especially if you are a small micro entrepreneur.

    [00:08:41] I mean, that’s what I’m called. We have less than seven people on our team. We aren’t even like categorized as a small business. We’re like micros sized businesses. If you’re like us and you wanna grow fast, licensing is a great way to do it because we can scale people, okay? We scale your. Reach, we [00:09:00] scale your people, meaning we don’t need more people.

    [00:09:02] Actually did an episode a few episodes a ago called The difference between Growth and scaling. Growth is where we spend more to make more. Scaling is where we don’t spend more to make more. Licensing is a straight scale play. And it’s super powerful because of that. So benefit number two is if you wanna expand your business fast licensing is a great opportunity for you.

    [00:09:23] Number three, it’s gonna save you time and money. Okay? So you don’t need a bunch of extra people, you don’t need extra staff members, you don’t have to hire sales closers, you don’t have to, you know, hire people to do all these different things. We can actually build systems within the teams. You already have the process of.

    [00:09:43] Selling and actually delivering your license programs is so much more simple when we just do it to one buyer. All right? So the nu the third benefit is saving you time and saving you money and saving you teams, and it’s really powerful. The fourth [00:10:00] benefit to licensing is absolute non-stop promotion.

    [00:10:03] Okay? So imagine this, you are playing with your kids at the park, or you are at a movie with your significant other, or your traveling or wherever. In the meantime, there’s hundreds, maybe thousands of people accessing your training in your program. You’re just hands off. It is absolute madness in the best way.

    [00:10:24] Okay, so it’s nonstop promotion for you because your licensees are continuing to promote it, whether it’s internally to their teams or externally, because they may be using your training or program as something they’re delivering that could be even client facing. They’re gonna keep promoting it for you because.

    [00:10:43] They invested in it and they wanted to work great. So it actually takes you outta the place of needing to. Even market it from a client standpoint, out, out, out to the world. It’s an incredibly powerful thing, especially for people like me that frankly [00:11:00] I don’t, I don’t love social media and I don’t wanna hang out there all day.

    [00:11:03] And so if you’re like me, I. Then licensing is a good opportunity for you. Number five, it’s gonna scale your revenue. Okay? This is seriously, again, go back to last week’s episode where we talked about taking a $99 course into selling it for 99,000. The important thing that you need to understand is that in most cases, we don’t have to change the training at all.

    [00:11:24] We don’t change the product, we change the buyer. So you’re going from selling it to a hundred people. For $1 amount goal to selling it to one company for that same dollar amount goal, if not more. So when we talk about scaling your revenue, there is nothing that I have experienced. I’ve been an entrepreneur my whole life.

    [00:11:47] I’ve been coaching. Coaches for 27 years. Okay, let, let’s sink in. You’re right, it’s swear I don’t look old enough to be doing that, but I started when I was 20 years old, coaching [00:12:00] coaches. Okay, so I want you to understand that never even being a pioneer in the online coaching space has I. Have I ever experienced a way to scale your genius as FAST is releasing your program or training through licensing and.

    [00:12:17] Again, I have personally done this myself. Um, number six, it really levels up your brand, so it’s gonna level up your thought leadership in your space. Even if you wanna keep selling your training directly and give different people an opportunity to license it as well, it’s gonna level up your brand. Not only within that B2B space, but it’s also gonna level up your thought leadership and your leadership and your niche, um, even to your established clients.

    [00:12:45] So even if they aren’t the ones that are licensing it, I, I would literally have clients say to me, oh my gosh, really? Other companies license your content. And it just levels up their trust and confidence in, in my consulting with them. And it’s gonna do the [00:13:00] same thing for you. So really levels up your brand and your recognition and your thought leadership in your space.

    [00:13:06] Number seven, licensing is usually a very fast setup. So again, you don’t have to think of all the things you’ve probably been working really hard to do. Online funnels, online marketing, webinars, live virtual events, challenges, summits, ads, all these other things. When it comes to licensing, we sell them very differently.

    [00:13:29] The sale of licens programs is very, very simple. And it doesn’t require fancy funnels or a ton of automation and all of these things that frankly, most experts don’t come outta the box. Knowing you guys and me when I first started, you know, we’re experts in the thing we do. It doesn’t mean that I’m an expert funnel builder.

    [00:13:55] I feel, I feel like I am now because I learned how to over the [00:14:00] years, but man, Imagine if you could avoid all of that, or you didn’t have to pay the money to have somebody to build all that out for you. So it’s a really fast setup about packaging your content and actually getting it released to license super fast setup.

    [00:14:14] It’s not as complicated as it as it may seem. It’s actually so simple that I, I think that some of our clients even just like. Have trouble wrapping their head around the fact, like, wow, okay. That’s what I do. Like I, I, I need to meet with them and, and present my program and listen to what they need and tell them how I can solve their problem and sign a contract and take my money.

    [00:14:35] Mm-hmm. Yeah. It’s that simple. Okay. Number. Eight. I’m gonna keep track. I’m look at my notes here for you. Number eight is reoccurring revenue. So it’s ultimate passive income when you license your product and there’s usually a licensed term, so there is a renewal fee. It’s an amazing thing. So you’re not only getting the upfront money for licensing, you may even be [00:15:00] getting residuals.

    [00:15:02] So what I mean by that is you may even be getting commissions and percentage of sales on when other people sell your programs. That’s a whole nother episode. We’re not diving into that right now, but they’re a reoccurring fees for your renewals. So on top of the initial fee, they’re gonna pay you when that renewal comes up as well.

    [00:15:22] If obviously you’ve created a a great program, they wanna bring it back again, especially if they’ve worked hard to market that program as part of their business. Number nine, stay with me here. Uh, you can find great partners. So if you want to open the door to other levels of personal branding, personal leadership.

    [00:15:43] Say you wanna write a book or you want to start speaking on stages, or you wanna build affiliate relationships for other parts of your company. Licensing is an amazing way to do it. It helps you find amazing great partners where you can collaborate with them. I’m a big advocate. I believe that the [00:16:00] future of business is collaboration and linking arms with other businesses that you serve the same audience or you serve the same mission or you serve the same purpose.

    [00:16:09] I, I really, truly believe that is the future and the strength of where we’re going in the world of online business. And so licensing is a really, Important way to be able to step in to that, to have something valuable to give, and of course to be able to create, amazing, powerful relationships with other businesses that are like-minded.

    [00:16:29] Number 10, licensing. You get to use what you already have. If you created a course or a training, like pretty much everybody and their cousin has done, especially since Covid, maybe that coarser training is collecting dust on a shelf. Okay, If it’s sitting there and you thought you were gonna sell it, and then you’re like, oh my gosh, this is for the birds.

    [00:16:52] But you’re an expert in your space and you’ve worked so hard. If you’re like me, you probably have. Stacks and stacks of trainings. [00:17:00] At one point in time, we had 56 online courses that were Evergreen courses. All right? So if you’ve been doing what you’ve been doing, you have things that are just sitting there collecting dust.

    [00:17:10] Licensing is beautiful because we can take what you have already created and make a lot of money for you off of it. Number 11, you actually get to work less with your operations, with your delivery and your management in most simple licensed terms. When you, it’s like. Set it and forget it. It actually reminds me of like the good old days of the first like wave of on online evergreen courses where y we would like actually set them and forget them.

    [00:17:36] This is like 2012, 2013 people would enroll and you’d click a button, you’d put it for sale. You’d have hundreds of people come in there and it was like a dream come true. Uh, courses don’t do that anymore in most cases, by the way, you guys, that that’s very 10 years ago. Um, but licensing does because. It’s not like you’re just forgetting it.

    [00:17:56] There’s some company that’s actively continuing to take it [00:18:00] from you. It’s like a relay race. They’re taking the baton and they’re running it around the track with their teams to all of their people. What does that mean for you? It means you have very little operational overhead, very little team overhead.

    [00:18:13] You want to make sure that you are validating that everything is going as contracted term. And you wanna provide support to your licensees. Some of your licensees may ask you to add consulting, coaching, actually live support in addition to licensing your program. That’s another episode. We’re not talking about that right now.

    [00:18:34] It’s just straight licensing agreement is really less work, less operational costs, less management management for you. And so it’s less overhead, more profit, and more lifestyle freedom. And then number 12, and I’m gonna recap all these, number 12 is that you actually get to reach more people if you have created a process and a method that you are really passionate about, maybe it’s your life, li Life’s work.

    [00:18:58] Like some of our clients, there [00:19:00] are programs that we partner with them to license. We help, we teach them to help them license. It is literally their life’s work, you guys. And if that’s like you, You’re just one person and there is a line between where is the quality of life for you and where is the expansion of your reach, right?

    [00:19:19] You may find, oh my gosh, I could get this work and this important process, life changing, business changing process into the hands of more people. If I only had more time, team resources and money, well, licensing is how we do that. So imagine taking this work that you. Truly are an expert in that you created that you can do and deliver and teach in a way that nobody else can in getting it in the hands of so many more people and businesses to do good things in the world.

    [00:19:49] That is what licensing does. And so it might sound complicated, but trust me, it’s not as industry leading coaches that teach. Other leaders how to [00:20:00] license their content. I can tell you every single business comes into me and they’re like, oh my gosh, I don’t know what I don’t know. This seems so scary.

    [00:20:07] This seems like so big. It is not, it’s, it’s actually so simple. It just absolutely blows your mind at the process of all of the things that are complicated, all of the letters, we strip out everything and we go back to business basics in delivering programs to give great results and allowing other companies to benefit from that.

    [00:20:28] That is licensing. So let me go over those benefits. And I want you to identify to yourself which one is the most important for you. And once you, oh, I’m gonna list them. Once you identify the most important one, I just want you to ask yourself, how important is this to me? How important is this to me to solve right now?

    [00:20:49] Is this part of our primary strategic objective as a company for for this year? Okay. And that will help you kind of stay grounded in this. This is not [00:21:00] one of those shiny object episodes that I want you to go chase. I don’t ever want you chasing any of those shiny objects. There’s so many distractions when it comes to how you can build your business.

    [00:21:10] I’m here to give you the options. I’m here to open up the opportunities for you, for you to choose. And so I’m gonna go through this list of 12, and after I go through this list, I want you to pick the number one most important thing to you. And then you ask yourself, how important is it to fix? And how fast do we want to have this as a benefit to our company?

    [00:21:31] Okay, so here we go. Number one benefit. Getting paid upfront and early.

    [00:21:35] Number two, expanding your business and your reach and helping more people faster.

    [00:21:41] Number three, it’s gonna save you time and money.

    [00:21:44] Number four, it’s nonstop promotion for your company.

    [00:21:49] Number five, it’s scaling your revenue. Okay. Massive revenue increase through scalability.

    [00:21:56] Number six, it’s leveling up your brand in the recognition of [00:22:00] your thought leadership and your brand in your space.

    [00:22:02] Number seven, it’s a quick setup. It’s quick to build and package and sell.

    [00:22:07] Number eight, you have reoccurring revenue for years to come.

    [00:22:12] Number nine, you get to find great partners and other businesses to collaborate with.

    [00:22:18] Number 10, you get to use what you have already created without having to start from scratch.

    [00:22:24] Number 11, it’s less work, less operations, and less management for you.

    [00:22:29] In number 12, you get to reach more people with the genius that God has given you or whatever you believe to do more good in the world.

    [00:22:37] Those are the 12 benefits of licensing. There are so many more, but those are the 12, and I wanna be respectful of your time, so I frankly I just cut it at 12. Now, what’s that number one? What was that first thing that was most important for you? I want you to again, ask yourself, how quickly do we want to solve this?

    [00:22:54] How important is this to my business, my bottom line, my team, and my life? Okay. [00:23:00] Once you decide that, then you can decide how quickly you wanna move forward into this. We do have a resource for you. We have tons of resources on licensing. First of all, you can go to our website and you can find licensing playlists from the podcast here, licensing articles.

    [00:23:15] I have a huge licensing 1 0 1 foundation video training you can watch, and we have our newest training called Licensing Launchpad, which actually takes you through the step-by-step process to move into licensing. That’s also the one that has all of the cheat sheets of what companies are buying right now.

    [00:23:34] So we’re gonna drop all the resources here for you. If you’re really ready to move forward fast, you can always apply to work with us and join our licensing accelerator where we give you everything and of course all of the contracts and you get to team up with our, with legal and it’s just really fantastic.

    [00:23:50] But this, the ball is in your court now, you know? You can’t unlearn what you’ve just learned. This is taking a program training method or framework that you’ve already [00:24:00] created and exponentially scaling it with less work in the than you’ve ever done before. If that’s what you want, then this is could be a great option for you.

    [00:24:08] Okay. The resources, again, this is episode number 286, and so therefore, everything, all the show notes can be found by visiting sweet life Click on the podcast. This is episode number 286. We also talked about digging into licensing So you can do that. And of course you can just text the word license to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0, and we’ll text you a link to all these resources as well.

    [00:24:42] Or because I’ve given you way too many calls to action here. Totally. Don’t do this on your own podcast. I’ve given you way too many options. Just go to sweet life and you can find all the resources. Under how to scale your reach through licensing there on the website. And if you’ve enjoyed this show, please [00:25:00] share it with a friend.

    [00:25:00] This is really, it’s not new knowledge. Licensing is an old thing that’s been done for years, but so few people know about it. And it’s really my mission to help as many businesses like our clients and frankly like myself, scale their reach exponentially and actually, build a quality of life through expanding the use of your genius. All right, you guys have an awesome day. I’ll talk to you next week. Thank you so much for listening.


    How to Sell Your $99 Course for $99K with April Beach (Episode 285)

    How to Sell Your $99 Course for $99K



    Who is this episode for? 

    This episode is for experts coaches and consultants who have sold your trainings and courses before. You want to streamline, simplify and scale your business and go from having to sell to many people to reach financial benchmarks to selling to fewer buyers for more money by utilizing what you’ve already done.
    Did you build a course in the last few years? Probably… Now let’s dust it off and build a lot more value around it and generate 10 times the amount of income that you may have in the past.
    You may have started your online consulting and coaching or courses business during Covid when a lot of people went into the space, but now most of them have struggled to attain success or remain successful. If you’re like many of the established experts who went into the online consulting space in the last few years then you likely were not prepared for the amount of work required on the marketing side of getting your course or consulting program in front of enough buyers.
    There are a lot of valuable parts to the program that you built because you are an established specialist in what you do. But there is a hard reality that hits in terms of the requirements of marketing to establish a sustainable consulting business by selling B2C. 
    Inside this episode I am teaching you how to take that $99 course and sell the same program for 99,000. This concept is called licensing your contact, course, or intellectual property. We have been teaching coaches how to do this for over a decade and I’m excited for you to tap into this episode and understand the possibilities that are in store for your IP, programs, business and future. 


    At the end of this episode, you will:

      1. Understand the potential for your consulting business
      2. Understand the difference between selling to many versus selling to one
      3. No the first three steps to get started in licensing your course or training to other companies
    Resources mentioned: – get it free by April 30th 2023
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:46] Hey you guys, and welcome to another episode here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur. Podcast if you’re watching the video episode behind the scenes, welcome to my podcast recording studio here at the beach house. [00:01:00] This is episode number 285, and so everything we’re talking about can be found by visiting our website, Cruising over to the podcast in searching for number 285. It is a super powerful episode.

    [00:01:14] At the end of this, you are going to know how the power of moving from B to C to B to B can affect your business. We are diving in and we are unpacking how to actually take a $99 course and sell it for 99,000. And this is not pie in the sky, nothing here that we talk about or teach or deliver.

    [00:01:37] On this show is in theory, these are all proven business strategies that have been accomplished before, and so that’s why I wanna bring you into this world. If you and I don’t know each other yet. I’m April Beach CEO of the Sweet Life Company, multiple company owners, and my area of expertise is helping establish subject matter experts, speaker authors, coaches, [00:02:00] and consultants.

    [00:02:00] Scale your business by building million. Programs and content licensing programs and specif specifically, that’s what we are diving into today. So I have something very important I wanna give you, and it’s timely. Here’s one of the benefits, if you are an actual subscriber to this podcast. When you’re a subscriber, we drop the shows as soon as they come out.

    [00:02:22] So the recording of this show, the drop date of this show, let me look at my calendar, is going to be April 24th, 2023. So if you were listening to the show, it’s April 24th, 2023, and you are a very, very timely person. I want you to go because I’m giving you something free, but you have to get it before April 30th, 2023.

    [00:02:46] Okay, so let me say that clear. If you are here right now at the live drop or within the first week, this show dropped. If you’re a subscriber of this show, this is a reward for you for constantly listening to these episodes. We are gonna give you a free [00:03:00] gift. It is completely free access to my newest training called Licensing Launchpad, where I take you in depth through all the things I’m talking about today, and I give you the worksheets and the step by step process to accomplish it, and I’m actually giving you that to you totally free.

    [00:03:17] But here’s the deal. You have to go grab it before April 30th, 2023. You can go to licensing to download that right now. If you’re here after April 30th, it is a really jam-packed, powerful, valuable training, and so you should still go grab it and pay the market value for it because holy moly, it is.

    [00:03:40] Okay, so let’s talk about what we’re actually talking about here today. The end result of what we’re doing here today is setting you up, getting you to the launchpad to be able to license your programs, but most people don’t even know what that actually means. And so I’m gonna simplify these terms and I’m gonna explain to you how you.[00:04:00]

    [00:04:00] Can absolutely do this, and you don’t need to be some business ninja to do it. At the end of this episode, you are gonna understand how you can actually go from selling to individuals, to selling to companies. What I mean by that is you’re gonna understand the value of your training and you are gonna understand how you can get maybe finally out of the rat race of, of social marketing and social selling, and having to build funnels and having to post every darn day on social media.

    [00:04:30] To selling your very val valuable training to companies that have funding to buy. So if you’re ready for that and you’re ready for the three steps to do this, come on this little short journey with me and let’s go ahead and let’s dive in. Again, go grab the free tool or the very low cost tool if you’re listening to this by visiting licensing, and it’s gonna help you even more implement what we talk about today.

    [00:04:58] Okay, so [00:05:00] who is this for? Here’s the deal. If you are like many people, many coaches, consultants, expert speakers who entered the online business space in the last couple years, maybe you entered it with C O V I D, you came into online consulting, you took your area of expertise and maybe you took a course on how to create courses, and you’ve come into this online world, well, There are two brick walls that people are really hitting when they get into this online space.

    [00:05:30] Number one, not generating enough sales, and number two, not actually realizing how much marketing skill that you may have needed to make all of your hard work of developing those courses, trainings, and programs successful in order to be a successful scaling coach, consultant, speaker, author, you typically need to understand funnels and social selling and online marketing, and many experts who’ve come into this space in the [00:06:00] last three to five years.

    [00:06:01] Either weren’t prepared for the knowledge they needed to have to be successful in the marketing space, or it didn’t come equipped to hire that out. Okay. And so what we have is we have ama, we have a bundle. Tell me if this is you. Send me a social message. If this is you. We have a bundle of incredible established experts.

    [00:06:25] You guys are really good at what you do. You have taken the time, you have put in the effort, you have built the courses, you have built the trainings, you have built your framework. You have built your methodology, and then maybe it’s just sitting on the shelf collecting dust. Maybe it, it hasn’t sold for the volume that you wanted it to sell for, but that, here, let me just speak to you really.

    [00:06:49] That does not take away from how amazing you are. It doesn’t take away from how great you are at your area of expertise, right at [00:07:00] teaching what only you can teach because of your years or decades of experience and your knowledge to get where you could be to develop that amazing course or training program.

    [00:07:13] And so first, I, I wanna say that. Not maybe understanding or executing online marketing or the fact that you might not have a huge social following or whatever that is, is not a reflection of how awesome you are. And how great your program is. So just let that soak in if you’re listening and, and maybe you haven’t accomplished all you wanted to from a sales standpoint.

    [00:07:36] Okay, and now let’s talk about what we can do about that. I wanna talk to you about how we take, and this is in theory, 99 to 99. You know, it’s a cool play on words. Basically what I’m saying is how we take your course that’s individually priced at, let’s say 99 bucks or $999, and we [00:08:00] actually sell it for 99,000 or a million dollars.

    [00:08:03] This is what we can do when we change who you are selling it to instead of selling it in bulk like or two in two individuals in the masses. We sell it once with a bulk number of seats or tickets to one buyer. So let me say that again cuz I kind of messed it up and didn’t say it as clearly as I wanted to the first time.

    [00:08:30] Instead of taking your course or training and having to sell it to a bunch of people instead, I want you to understand how you can take that same training that might be collecting dust and sell it to one person for 10 times more. Does that make sense to you? Okay. So this is a process that’s called content licensing or IP licensing or licensing your training or licensing your [00:09:00] course.

    [00:09:01] And there’s a lot of legal lingo in here that most people don’t understand, as a matter of fact. Interesting, fun fact, a lot of companies that wanna license your program don’t even realize that these are the terms for this type of arrangement. You might have even been approached by a company that wants to bring in your course or training, and they don’t even know that this is the actual legal structure of what we’re talking about.

    [00:09:22] So I wanna equip you to know that so you can move forward in this. So, We’re gonna dive into three steps here for you to move forward in this direction. And again d dig into licensing Launchpad. It is a short 45 minute five part video training that’s gonna take you through every one of these steps with some amazing worksheets and just like so much gold in there.

    [00:09:47] So go over to licensing launch. Dot com and grab that too. But here’s, here’s high level as an introduction for you and I just sitting here hanging out today. So the very first thing I want you to do is I want you to do what I call conduct an [00:10:00] asset inventory. So I want you to go back and I want you to look at all of the trainings that you’ve created.

    [00:10:07] Hey, maybe it’s just one course you’ve built or one training. It also. Doesn’t have to be a finished product course. That’s really important. I want you to understand this. If you have developed a method or a framework, or a system or a process that gets people results, I don’t care if you turned it into a course with all the, the whistles and bells and videos, that doesn’t matter.

    [00:10:34] What, what I’m saying to you is if you have created a process, And other people can follow that process and get results. It could be a completely finished course or program. It could be perhaps the outline of what you have taught to individuals one-on-one. It could be the outline of a group poaching program that you created.

    [00:10:55] Could be maybe the agenda for a mastermind or a retreat. [00:11:00] Basically, if you have taken your expertise in your skills and you have turned it into a process that gets predictable, repeatable, uh, you know, expected results for people, that is very, very valuable. Okay, so valuable. We’re gonna be digging into the actual value of that here in a minute, but I want you to realize that that is gold.

    [00:11:20] And there are two different types of business building that we teach at this sweet Life company and that we can just talk about in general, right? There’s, there’s selling B2C and there’s selling b2b. Now, even if your buyers are actual businesses too, I, I wanna just try to simplify this for you. You’re either selling it one off.

    [00:11:42] To individuals like you’re enrolling people one at a time in your launch strategy, or you’re enrolling them one at a time through your webinar or whatever. That’s what I call b2c, or you are selling it in bulk, okay? And that means where you sell it one time and a bunch of people get access rather [00:12:00] than selling it a million times to each individual to get access.

    [00:12:05] And so if you have been kind of in that individual selling place before, that’s also a great place to be. Again, we work with experts, coaches, and consultants all the time to build their million dollar programs. For that be to individual side. But today I wanna talk to you about moving from that side to a much simpler way of selling your program or your outline, your system, your framework, or your method to businesses.

    [00:12:34] Have the funding to invest in the solution that you deliver. And the one amazing thing about this is that when you develop a predictable system, there are always people that want to get it from you and buy it from you. Okay? So step number one is just pause here for a minute and I want you to think. All of the things that you have created that meet that [00:13:00] result.

    [00:13:01] So have you have built a total course? Did you build a training program? Do you have a process or a method or a framework or an outline that gets people results? If you have that, you have met the criteria to move forward, yay. You can, you know, passco and collect a hundred dollars. Now one of the things we wanna talk about, as somebody actually messaged me on social media a couple weeks ago and they said, you know, April, how do I know if, like, if I’m ready to do this?

    [00:13:29] So you need to have an established process that gets people results. And let me just be really honest with you. You have to be good at what you do. Okay, let me say that again. You need to have an established process that gets people results and you gotta be good at what you do. You know, licensing is not for, people that are new, that are, you’re just testing your process, right?

    [00:13:51] Because we’re giving another company the ability to, to implement it. So we need to, we need to make sure it works. And, and a few other [00:14:00] things like protecting your intellectual property with copyright protection and trademark. But I’m not gonna get into that in this episode. I have other episodes about that.

    [00:14:09] So step number one is I want you to go through and I want you to understand the value of what you have to other companies. Step number two is, let’s actually dive into the, the value of what, what is valuable actually to other companies. So first of all, that blanket term, other companies can be referred to huge corpor.

    [00:14:32] Uh, big international nonprofits, small, teeny, tiny little nonprofits, smaller corporations. It also refers to other companies that are just like mom and pops. Agencies, tech companies, big and small. I don’t care the size of the company. And in this episode, we are not gonna unpack the value of selling to different size companies.

    [00:14:59] Those are things that [00:15:00] we work on with our clients and, and just how to price that. But just for the purpose of right now, I just want you to generally to know when I say, you know, license your course or sell your course to other companies, it can be anything. We can be talking about universities, smaller, smaller school districts.

    [00:15:15] We can talk about selling your program to companies just like. Imagine turning your competition into your clients by giving your technical competition the ability to distribute your course to their users. And guess what? You just get to sit back and you just get to take the money for that. That’s a great option, especially if you’re burned out on online marketing, isn’t it?

    [00:15:38] So what are, what are companies looking. Companies are looking for content that accomplishes a couple of different results. They’re looking for skills and up-leveling their teams. So let’s talk about programs companies are looking for internally. So if what you do teaches a skill or teaches, leveling up of awareness or [00:16:00] knowledge, or teaches a strategy, , teaches leadership teaches communi.

    [00:16:04] Teaches, , you know, people how to present themselves more confidently, teaches them how to increase their sales or even close sales calls, create marketing strategies. Companies are always looking to buy programs that level up their skills. As a matter of fact, I have, I have a statistic, and I’ll make sure I put, I source this in the show notes for you.

    [00:16:28] I don’t have it here in my little notes for this episode, but statistics show that when a company invests $1,500 in skills training per employee, it increases their revenue by 24%. Let me say that again. When a company invests only $1,500 per employee in increasing their skills, so let’s say what you teach, um, helps a company to level up one of those skills, like it, you know, closing sales deals or communicating in, you know, in [00:17:00] something internally or understanding, a process or how to implement something, or maybe even you have that.

    [00:17:09] Maybe what you do delivers better SOPs and streamlined systems within a company. When a company invests $1,500 in a program on average, it increases that company’s sales by on average 24%. And I will get that source code for you. I plugged it into our private client community. Um, and I’ll make sure I put it here in the show notes for you as well so you can immediately go to that research for yourself cuz it’s gold.

    [00:17:33] So I want you to understand that if your program is valuable to a company in levels of skills, we’re talking almost direct ROI and it’s very valuable. But I also want you to know if you have a program that might not be so tangible, let’s say you work on mindset. Or peak performance or reducing anxiety or your program deals with mental health or communications, or maybe it’s something that is what I call a lifestyle enrichment [00:18:00] program.

    [00:18:00] So maybe what you do is teaching people to sleep better or eat better, or lose weight or know how to write a book. Um, even. Know how to think entrepreneurially. Okay. Lemme say that there are companies out there that are looking for programs to teach their employees to think like entrepreneurs. I know it sounds a little dangerous cuz that, you know, that employee could bolt.

    [00:18:23] But what it does is it really benefits the company to help that employee lend to the, a creativity in the future innovation of that. So whether you have a direct skills training that is incredibly valuable, and if you have an intangible training that it’s just confidence or lifestyle, those programs are also very valuable to companies.

    [00:18:45] So that’s part one. So I want you to think about, as I’m going through this, I want you to think about what’s in your head. If you grab licensing, we give you a complete list of over 50 different outcomes that companies are looking. In [00:19:00] the value to companies, and you can Dr. You can literally go through our list and circle which ones apply to your training, and then you know exactly what to put in your sales pitches.

    [00:19:09] Now, the other thing I want you to know is that if you have a program, it can be internally facing only for the employees of the company, or we can actually license your program for companies to distribute to their customers. Companies aren’t just looking for internal programs, they’re looking for external programs that they can actually turn around and sell or add to their existing programs that they have.

    [00:19:33] So take a pause here. This is step number two and fully understand the value of your training. It’s gonna be the same value that it was when you were selling your training. To individuals, but now imagine the scale of having so many people within one organization have that same benefit at the same time together.

    [00:19:53] I mean, that just gets me excited for them about your stuff. And it should make you really excited too, and companies are looking to [00:20:00] invest in that, those results. Okay? And then the third step here is calculating the street value of what it took you to develop your program. This is really important. This is the first step before we would get into actually understanding, hey, you know, what, are we gonna charge a a company for this?

    [00:20:20] I want you to understand what I call the street. Okay. The street value is quantified by two different groups of numbers. I hope you guys are geeking out on this like I do, and hopefully I’m explaining it in a simple way. The first number I want you to quantify is how much did you spend to invest in building that program?

    [00:20:44] Dollar amount. Hard dollars. Okay. Did you pay for coaching? Did you join an online coaching program or join a mastermind? Did you buy software? Did you pay to have videos recorded? Did you hire a copywriter? [00:21:00] Did you, I don’t know, download a million books from Audible? How much and hard dollars did you spend to develop that?

    [00:21:10] How much did you pay team members? Did you, if you have a team member and you delegated things out, how much did it actually cost you? To develop that training, even if it isn’t fully built out in a video training or, or in a course somewhere. How much and hard dollars did that cost you? So that’s street value number one.

    [00:21:30] Street value number two is, now I want you to quantify the amount of time. That it took you to be in a position so that you actually could develop it. Now, I am not just talking about the amount of time that it actually took you from saying, Hmm, I think I wanna launch a course on productivity and now I’m gonna outline it.

    [00:21:51] Now I’m gonna build it. No, no, no. I want you to also include all of the years before that, that made you qualified [00:22:00] to even create a COR course on productivity. So you’re gonna end up with two numbers. You’re gonna end up with hard cost numbers, and you’re gonna end up with this time number. Many of you that are listening to this, you guys have been in the trenches to learn your area of expertise for years, decades.

    [00:22:20] We work with clients, so we actually are working on helping them to distribute their life’s work. Imagine that. So you’re gonna end up with two numbers. And those two numbers are the amount of money you spent to invest in this and the amount of time. Most of you guys, if you continue to just sell to individuals like that B2C side, like you don’t wanna look at this number.

    [00:22:44] Most of you guys are like, oh my gosh, it is taken me a million freaking years to build this and I’ve only generated 50,000 on something that probably took me, you know, a hundred thousand dollars to build. I understand. But it’s really important that you [00:23:00] quantified the street value because we not only want to get you back the street, r o i for that, right?

    [00:23:06] We want to have you profit from that. Okay? And here’s one more thing I’m gonna leave you with and then I’ll recap those three steps for you. I want you to know something. I want you to know that companies don’t want to spend the time and the money that it took you to develop your. That is not a good business decision for them.

    [00:23:27] That is not in their best interest. What you do, your subject matter expert genius space is not theirs. And frankly, they usually don’t wanna be experts in that. That’s why they are always out there constantly right now while you’re listening to this, looking for programs to buy like yours to fix that problem because they don’t have the time or the money, and they don’t, they don’t care enough about building it.

    [00:23:56] They’re not gonna try to rip off your course. They just wanna buy it so they can be better [00:24:00] from it. And I want you to understand that that mindset, Okay. They need your training. They need your methods, they need your frameworks because they know that it’s probably not their primary area of expertise, and they only care about the end result solution that you are gonna provide, whether that’s to their employees or whether it’s to their customers.

    [00:24:21] And whether it is a hard skill result or we can measure ROI or whether it is a more of a intangible that increases confidence or something that is more of a lifestyle result. These things are very valuable to companies and licensing has been around forever. You guys, this isn’t new. This isn’t a new concept.

    [00:24:41] What’s different about this is. Nobody out there except for us that we understand is actually teaching you how to license your trainings and your courses and your programs and package them with their, in your intellectual property in a way that is going to help you scale your business [00:25:00] and is good for you and it’s good for the company.

    [00:25:02] And so that’s what I want you to wrap your head around today. So in conclusion, I promised you today I was gonna tell you how to take and how to sell your 99 or your $999 course for a million, or sell your $99 course for 9,000. We don’t change the course, we change the. So let me, let me say that again. To sell your $99 course for 99,000, we don’t change the course, we change the buyer.

    [00:25:35] And I want you to sit with that for a minute, and I want you to know that it is very simple process and it’s not as hard as you think. And today we talked about the three steps to actually start doing this. The first one is doing an inventory, figuring out what you have that’s ready to go, and knowing it doesn’t have to be a finalized training program or product.

    [00:25:53] It can be a framework or a method or a system, you know, SOPs, processes that you’ve deliver. Number two, [00:26:00] what is the value of that to companies? Definitely, I can’t emphasize it enough. Go grab licensing launchpad training. I’m giving you a complete database of the value in programs that companies are buying right now.

    [00:26:15] And then on top of that, this is gonna blow your mind. It’s seriously, I can’t even believe we’re, we’re giving this away. On top of that, we’re giving you a list of what the top 10 industries are buying right now in programs. We break it down from agencies to small businesses, to education, to government, to, huge corporations.

    [00:26:40] Just so on and so forth. There’s 10 different industries. This list was created by our experts that come in, our sales experts that work with our clients. It is absolutely mind blowing, and I’m giving you that totally, that list totally for free. So with, if you download licensing launchpad by April [00:27:00] 30th, 2023, otherwise you need to go grab it and it’s gonna be a really small price.

    [00:27:05] It’s gonna be worth your time. So I want you to understand the value, and I want you to know what companies are buying. And then the last thing we talked about is calculating the actual street value of what it took you to develop this program. It’s incredibly important for you to know that because that is the baseline of where we start your pricing to generate a return on your investment, both in time and tangible dollars.

    [00:27:31] This is much more simple than it seems, and it is a super big secret that our mission is to let, as many established experts know that this is possible and this is waiting for you to do, and it’s actually quite simple. In all of your years of genius in all of your time developing your programs, we can quite simply pivot you by selling, by changing who you’re selling it to.

    [00:27:56] We don’t have to change the program. We change the. [00:28:00] And that’s what we’re talking about here today. So thanks for hanging out with me. I had actually planned on having this be a very short episode, but I went longer because I elaborated more than expected. Go figure. I tend to do that. Um, but I love hanging out with you.

    [00:28:14] I love teaching on this, and I love introducing and opening up these concepts for you. If you have any questions at all or if you wanna get started on this, Do cruise over to licensing It’s the first step in this process. It’s amazing, powerful training that we have on tap for you. Or you can just cruise over to sweet life and you can apply to work with us and we’ll give you all the contracts.

    [00:28:37] We’ll give you all the templates, we’ll give you all this and get you on your way to start licensing your amazing program out there and, and frankly, probably finally, Finally recuperating some of the ROI value that it took you to develop it. So it’s awesome. We’re excited, we’re excited to introduce this to you.

    [00:28:56] I’ve done this personally myself. Oh gosh, it’s been 14 years I’ve [00:29:00] licensed my courses and I can’t wait to talk to you more about doing it as well. Um, subscribe to this show. Please share this show, hang out with me. Uh, we on our new YouTube channel. Comment on YouTube if you’re watching video behind the scenes and hanging out here with me at the beach.

    [00:29:13] And again, all of the show notes are You can cruise over to the podcast. This is episode number 285, and of course, don’t forget to go grab licensing You’ll be so super glad you did. I’m glad you’re here, and I’ll talk to you guys next week. Bye for now.



    Growth vs Scale: What’s The Difference and Why Is It Important with April Beach (Episode 284)

    Growth vs Scale: What’s The Difference and Why Is It Important





    Do you know if your business is growing or scaling? Knowing if your consulting business is growing or scaling is important because it helps you make smart choices about what you should do next. In this show we break down the difference between growing and scaling so that you know where to focus your attention and allocate your resources based on what you need right now in your business.
    In the coaching and consulting industry, the term “scale” is often misunderstood. It’s become a buzz word and many coaches and coaching events aren’t defining it correctly, misguiding people and wasting time.  So, why does this matter?  Understanding what’s happening with your business helps you choose the right path, and that means more success for you and your clients!


    At the end of this episode, you will:

      1. Know the difference between growing and scaling
      2. Be able to identify activities in each to focus your work
      3. Be able to create a budget and allocate funds accordingly 
      4. Be able to identify your current objectives and what is more important right now for your business
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:



    [00:00:45] Hi you guys. Welcome to episode number 284. Wow. We are coming up on episode number 300, and I appreciate. Being a listener of this show, some of you guys listening, been listening to this show for like six years, so thank you so much for your support. I’m [00:01:00] April Beach. If we do not know each other yet, I’m an online business architect and I’m an offer engineer, and I help coaches, experts, consultants, SMEs, and speakers scale their program past a million dollars for deep impact and lifestyle freedom.

    [00:01:17] So if that’s what you’re looking for, Everything we do over at the Sweet Life Company and they are, good themes for the shows that you’re gonna get here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. Between me and our amazing guests that we bring here for you, we’ve worked very hard for six years to only bring you the top notch vetted guests in the industry. And, you should just go binge all the shows we have for you over at

    [00:01:43] But today is more of a fireside business coaching chat between. And you. And today we are diving into the difference between growing and scaling. And here’s a little backstory in why I thought this was important. So I speak on a lot of summits on a lot of [00:02:00] stages, and I often am asked to speak at events where there’s some use of the word scale or scaling in that event.

    [00:02:09] And if you haven’t noticed yet, scaling is a. Buzzword, it’s almost like the way that we used authenticity. You know how like authenticity got overused. Um, that’s kind of how I’m seeing the word scaling. And what I find is that most people actually don’t understand the difference between growing and scaling, and it’s important.

    [00:02:31] For you to understand the difference because there are different activities and there’s a different objective in your business in what’s happening if you are in a growth phase, and if you are in a scale phase. So I realize that this was probably a very important show to do. I’ve actually spoken on this topic before and that’s why I’m bringing you this episode today.

    [00:02:50] So, at the end of this show, you will know the difference between growing and scaling. You’ll be able to identify activities that you’re working [00:03:00] on in your business, and you’re gonna be able to identify, Hey, listen, are we in a growth phase right now, or are we in a scale phase? And the fact of the matter is, uh, most companies dance between the two.

    [00:03:11] And, based on, of course, the objectives and we’re gonna dive into that, you’re also gonna be able to look at your budget. This is really important based on whether or not you are in growing or scaling, it’s going to affect your money. And so that is a very important thing that we are diving into today, and you’re gonna be able to identify what current projects you’re working on in your business.

    [00:03:33] Maybe you’re doing some scaling and some growth, maybe we kind of need to help you to fine tune your activity and your focus a little bit so you can actually be more efficient. In whichever phase you’re in, growth or scaling. So, you know, overall in the coaching industry, the term scale is really often misunderstood.

    [00:03:51] And so I wanna share the true definition between growing and scaling here for you so that you can make smart choices for your business. [00:04:00] This is, this particular episode is for those of you guys who are established business owners, so this really applies to those of you that are making consist. Over 10K a month, then we can have a conversation about scaling.

    [00:04:15] Oftentimes people wanna have a conversation about scaling or about, you know, how to scale and how to expand your reach before 10K. But usually in order to get to 10 K, there are some growing operational systems we have to really fine tune and get into place. So I just wanna be honest about who is going to definitely benefit from this.

    [00:04:34] It’s really for those of you guys who have been in business for a while, your established coaches, and that you have reached a, you know, a consistent 10 K months. If you aren’t there, please still know that you’re welcome to listen, but I just wanna make sure that I’m being very honest about who’s best gonna benefit FI from this episode.

    [00:04:52] So, if you’re ready to dive into this, all of the show notes and everything we can share here with you is going to be [00:05:00], episode number 2 84. All right. With that being said, this episode is brought to you by Licensed To Scale. Licensed to scale is our workshop for experts, coaches, and consultants that want to take your course and license it to other companies.

    [00:05:19] It is a powerful, amazing one day event where we take you through and teach you how to package up your course and how to actually present your program to license it to organizations, other companies, even other entrepreneurs. So if you were interested in. Cruise over to sweet life In this show, we do little sponsorships here, even though we really don’t have advertisers just to highlight some of the current things we’re working on with our clients right now.

    [00:05:44] So if that’s where you are, please visit licensed and then the number two or just visit the show notes or our company page and we’ll make sure you can find the resources and how to join. All right, so let’s go ahead and dive into our [00:06:00] objective of what we’re talking about today and start out with the nitty gritty.

    [00:06:03] What is the difference between growing and scaling? So growing is when we are actually making things in your business bigger. We are increasing. A very simple DES definition of growing is we are usually increasing costs. We’re usually spending more money to, to increase the size. Something Now that could be spending more money on advertising to reach more clients, it could be spending more money on team members.

    [00:06:30] So we may be hiring people to join your team. So in the growing phase, and I’m gonna give you examples, I’m gonna break down. So I’m gonna make a really simple for you. I’m gonna give you seven examples of what a business is doing when it’s growing, and seven examples of what a business is doing when it’s scaling.

    [00:06:45] But just to start out really higher level here for you. Growing is when we are spending more money to increase versus scaling is when we’re not spending more, we are not spending more money and we’re, we’re technically not [00:07:00] spending more time, but we’re increasing the number of people you reach and therefore also increasing your revenue.

    [00:07:08] So growing is spending more to make more or reach more, versus scaling is not spending more, not spending more money or time, but yet we want to reach. So that is a basic separation of differences there. And as I dive in, you’re gonna realize that, okay, I might be doing some growth, some scaling activities in my business and, and that’s really common.

    [00:07:32] But if you’re going to attend an event that has to do with scaling, then you should know that. These activities really should be correctly falling in that event versus a a difference between a business growth event. So let’s go ahead and dive in. What are seven examples of what a growing business could be doing?

    [00:07:52] Number one is marketing and advertising. When you’re in the growth space, you’re usually spending money on marketing. You’re usually spending money on [00:08:00] advertising, so you’re usually putting more money out to have a greater input. So you’re putting something out for a greater. Number two is networking.

    [00:08:10] This is your time. When you’re in a growing phase of your business, you’re shaking hands, kissing babies, attending the events, attending the conferences, meeting people, hanging out with people. That’s your time. You wanna grow your business. You wanna expand the awareness of your brand, and you want people to know who you are and what you do and why you’re awesome and all those things.

    [00:08:28] So networking is a great example of something you may be doing when you’re in the growing phase. Another example is expanding your offer. So we’re gonna talk about scaling offers here in the scaling phase, but this just means when you’re in the growing phase, you’re adding more offers, you’re adding more programs.

    [00:08:47] You’re adding more, um, types of ways and services that you can work with people. That’s something that you would do in a growing phase. Also, in a growing phase, it would be taking the time to build strategic [00:09:00] partnerships, so alliances and affiliates. That would be something that you would take time to do during a growing phase of your business.

    [00:09:08] Again, it’s taking your time. Your time. You know, I’ll always say this, I think it’s actually more valuable than money and your time matters. So in a growing phase, if you’re building strategic partnerships, that’s Ty. A type of work activity that you would be in when you’re in a growing phase. Also in a growing phase.

    [00:09:27] So five of the seven I’m gonna share with you is improving your online presence. So let’s say you wanna work on updating your website or changing from one platform to the next. That would be an activity that you would be doing and you would have a team focused in on, or you’d hire out yet again, spending money to do something that needs to be done in the growing phase.

    [00:09:48] So increasing your online present. Rebranding could also fall in under that. And that wasn’t even one of the examples I had here, but when you haven’t been in, when you have been in business for a [00:10:00] while, you wanna go through a brand refreshening. And so rebranding is something really, um, that is, is reminiscent of what we may be doing in a growing phase.

    [00:10:08] Number six is building your email list. All right, so we’re growing, right? So you’re gonna spend time, maybe you’re gonna spend advertising dollars. We’re physically growing the number of people in your network in that, in that email list, that’s an example of working on your email list is something that we would do in a growing phase.

    [00:10:27] And another in the last, the seventh example of what you would do in a growing phase is spending money on personal development or professional training for. So if you are investing in mentorship, if you are investing in coaching or consulting, if you are, uh, attending events, if you are buying tickets to something that’s gonna fill you up as a leader.

    [00:10:51] If you are investing in professional personal development, then that falls into the growing phase. So hopefully you can see the common thread there is [00:11:00] in a growing phase, you are spending money or you’re spending time in order to increase. So again, growing is where we’re spending more money, spending more resources in order to gain more.

    [00:11:13] All right, so take a second with that list. Let me give it to you again and kind of identify maybe some of the activities you’re working on right now. So, marketing and advertising, networking, adding more offers, strategic partnerships, improving your online presence, um, building your email list or generating more leads, uh, in, in investing in your.

    [00:11:36] Okay, are you with me? All right, now let’s switch over to scaling. Scaling is where we are not spending more time, spending more money. Some of the little activities we’ll do to get scaling in place, that’s gonna take a little bit of time, right? But the purpose is it’s not something that’s ongoing. So scaling is where we’re not spending more money.

    [00:11:57] We’re not spending more time, but we are [00:12:00] increasing the number of people you reach and increasing the money that we bring into your business. So examples of scaling are number one, streamlining your processes, taking a good hard look at your oper operational processes and finding out where you can be more efficient, where you can.

    [00:12:16] Um, create more, um, seamless flow maybe amongst your team, maybe amongst your clients to your team. So that’s a really big activity we do in scaling, scaling companies. We’re always looking at operational processes. How can we streamline our processes? How can you streamline your systems? That’s what we need to be working on with the scaling company.

    [00:12:36] Number two is automation, especially with ai, with all the amazing software that we have out there available to us. You know, what are you doing that we can actually put on automation now that actually aligns with your company? Maybe you haven’t done that in the past. So if you are looking to scale, it’s where we’re gonna decrease the amount of manpower for a certain activity that could have [00:13:00] been done, maybe longhand before.

    [00:13:02] And we’re gonna look at how we can automate that, how we can actually scale your people. It’s a big, big, big theme. We’re talking about scaling people. I was actually, uh, was able to attend Abundance 360 with Peter Dia. A couple weeks ago, all on AI and everything that everybody’s talking about is scaling people, but it, what I really wanna hone in on this, for us, I mean, we are not just small businesses.

    [00:13:28] Most of my clients here, and most of you guys were considered micro businesses. We have teams of less than 20 people, you know, 20. Big size team for, you know, a any of the listeners here on this show. So scaling is really important for us because, you know, we wanna look at these places where we can increase the output for each one of the people that are on our team.

    [00:13:50] And so number two is what can we automate? Number three are adding more platforms. Okay? So, That means let, let’s take this example. This podcast is an [00:14:00] example. This podcast, we have it on audio now. We’ve expanded our platform and now you can see me sitting here chatting with you and using all my hands cuz I’m a hand talker on YouTube and all the places where we’re putting out the video.

    [00:14:12] So it’s actually adding more platforms to reach more people. But I’m still only recording this podcast one time. So content repurposing really fits into adding more platforms. You could even consider how you can add more platforms to your offers. The fourth activity, and this is our area of expertise at the Sweet Life Company, that is in creating scalable programs.

    [00:14:35] So that would be from taking a business from one-on-one to group coaching that would also be taking a course. To in turning it into a licensed program to companies or organizations. So there’s a bunch of different ways that you can actually scale your offer. You can go from one-on-one or even group coaching, and now you may expand it in a different way and create a hybrid program.

    [00:14:59] Or [00:15:00] you can go and we can take your training and your method and we can license it to other companies, so you’re not even the one selling it anymore. So a great example. What we love and geek out on talking about is how to scale your offers. So that’s a fourth example of some activity that you would be working on if you’re in scaling.

    [00:15:17] The fifth one is training and developing other coaches to work under you. So this isn’t hiring more coaches, this is training more people on your existing team. Or even elevating some of your clients to be able to provide some of the expertise that you maybe have been the one to do. That is a big part of what we wanna do in scaling, is utilize the people and the resources we already have.

    [00:15:40] Level them up, equip them more, and help them just say, help them to help you just disseminate the information and really serve your. So that’s another example of what we could be working on within scaling. Again, we’re now spending more money, we aren’t increasing time. We’re using the assets we have and the resources we [00:16:00] have to expand your reach.

    [00:16:01] Number six is leveraging tech. Again, we talked a little bit about ai, but don’t sleep on this guys. Um, the latest stats we have is by 2028. AI is gonna be equal to human understanding. By 2030, it is going to be considered superhuman. Granted, there’s a bunch of conversations around that and a potential even moratorium on that with the recording of this show.

    [00:16:25] But regardless, it is going to be moving forward and so you should be taking a second and understanding. How can we even leverage technology in your business to even streamline your processes and your systems to help you not have to hire other people and just help you to actually run more efficiently and scale.

    [00:16:44] And then the seventh one is actually systemizing your methodology and your process that gets people results. So when is the last time. You looked at the process of your expertise, your co, [00:17:00] your consulting, your coaching, your training, your program. When is the last time you actually looked at that and you thought, Hey, how can I even systematize how I’m getting my clients’ results?

    [00:17:10] How can I even get my clients’ greater results in less time? And let’s go down memory lane here for a second. For those people who’ve been in the coaching industry like I have forever versus maybe some of you guys don’t know this, that have only been in the coaching industry the last five to seven years.

    [00:17:27] So in the beginning of when we first started creating online courses and back in 2011 and 12, and they’re getting so popular, we’d build these huge courses, you guys, and they would go 12 weeks and there were these grand things and. People and all these assets and all these things, right? Well, what has happened to those big programs?

    [00:17:49] People are really not digging, spending forever in a day absorbing all of the content in the world. No. Now people want that high value and shorter time. [00:18:00] So what can you do with your way of coaching, your way of how you’re delivering your expertise, your method, your process to actually streamline that and systematize it more?

    [00:18:09] That would also fall under scale. So let’s kind of review some of the examples I’ve given here for scaling. You’re in a scaling phase if you are streamlining your processes, adding automation, adding more platforms or repurposing content, creating scalable programs or taking your existing programs to make them more scalable.

    [00:18:28] Again, one-to-one, to one to group or group to even a mastermind hybrid type of a field, or courses to licensing or courses to a certification program. All ways of scaling your programs. Also, if you’re in scaling, you’re developing other coaches underneath you and you’re duplicating yourself. You are leveraging technology and you’re systematizing your intellectual property.

    [00:18:53] So let’s kind of talk about this summary. So in growing, like we’ve talked about, right? [00:19:00] In growing. If we’re advertising and spending your time to go to networking and building strategic partnerships and redoing your website and all these other things, these things cost time and money. If you’re scaling, we are doing things that are.

    [00:19:15] Streamlining the process you already have to increase. So again, growing is where we’re spending more time or money to increase. Scaling is where we’re not spending more time or money, except for the initial setup of what we need to do to scale the initial scale work. And we are still increasing. So I think this is important for us to talk about, just kind of wrapping this up here for you, I think it’s really important for us to talk about, because your company is gonna dance between a time of when you’re in a growth phase and when you’re in a scale phase.

    [00:19:46] But I think the word scale is totally incorrectly used, and I, and I know that most consultants and coaches are, are wanting to really hone in and you want to be effective in your time. But when that [00:20:00] word is being so frankly, Used incorrectly. And most people don’t understand the difference between growth and scaling.

    [00:20:06] It can be confusing to where you should be focusing your time and attention and money. So the whole purpose of this show is because I wanted to help you identify, first of all, no, I love leveling up IQ of entrepreneurs, right? So obviously that’s what I wanted to do here. But now to take it a step further and help you to identify, are we really in a growth phase in our business?

    [00:20:27] Are we in a scaling phase? Because in a scaling phase, we’re gonna be actually be able to save you. In a growing phase, you can expect to be spending a lot more time and money. Where are you in your business right now? What is more important right now for your company? Do you have money to invest in maybe some of the growth projects that you wanted to do or do we need to actually stop and look at all the things you’ve already done in really determine how much better we can scale those processes?

    [00:20:55] How much better we can duplicate your people, how we can actually expand your reach? [00:21:00] Spending more money, and that’s what we are here to help you with. As a matter of fact, in the Sweet Life Company here, we have a program called Wavemaker, and there is an entire group in that program that is called Scale.

    [00:21:12] All we do is we help experts, coaches, and consultants scale. So if that’s where you are and you want us to dive in with you, I would love to work with you and roll up my sleeves. You can visit sweet life and find out more about how you can apply for Wavemaker to be in. Otherwise, go and be blessed.

    [00:21:34] Take this information. Know that there is a difference between growing and scaling. Tell your friends if you weren’t aware of that, and think about where you are in this and actually what you need as a company if you have money to invest. Which of the growth projects is the most important for you to lean in and invest in if you do not have money to invest right now?

    [00:21:53] And we really wanna make great use of the hard work and the ip, you’ve already. Then let’s [00:22:00] go ahead and figure out how we can scale your systems and expand your reach. All right. I hope that helps you guys. This was episode number 284 here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Business Podcast. All of the show notes can be found by visiting 284.

    [00:22:17] If you cruise over to our website at Sweet Life Co, you can find all the resources that I shared with you and just really appreciate you guys sharing this show with your friends, hanging out here with me and listening. And if you haven’t subscribed yet to YouTube, come hang out with me on YouTube. You can see all my notes.

    [00:22:33] I have like all these crazy notes behind the scenes and, and how I record these shows and how I make sure we’re doing our due diligence and even research and all of our show notes so that we’re always delivering you proven a trusted business strategies that other coaches have a tendency to charge you thousands for. That’s what we’re known here for. So thanks for listening. Love you guys and I will talk to you next week. Bye for now.[00:23:00]


    6 Must-Have Components of a Strong Coaching Offer with April Beach (Episode 283)

    6 Must-Have Components of a Strong Coaching Offer





    Welcome to our podcast on the 6 pillars of a strong coaching offer. In this episode, we will discuss why these six areas – client systems, operations systems, fulfillment and assets, model, pricing, and sales – are essential to building a strong coaching program or course. We’ll cover why it’s important to audit your coaching program regularly, and what the downfalls are if you don’t.
    If you’re a coach, consultant, expert, or small business owner, this episode is for you. You’ll learn how to evaluate your coaching program or course in each of these six areas, and identify areas where you may need to make improvements. You’ll gain insights into how to optimize your systems and processes to increase efficiency and profitability, and how to ensure client satisfaction by delivering high-quality services that meet their needs and expectations. By the end of this episode, you’ll have a better understanding of the key factors that contribute to a strong coaching offer, and be equipped with the knowledge and tools you need to take your coaching program or course to the next level.


    At the end of this episode, you will:

      1. Know the 6 Components of a Strong and Scalable Coaching Program
      2. Have a quick view on your program and where you may need improvements
      3. Know how to optimize your program without building it from scratch
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    00:00:46] Hi you guys. Welcome back to another episode here. This is episode number 283, and I’m April Beach, the host here at the Sweet Life Entrepreneur in Business Podcast. Founder and CEO of the Sweet Life Company, and I’m so [00:01:00] glad that you have joined us for this episode. We talk a lot about offer engineering here on this podcast because of a couple of different reasons.

    [00:01:08] First of all, your offer is the most important part of your business. All of the most amazing marketing and branding in the world can’t save a business whose actual product. Is lacking. And so your offer is engineered out of your genius, and we want your offer to scale and reach millions of people and millions of dollars.

    [00:01:28] And so you’ll find here on the show that that’s a lot about what we talk about. So if that’s what you’re looking for, then this podcast is a good place for you to be. In addition to all the other amazing outside ex experts we bring in for you, we have just wrapped up a whole series with a bunch of incredible experts, everything from AI to marketing, and now we’re diving into a conversation, just a little intimate fireside chat between just me and you.

    [00:01:54] If you aren’t watching us now, this is on YouTube as well, so you can listen to us on all of your favorite [00:02:00] podcast listening apps or cruise over to YouTube and we can hang out together and you can see me here and going over all my show notes I have for you. I’m really excited to dive in with you today.

    [00:02:10] This show is brought to you by Offer Engineer. The Offer Engineer is a masterclass workshop that we host here at the Sweet Life Company that helps those of you who are established subject matter experts, coaches and consultants, speakers and authors to level up your offers and get them to the next level. It’s a very powerful workshop. You can find information on that by visiting the

    [00:02:34] Okay, so let’s go ahead and dive into what we are talking about today. Today we’re actually unpacking a framework that we teach here at the Sweet Life Company. This is proprietary to us, but I wanted to share it here with you on the show. I share a lot of our frameworks here publicly on the podcast, and we’re talking about the six components of building a strong, scalable program. Now this could be a coaching program, a consulting program. It could be [00:03:00] a technical program where you’re teaching or guiding somebody else through this. What’s beautiful about what we’re gonna talk about today is it actually applies to any type of business model that you were building.

    [00:03:10] And what I have found over the years, I’ve been consulting experts to extract their genius and engineer their leading programs for 27 years. You guys, I know, it seems like a really, really long time, 17 years. Specifically with online business experts, and what I’ve found in helping to build the frameworks behind so many programs is there are six components that every single program needs to have, and that’s what we’re talking about here on the show today.

    [00:03:36] I’m gonna give you all six and I’m gonna help you go through the process of actually unpacking these and considering these for one or, or possibly even many of your programs in offer. So we’re diving into how strong is. Coaching program or your consulting program or offer, and we’re gonna dive into all six of these components.

    [00:03:57] At the end of this show, you are gonna know what [00:04:00] all six of these components are, and so you’re very mindful about this and how to apply it to your business. You’re also gonna have a very quick view of how well you are doing and fulfilling each one of these components in any of your offers. So this is gonna give you a very fast snapshot.

    [00:04:15] So you can take it away and run with it of what part of your offer you may need to level up or upgrade and you’re gonna know how to optimize your program fast. This offer engineering, you can use it to either build a program from scratch, but I find this audit is truly best. For those of you who’ve been doing what you’ve been doing for a while, we wanna take another second glance at it and make sure that it’s optimized and.

    [00:04:40] All of the show notes, everything that we’re talking about can be found by visiting 283. This is episode number 283, and I have a tool for you today. So grab this tool, everything we’re talking about, I have a complete. Offer Audit worksheet for you to go along with [00:05:00] this episode, we’ll make sure that the link to that offer audit worksheet, you can download it just by going over to the show notes again at and it’s our offer audit worksheet and everything we’re talking about, I actually go into more detail for you and help you actually audit your own offers based on these components.

    [00:05:19] So if that is what you’re ready for, if that sounds like what you signed up for. Then let’s go ahead and dive in. So let’s talk about this first. How strong is your coaching offer? How strong actually is your product? You know, one of the things that you guys might not know is that I own multiple companies and my husband owns multiple, multiple companies.

    [00:05:41] And in the company is that he collectively, there are five businesses between the two of us right now, and some of the companies that he owns are physical product C. And the difference is in a physical product company, the very first thing we build is the actual product, right? If you don’t have a product, you don’t have a business.

    [00:05:58] But what’s different [00:06:00] about online business, because there are so many shiny marketing funnels and all these things you can do and reels, and you guys know exactly what I’m talking about, right? The difference is that you actually do see businesses. Build on online business that might have a terrible product.

    [00:06:18] It doesn’t hinge on the product. Whereas physical product businesses or software businesses, everything hinges on how well we’ve engineered the actual product. Online business coaching and consulting comes out of your expertise. So if your expertise is not engineered correctly, if your program isn’t structured correctly to give people guaranteed results, you can still come across businesses who failed at that.

    [00:06:41] Business may look amazing. They may have bought followers or whatever that is, and their product actually sucks. And so we’re on a mission here to make sure every True Experts program is engineered correctly. So why is this important to do so doing a program audit isn’t being. Is important because we need to [00:07:00] identify areas of improvement, right?

    [00:07:01] We wanna con, continually optimize your program. We wanna continually make sure that you are always ahead of the game, ahead of your competition. Another reason is to make sure that your clients are really satisfied, and I always love to go be above and beyond that. We wanna say that we want your clients transformed.

    [00:07:17] Nobody needs more content. They just need a transformation and they are hiring us to deliver that transformation. And then the third reason why we wanna make sure that we’re doing an audit is to make sure that you also are still happy with the program that you’re delivering. Your happiness as a leader can’t be underestimated.

    [00:07:36] I wanna make sure that you love what you’re doing. And sometimes when we stop and we look at what we’ve been doing, maybe for so long, we realize, hey, you know, that isn’t the way I wanna live my life or flow through my cadence of my work. And so it’s important that you give yourself an opportunity to stop and do an offer audit for all of those reasons.

    [00:07:53] It’s not just about money. It’s not just about clients being satisfied, but it’s also about you being happy. I’m a [00:08:00] really big advocate for that, as you probably know. As you’ve probably been listening to this show for years, and so what happens if we don’t do this? Okay? What happens if we don’t stop and do an offer audit?

    [00:08:11] You are gonna find some stagnant stagnation in why I can’t even say that. Stagnation. In your program, you are gonna find that, you know, it’s just kind of getting dull or boring, or maybe you’re getting bored with it. That’s what’s gonna happen if we don’t stop and do that. Also, if we don’t stop and audit the systems and operations of your offer every once in a.

    [00:08:31] It could become very inefficient. So some of the things that you built in the beginning of delivering your program and your offer probably worked great then. But now are there different tools? Tools and software and technology that we can actually upgrade that particular offer, offer to, to actually save you time and money?

    [00:08:48] And then last but not least, is if you don’t take a pause to audit your offer, and we’re gonna talk about the six components of offers and how to do that here in a sec, then what’s gonna happen [00:09:00] is your competition is gonna surge above you because especially the competition that you need to really pay attention to the true business builders, they stop and they.

    [00:09:11] And so I wanna make sure that everybody is stopping and doing this and that. My responsibility here, you know, on the show is I always wanna just pour into you and keep you the tip of the sword in your niche. And so that’s why we’re talking about this today. Okay? So let’s go ahead and dive into what are actually the six pillars of a strong scalable coaching program.

    [00:09:32] So these are not in any particular order, and again, as I said, it doesn’t actually matter what type of program you. These pillars can apply to a mastermind. They can apply to a v i P day. They can apply to, um, an r r, they can apply to a course or a membership. They can apply to your content licensed program or your certification program.

    [00:09:56] It doesn’t matter what type of program you’re building. That’s really important [00:10:00] to understand and because when. We look at true program success, it needs to have all these six components. Okay? So that’s rule number one. However, the reason why as I go through these, they aren’t in any particular order, is because your program is beautifully different than mine.

    [00:10:17] Everybody’s program is, and frankly should be engineered uniquely and differently. And so what may be a really important component or a c pillar of my program just might not actually be so important to you. So that’s why there is no hierarchy in each one of these pillars except for here is rule number one.

    [00:10:35] The very first pillar I’m gonna share with you is the most important and without, and then they can come in any order you want. Without this first pillar built strongly in your program, you have no program. So let’s go ahead and dive into that first. The very first component or pillar of a strong, scalable coaching program is your intellectual property.

    [00:10:57] It’s your assets. It’s your [00:11:00] genius. It’s the most important part of everything that you’re building around there. It’s your method, it’s your framework, your method or your process of getting people results, your framework of getting people results. It’s your genius curriculum. And when that is curated correctly, when it’s extracted out of your brain and built into a framework.

    [00:11:22] Our framework we teach is called transformational program design. It works with any program out there, and it’s guaranteed to organize your thoughts and expertise into a transformational program, but for you, Not, but by the way, you can tap into that. You know where to find us if you wanna tap into that.

    [00:11:40] For right now. For the purpose of this podcast, I want you to know the pillar number one is your IP and assets. And so I want you to take a pause for a second here as I’m speaking through this, and ask yourself, this is where the auditing comes in. And again, grab our worksheet to do a full audit. Super fun, but just ask yourself and pause for a [00:12:00] second.

    [00:12:00] How well do you think that you’ve done extracting and engineering your own genius? How clear are your own thoughts about the expertise you’re teaching? The flow in which you’re teaching is your transformation guaranteed not only in the whole program, but in each one of the benchmarks? And so give yourself a little grade there.

    [00:12:17] Say, Hey, listen, I, you can do like a red, green, or yellow sometimes. We, we do that grading system when we’re doing this in a live. We host this fun event called Offer Audit Live. You guys should definitely join in on that sometime. It’s totally free to join in on, but we, I ask people, Hey, listen, you know, give yourself like a, a signal.

    [00:12:36] Give yourself a red, greener yellow on how well you have done engineering your IP and your assets. And so give yourself a red, greener a yellow on that right now. And it, and uh, or if you haven’t even started, if you’re listening to this and you’re considering building a new offer, then that’s where you wanna start.

    [00:12:51] Pillar number two is your model. Okay, so let’s talk about what a business model is. People get confused all the time. A business model is how you work with your [00:13:00] clients and how you actually deliver your services. So this is the who, what, when, where, why, and how of your. All right. So is it a course? Is it a hybrid program? Is it a mastermind? Is it an MRR, which is a monthly reoccurring revenue program, but it’s different than a membership. Is it a content or a course for packaging up for licensing? How well is this model crafted and how well is it working for both you and your clients? That is the second component. I want you to give yourself a second here and give yourself a, just a brief pause and say, Hey, you know, what is that a red?

    [00:13:38] Like, do I really need to take a look at this? Is it a yellow, ah, it’s okay. Or is it a green? Hey, we’ve nailed this Pillar. Component number three are your client systems. So client systems are, these are the, these are the things you guys. Your clients rave about, these are the things they actually tell their friends about.

    [00:13:58] It’s how they [00:14:00] felt when they were part of your ecosystem, when they were part of your program. It’s the things that you did to keep them moving forward. It might be a gift in the mail or a handwritten card or you know, sending them something they didn’t expect. What about, you know, what, as far as client experience systems have you done to engineer into this?

    [00:14:18] And that is component number three of a strong program. You need to have client exer experience systems built into your program. I, in relation to whatever it is your program does, right. Um, as it applies to what you do, how well have you done with that? Or is that an area you wanna improve on?

    [00:14:36] Component number four are your operational systems. These are all the things behind the scenes, right? How does your program run like clockwork? This is scheduling. These are the systems to actually make sure that your team is tracking everybody and where they are. This is everything that actually makes the program become effective.

    [00:14:57] How well have you done [00:15:00] engineering your operat? Systems, how well is your team if you’re working with a team, executing things that need to be done within your offer? Red, green or yellow there. Just kind of give yourself a a little rating. The fifth pillar is money. The fifth pillar is are you reaching your financial benchmarks?

    [00:15:17] Are you hitting your profit benchmarks for this program? That’s one area that fits under the component of money, but there’s so much more than that. In addition to just understanding and judging about how well you’ve done there, I want you to think. What about, how’s your pricing? How is your pricing actually structured?

    [00:15:36] Are you taking into consideration a guaranteed ROI for the investment? How well have you priced your program? There’s so much out there. You hear me talking about it all the time and, and you know, it might seem like I’m bashing it, but. I’m a, I’m a realist and I’m a business strategist and I’ve been an entrepreneur for a long time.

    [00:15:53] So when I see programs out there that are saying, oh, just charge more, charge more, charge more, and just add on all these things [00:16:00] that might be frivolous, that’s not how we build high ticket. That’s unethical. How we build high ticket is building ROI in assets into the program that do equal the value. I mean, I have some pretty dang high ticket programs, right?

    [00:16:15] But they weren’t pulled outta blue sky, like little unicorns off of clouds to just come up with a number I wanted to come up with. So how well have you done pulling your assets together and actually evaluating the value of your program?

    [00:16:29] And then pillar number six are your sales. Okay, so this is a little bit different than money. This is your actual sales, uh, pipeline and how people come into the journey with you. How well have you done engineering the journey into working with you or using sales calls? Are using webinars? Are you using sell by chat? Are you using referrals or affiliates? Are you, uh, are you out there networking right in, in shaking hands and kissing babies.

    [00:16:53] All of your clients come to you through networking and referrals. I will say I love networking and referrals. Uh, [00:17:00] it’s one of the primary ways that we actually here at the Sweet Life Company receive our clients as well too. I was just hosting an office hours for our clients and Wavemaker and. Had three different clients come in there last week and say, oh my gosh, I can’t believe the number of referrals from partners that have come.

    [00:17:18] You know, clients of referrals from partners that have come our way. And they were so ecstatic. But the reason for that is because they had engineered this sales process really, really well. So it made it easy for people to refer clients to them. So how well have you done that in your business? How well in, in this particular, How well is that sales journey pipeline engineered into your offer and how well have you done laying out the prerequisites of the benchmarks of worship people are in order to, um, make sure that they’re in the right place to work with you?

    [00:17:52] So in summary, Let me go back and recap the six pillars of a strong, scalable, pro encroaching program. First one is your IP. You’re [00:18:00] genius. We have nothing without it. And then the other ones you can dance through them with, uh, strength according to your program. Number two is your model. How well is the model engineered?

    [00:18:10] Do you need to upgrade your model? Maybe it’s been a course forever and you wanna move into licensing your course to other companies. And so if you’re thinking about moving your program from a chorus to licensing, go over to sweet life and we have a million resources for you in that. The third component are your client systems.

    [00:18:28] The fourth component are your operational systems. The fifth is money, and the sixth is your sales pipeline. And so as an expert, I wanted to record this show for you. It’s something we do internally with our clients. I’ve been hosting these offer audit lives, which are so much fun. We have given, uh, you this entire.

    [00:18:47] Coaching offer components Worksheet for you. Again, cruise over to the show notes. This is episode number 283 and you can download the Offer Audit worksheet, but you’re an expert. You’re here because you understand that the [00:19:00] success of your business hinges on your ability to deliver and implement a program that has incredible results.

    [00:19:06] And so, because you’ve identified that that’s why you’re here, and that is what I’m here to help you with as an offer engineer and a helper of experts like you. Um, that’s why I wanted to record this show for you guys. So now each of these categories, again, is gonna be measured differently based on where you are in what you’re building in your business.

    [00:19:28] Every single component has to be represented in every single offer. It doesn’t matter if, if it’s a free offer and that dollar amount is zero. Every single one of these components is represented in every single offer. So that is how we conduct an offer audit, and those are the six components of a strong, scalable coaching program, consulting, training program, expert program, whatever area of expertise you fall into.

    [00:19:56] So again, all of the show notes are found at [00:20:00] Sweetlifepodcast.Com and the download for this particular worksheet. This is episode number 283, and you can go ahead and grab the bonuses and all the show notes from there. All right, you guys, if you love this episode, we would love for you to up arrow and share it.

    [00:20:14] It would mean a lot to us. I refuse advertisers and I have for six years on this show because I just wanna make sure you’re getting a hundred percent value. And so we. Appreciate you sharing this show. Thanks so much. I’ll talk to you guys on that next episode.


    Harnessing Realistic Testimonials to Boost Your Business – with April Beach and Sarah Allred (Episode 282)

    Harnessing Realistic Testimonials to Boost Your Business





    Client Praise Powerhouse: Curating good testimonies is essential for business owners for several reasons including, establishing trust and credibility, increase conversion rates with the right buyers, and foster customer loyalty. The temptation is to become more extreme in our marketing in today’s economy, but this episode doubles down on how you can connect with the best, most perfect audience and keep your business in the black. 
    Today Sarah Allred is in the house, and she brings her amazing ability that helps business owners reach new audiences by curating powerful case studies. However, these case studies are not the ones you will expect. In this show you’ll learn why the unicorn testimonies are not the best ones to gain long term clients. Instead we dive into the framework of gathering “core results” in your business that everyone can relate to. 
    Learn how to connect with buyers in a realistic way that creates loyal fans and realistic buyers.


    At the end of this episode, you will:

      • Understand how the case studies you may be sharing are not to your benefit
      • Why “core results” are important and how to establish them in your business
      • How to curate case studies that will actually bring in the perfect buyers and meet their expectations every time
    Resources mentioned: 
    To learn more about Sarah Allred 
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:43] April: Hi guys, and you. Welcome back to another episode here on SweetLife Entrepreneur Business Podcast and today this is a really special treat because we are diving in and talking about completely disrupting marketing in a way that you might not have thought about [00:01:00] before.

    [00:01:00] April: So you know about the importance of getting case studies for your business and testimonies, but today’s. Literally unpacks everything you’ve ever known about receiving case studies, receiving testimonies, and using them in a marketing capacity that is gonna make a massive difference in your business immediately.

    [00:01:20] April: So here is what you can expect from this episode. First of all, it’s episode number 282. So if you’ve been a listener for years, you know that means you can cruise over to Sweet Life Forward slash 2 82 and dive into all the show notes, all of the resources and everything else we have to share with you here that are bonuses to this show.

    [00:01:40] April: And you can also tap into the transcription there if you’d prefer. With that being said, let’s talk about what you can expect. From this episode, we are gonna dive into how to actually use case studies to find the perfect audience, the perfect buyers that are going to absolutely rave [00:02:00] about you forever and come back asking for more, come back, wanting to work with you more.

    [00:02:05] April: What’s so interesting is that these are not the case studies that you would expect, and frankly, they’re probably not the case studies that you see on most businesses, sales pages and websites. And so we’re rethinking the whole entire thing. We’re breaking it apart. We are repacking it, and at the end of this episode, you will understand.

    [00:02:28] April: Case studies in your business, and it’s in a way that is really gonna benefit you and your clients, you’re gonna know why. Understanding the core results that you deliver in your business is probably one of the most important things that you can do in the formation of these case studies. And you’re gonna know how to curate case studies in a way that are attracting clients.

    [00:02:50] April: Always going to win with your service. I’m super excited to dive in with our special guest today and a dear friend, Sarah Allred. [00:03:00] Let me tell you a little bit about Sarah. So she is a marketing guru, but particularly Sarah works with organizations to help them market to women, which particularly that is, I’m gonna get you the number. 72% of buyers in every household of decision makers are the women. And so Sarah’s experience is using strategies that directly go to women that directly speak to the decision makers in the household. And she has been disrupting marketing with her frameworks and how she teaches businesses to do that.

    [00:03:34] April: Her brand Victress Marketing addresses these issues and helps companies increase their sales. By how they communicate directly to women. With a top 30 business podcast on Apple’s iTunes, her greatest accomplishment is building her empire while maintaining a strict 12 hour work week that celebrates Fridays off to go swimming with her kids, and you can already know.

    [00:03:59] April: That’s why Sarah [00:04:00] and I connect so well. She’s highly sought after as a strategy coach with clients all over the world. In using Sarah’s unique Victress marketing system, clients are able to escape salesy marketing, which you’re really going to hear how to do this on this episode and spend less time on the computer.

    [00:04:18] April: Growing their business in a way that lets them fully thrive with the perfect clients that are the right fit for them. So with that being said, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. I’m super excited for you to join and actually tap into this framework and it was awesome. And then after the episode, of course you know where to find all the show notes again by going to sweet life 282. And we are super glad that you’re.

    [00:04:46] April: Hi you guys. I am super stoked to be here with my friend Sarah. And Sarah and I are newer friends in the last couple of years, but I had this amazing opportunity to sit down with her and have dinner in Florida and [00:05:00] just hear about her genius. In how she inserts her genius into businesses. And this genius is something that is really important for all of us to understand.

    [00:05:09] April: It’s how to connect with the right buyers in a realistic way that actually creates these loyal fans, repeat buyers. It doesn’t make your business seem like. Pie in the sky, you’re very relatable. And so in preparation for what we are gonna talk about here and what Sarah’s gonna teach you guys, I have a million notes on a piece of paper here, um, to, to help guide this conversation.

    [00:05:33] April: But, I just want you to know that this is very important for you all to be here from a marketing standpoint. This is going to be a very good use of your time. We’re gonna give you high value here. Sarah’s just going to walk you through some important practices and, um, and give you a transformation in your business just by hanging out here with us on the show.

    [00:05:52] April: So Sarah, I am so glad that you’re here. Um, do you wanna give yourself just a little personal intro and then we can dive right into what you [00:06:00] do and, and why your zone of genius is what it.

    [00:06:03] Sarah: Oh, I, I’m so honored to be here and I think back on, I have known you way longer than you have known me, and you were really the one that introduced me that there actually was an art to offer creation.

    [00:06:15] Sarah: And I just thought, oh, you mean I don’t just slap a whole bunch of stuff together and like pray? Everybody buys it right. In my early years of business. And so you have really guided me to, um, a mindset. Actually serving your people, like heaven forbid people. Right. Thank you. Like you were kind of the one that Yeah.

    [00:06:34] Sarah: That initially introduced me to like, like what would you do differently today if you just wanted to, to really highly provide value for your people? And you’ve continued to do that for years. So this is a dream of mine to be sitting across from you and I’m so grateful. So thank you. Thank you. I didn’t, I didn’t realize that.

    [00:06:49] April: Thank you so much. Oh wow. That’s very sweet. Okay, so. You have this amazing ability to help business owners see things that they are not [00:07:00] seen in their own business in order to reach clients in a very realistic way. Tell everybody a little bit, you know, about your family, where you live. Give us a little like behind the scenes of what Sarah does every single week. Um, and then bring us kind of down to where we are here in this conversation..

    [00:07:18] Sarah: Totally, totally. So I live in northern Utah. Uh, I love to ski. I’m a Harry Potter fan. I’m a Star Wars fan. Uh, my faith is super important to me. Those are some of my foundational things. I am married to the boy down the street, even though like I was a marching band nerd in high school and he was like an all-American soccer player.

    [00:07:36] Sarah: We were on different planets through high school. We certainly reconnected after our schooling and married the boy that literally was down the street from me, which is a conversation for another day. Would we just. Sappy and beautiful. Um, I have four awesome kids ranging from age three to 13. I’ve got a golden doodle that will probably bark in the middle of this interview, so we will welcome his contributions.

    [00:07:57] Sarah: Um, and I run a business [00:08:00] and when I originally started my business, um, my biggest, uh, focus had to be that my husband was in the middle of medical school, and so his world and commitments had to take prior. As far as time, and so I feel really grateful. Gosh, hindsight is so 2020 that I was able to build my business, um, to f my first six figures, my second to half a million dollars in 12 hours a week without a team.

    [00:08:27] Sarah: That was the goal, and there is no secret sauce. Really to how that happened other than the fact that I had to work it within 12 hours a week. And so hindsight is so beautiful that I feel so grateful to have had that opportunity. Now I’ve got a team, and somehow along the way I was able to find that my gift is really being able to step into people’s businesses and teach them how to attract what I believe is the most powerful consumer on earth, which.

    [00:08:58] Sarah: Women. Mm-hmm. So [00:09:00] I focus on one-on-one consultations, group coaching, as well as course material that helps business owners tap into and basically not repel the most powerful consumer, which is women. So that is my specialty. Wow.

    [00:09:13] April: Wow. I, I love that you’re here. I, you know, first of all, this is not what this podcast episode particularly is about, but we do talk about this a lot in the show. The systems that you had to create in your business to do what you did in 12 hours a week are like, And you didn’t even realize it right then. Now I didn’t realize it. You’re like, look at what I did. I love that. I love that. And we just do what we have to do, uh, to, to make it work. But it also takes dedication and tenacity and a belief in your genius and what you do. And, and you had that. So, um, congratulations. Oh,

    [00:09:45] Sarah: thank you. I mean, it’s an honor and anybody in the room who feels like I don’t have enough time, or I don’t have enough startup costs or whatever, that’s your ticket to the big leagues, like leverage that. That’s where the magical.

    [00:09:57] April: Right. Right. You do because you’re doing the important work. [00:10:00] Um, I always, I always say to my team, I’m like, okay, I have a whole day to get work done, which means I’m not gonna get anything done.

    [00:10:07] Sarah: Amen. I never have a whole day the Grands Plus ever. Right.

    [00:10:11] April: Kids are older now. Right. But I, I remember that in those days. It was like after bedtime and, you know, all these crazy things. But now I have all this time and it, but it doesn’t mean I get more done guys. Um, so I digress. But I love your story and, and I think that that’s why we’re, we’re friends and we connect alot.

    [00:10:27] April: So today we are talking about. The difference between sharing marketing content that helps people actually connect with your business versus repelling people because they think it’s ridiculous to pie in the sky.

    [00:10:44] April: So at the end of today, our listeners are going to know how to, um, establish their marketing and their messaging in a way based on what you’re teaching that is going to create loyal. Buyers followers, [00:11:00] and so I’m really excited for you to dive into this. Teach us what part of marketing are marketing Are we talking about, um, what’s not working that we need to shine light on and be in? How people rethink, what do we need to rethink in this episode? Oh, I

    [00:11:16] Sarah: wanna dive straight in. Okay. Okay, good. What? What we are really going to leverage today is not to help you with lead generation or a front end offer. We are here to leverage a specific part of your marketing and your messaging that will help you build loyalty with existing customers.

    [00:11:36] Sarah: We are looking to leverage specifically, K drum roll please. Testimonial. And case studies in order to produce repeat customers second purchases through through third purchases, fourth purchases, fifth purchases. That is what we are aiming to target through the world of testimonials and case studies. That’s what we’re covering. Wow.

    [00:11:58] April: Okay. So what’s wrong with [00:12:00] testimonies and case studies right now? Why is this such an issue? Um, and you and I talked about this behind the scenes and it immediately, I was like, of. Of course, but it isn’t something that we’ve, we’ve actually discussed before. So what’s wrong? Why is it working?

    [00:12:14] Sarah: Right, so I think the temptation is, is we have combined the purpose of testimonials with what we’ve been taught in traditional marketing about like hooks and headlines and how to make people stop on social media. And what we’ve done is we’ve made testimonials and case studies.

    [00:12:32] Sarah: Unrelatable, that’s what’s happened is all of a sudden if you’re, if you’re gonna look at Googling how to make money online from home, everything in the top 10 parts of Google are gonna say, how to make a hundred thousand dollars a month from home, and how this client made $10,000 in their first day, and how this person made a million dollars in an hour.

    [00:12:50] Sarah: And what happens is, Is while that person, it will grab their attention and they will say, well, I would love to make an extra $100,000 per month. Is there anyone [00:13:00] listening that would not want that result? Like we would all be in line. Right? Right. And so while that kind of like case study, whatever you wanna call it, testimonial case study, we’ll use those interchangeably in this discussion.

    [00:13:12] Sarah: Whether you use that, um, if you just choose to use that as a hook. The reason it doesn’t work is I’m gonna get real blunt with you. The chance of you regularly producing a hundred thousand dollars in revenue for your everyday client that buys your offer is. Right, and because of that, they will come in and buy the initial offer, and then down the road they’re gonna say, I’m stupid.

    [00:13:40] Sarah: Her product didn’t work for me. His or her product didn’t work for me. I didn’t get the support that I needed. Nobody wants my product. They get into a world of doubt and they associate the feeling of doubt failure, and that they’re not good enough with your product or business, and they won’t buy again.

    [00:13:58] April: Wow. Okay, [00:14:00] so let’s just pause for a minute. So what you are saying is by sharing the highest rarest result in case studies, that it causes people who then purchase based on that result, when in fact that is not a common result that most people achieve to feel like they have failed in your program or they aren’t good enough or your program doesn’t work for them.

    [00:14:27] Sarah: Absolutely. So you certainly get the front end purchase, but in the way of April Beach, we are here to actually serve our people with the highest value pod. That’s why I’m on this podcast for crying out loud. Okay. We are here to create intense value. You will get the front end purchase, but then your repeat purchases will go down dramatically, um, because they feel they have failed themselves or you have even failed them in the.

    [00:14:55] April: That is so true and it’s an elephant in the room, but [00:15:00] nobody is saying that. Nobody, nobody’s saying that is saying that. This is like, to me like I have chills because I mean, how many of us as business owners, let’s just talk about this, right? How many of us as business owners look at. Competitors or other companies and even look at their case studies and see, oh my gosh, this person, you know, helps their clients, you know, reach eight figures in six months.

    [00:15:20] April: This person does this. This person helps their clients gain a hundred thousand Instagram followers based on their method, right? How many of us is leaders even look at those other testimonies that other companies create and share even, you know, as legitimate as they. And feel even. Let’s first talk about our own psyche as a leader, right?

    [00:15:42] April: What if we don’t have those high results? What if what we do is amazing, but there isn’t a monetary component, there’s more of a psychological transformation or something else. Or what if we’re really great at what we do? But, you know, and this, I think this is a case with a lot of our [00:16:00] leaders, or a lot of our listeners, a lot of our listeners are really good and they’re really dedicated to serving people.

    [00:16:08] April: And I, I think that even before we even dive in, you’re gonna share like a framework to, to build these case studies. But even before we do that, I just wanna take a pause and tell everybody who’s listening that if you have felt like your business or your program or whatever isn’t enough because your competitor is sharing these moonshot testimonies.

    [00:16:32] April: Then it’s not true. That isn’t a reflection of it, and that is very uncommon. And like we’re gonna dive in here. There are so many factors. You and I talked about this, you know, behind the scenes before we record it. Like we have clients that license offers, you know, from. 80,000 to 800,000. And we have clients that are working on building their programs to license and they haven’t sold one yet.

    [00:16:55] April: You know that that’s the real, there’s so many other factors. So I just wanna pause for a minute [00:17:00] to all of you guys listening and saying that, do not measure how good and dedicated and amazing you are, as long as you’re engineer your program’s, engineered correctly, you know? Mm-hmm. And the results you delivered to your client.

    [00:17:12] April: Don’t feel intimidated by these other things because what Sarah is saying here, Actually, those over the Moon case studies and testimonies are potentially hurting the relationships that businesses could have long-term with our clients. Is that right?

    [00:17:27] Sarah: You’re so spot on. And I think the temptation is, is everyone is attracted to the sexiness of like overnight success. And so when you get that one client or when you’re aiming to get that one client to that, to that massive result, you get, you get really, really lost in the weeds of being able to play the long-term game of business. We lose sight that like after this launch ends and after all this work is quote unquote done after this [00:18:00] launch.

    [00:18:01] Sarah: What, how am I going to keep those people engaged and how am I gonna serve them to continue to serve their life? And so I I echo the, the, the challenge that your coaches and, and the people that you were, your amazing clients that they struggle with in the fact of like, we all want the overnight success, but if you promise the moon and don’t deliver, your business will also be an overnight.

    [00:18:26] Sarah: Right when those customers run out. And that’s not why I’m in business. I’m not gonna do that to my family. I’m not gonna do that to my clients. And you’re the same way. Mm-hmm. We’re not in business for the overnight success. Mm-hmm. You

    [00:18:39] April: said something really powerful be before, um, we started recording, you said, especially now people Oh, amen.

    [00:18:47] April: Don’t want necessarily, they’re not looking for the 10 x, they’re looking for the two x. That was just Amen. Amazing. Cuz you are so right. You know they’re not, [00:19:00] yes, they want the 10 x, they want the four, they want the six, but right now they just want the two. And so even if your company delivers the 10 x and, and you are amazing at that.

    [00:19:11] April: What we’re talking about today is we’re talking about creating relatable case studies and testimonies. That speak to the two x because speaking to the two X is, maybe even based on what you’re saying, it appears to be more important than speaking to the 10 X results because a 10 X is a rare result in most consulting businesses cuz there’s so many other factors.

    [00:19:37] April: So let’s talk about that for. Can we go into that? Can we go into what are some of the factors in all of your research and all of your work that you find gets in the way of clients actually getting the 10 x? So now we’re removing us as business owners, removing us as the coaches. Let’s talk about what’s going on in the buyers and the consumer’s life.

    [00:19:58] April: That even if you are like [00:20:00] the cat’s meow of what you do and your program is engineered, transformationally correctly, all this stuff. What is, what are these factors that we cannot actually. Talk about some of those that you’ve found in

    [00:20:13] Sarah: your research. I love this cuz this is like what I’m hired to do.

    [00:20:16] Sarah: Mm-hmm. Let’s just bring on the game plan. Okay. So I walk in there and I have my team and we go in and we watch webinars and we watch pitches and we, we go through programs and we do all these things and we like. Audit it. We audit it and we say, what is going on in this buyer’s brain? And can I use my own case studies please to show you how we did this?

    [00:20:38] Sarah: And this is actually gonna give your people an assignment, something to be, okay, cool. Actionable to start. Okay. You

    [00:20:43] April: guys get pen and paper.

    [00:20:44] Sarah: Pen and paper. Pen and paper. So we walked into this company, they are $25 million a year in sales. So you would. They’re, they’re doing just fine. They’ve got a legitimate business, right?

    [00:20:54] Sarah: 25 plus, um, million dollars a year. However, 3%, and I specialize in women, but this is [00:21:00] still gonna help you with your sales, with men. Um, they came in and they said, only 3% of our buyers are women. What is going on? 3% of people, right? That’s

    [00:21:09] April: insane. Don’t we buy everything?

    [00:21:11] Sarah: Don’t really buy everyth. We buy 85% of things by the way we can. That’s a discussion. Let’s for another date. Alright, so I dive in and we are watching their webinar and I am specifically looking for the case studies. Okay? And they owe investment business. They are investment coaches. Okay? What do you do with your money? And they, they target, um, Entrepreneurs.

    [00:21:30] Sarah: So we’re sitting there watching, they’re talking about this really unique investment strategy and they’re saying, you know, this is such a successful strategy that look who else is using this same strategy. And then the next picture is Oprah Winfrey and they talk about how she’s using their investment strategy.

    [00:21:46] Sarah: And then the next person is Jeff Bezos. Owner of Amazon, and then the next person is Warren Buffett. And my heart is just sinking because I can see all my little [00:22:00] team, my posse of people that I bring in to audit and we’re all going, no, here it is. Here is the unrelated ability. And what I have my team do as we audit and I do it myself, is we get in there and we fill in the blank.

    [00:22:14] Sarah: And this is what you need to write down. People are listening.

    [00:22:16] April: Okay. You guys ready? Okay. Okay. Yeah.

    [00:22:17] Sarah: I even have it written. Good. So when you are going through your testimonials and your case studies, your client is going to say something like that is super cool, but fill in the blank. Okay. I know it’s really simple.

    [00:22:33] Sarah: We are playing the most simple game of Madlibs right now. Okay. Okay. So they see Oprah and they will say, that is really cool and I even like her, but she has an entire team of people running her money that I don’t have. Unrelatable. Jeff Omar van, Amazon. Okay. He’s super cool, but he can afford. To totally lose out [00:23:00] on this investment.

    [00:23:01] Sarah: He’s one of the richest men in the world. Right? Right. And so do you see how that really, really simple fill in the blank can, can shine a light on the fact that the people that you are using are unrelatable? Now, some of you may say, I am not using Oprah, and I am not using Jeff, and I’m not using Warren Buffett.

    [00:23:16] Sarah: And you’re saying I’m, but I am using my most exceptional case studies from my clients. Okay. Welcome to my world. My first webinars, I was taught traditionally to just use those testimonials that make everybody, wow, you’re amazing. And I’m like, this is so ego-driven. Okay? But I use it anyway. And I, this is true story.

    [00:23:35] Sarah: I had helped a client with my systems in a year go from four $400 a month in sales to $40,000 a month in one. Okay. A month. Like legit. She lives down the road from me now. Okay. We are dear friends. Yes. Best one. And I was like, oh my gosh, this webinar’s gonna sell. And it did. Boy did it sell. Okay. We converted a huge amount in the [00:24:00] room and everybody kept bringing up this testimonial.

    [00:24:03] Sarah: They were like, oh my gosh, this is me, this is my dream. All that kind of stuff. And what happened six months later after the course, I lost, I, I was hemorrhaging clients for the next stage in my business hemorrhaging, and I’m exposing this, okay. I’m not gonna lie. Yeah. About how hard business is. Okay. Thank you.

    [00:24:22] Sarah: I was hemorrhaging clients and that was the tipping point for people, is they felt like I didn’t achieve the $40,000 a month, and so therefore it didn’t work. So I’m not ready for the next. Okay. Yeah. So with my own experience and with this, with this other financial company, we went in there and we brought in relatable.

    [00:24:42] Sarah: Okay? We brought in relatable testimonials and case studies. We brought in a family of four, right, that lived in an average home in an average neighborhood who maybe went to Hawaii once or twice a. Right. And we talked about how these investments generated an [00:25:00] additional $20,000 of revenue for their life because of these investments.

    [00:25:06] Sarah: Okay. And, and we, we took each one of those, like Warren and Oprah and Jeff, and we replaced those with more relatable ones to target different avatars that they were wanting to bring in. And we now have 22% of people that buy on their webinar that are women. Wow. 22%. And we also increase the sales from men.

    [00:25:27] Sarah: But there, that was the only thing that we changed. And then we focus in on the next step. And now their next step program, um, is 50 50 men, women, and we’ve increased the amount of people that come in just dramatically. So I don’t, we don’t need to get into all the percentages, but it matters.

    [00:25:45] April: Right. So, and I’m, and I’m looking at, you know, my notes that I’m taking here.

    [00:25:50] April: And the things that you’re saying in just by changing the relatable story, that’s what you did, is you created your testimony with a relatable story. It wasn’t that [00:26:00] moonshot or that unicorn. And, uh, and you created a relatable story. You t you increased their buyers from three to what, 22%? 22%. That is. And so I, I wonder, you know, for our people, I want you guys just to take a second and do again, do this exercise.

    [00:26:19] April: We’re just gonna pause for a minute here that Sarah was talking about when people are looking at your case studies, everything we’re working on is your case studies and your testimonies that you’re sharing at in your sales process. Okay? That’s what we’re working on today. If I didn’t make that clear in the beginning, What are they saying?

    [00:26:37] April: This worked for them, but they have more time. They have a team. They have money to invest in their business. What is that? They, they don’t have kids or their kids are older or you know, they don’t work in nine to five, whatever that is. What is it that your people are saying when they read the testimonies that you share that worked for him or that worked for her, [00:27:00] but.

    [00:27:01] April: And so when they identify those, uh, the, the reasons that they’re not gonna buy in that, how do we fix that? How do they then communicate or, or, you know, those steps to say, okay, they’re, they’re saying that they can’t do this because of what, how, what, what do we do

    [00:27:19] Sarah: next? The next step is to define what we call the core result.

    [00:27:26] Sarah: And my question that I would ask you, if you were to hire me to come out to your business and sit with you, I would say, what result can you provide for nearly every client that goes to your program? Wow.

    [00:27:43] April: I, we want, yeah, go ahead. Yeah. Okay. What. Let me go back and say that word core result because that’s a big deal.

    [00:27:55] April: We’re gonna make a definitely, we’re gonna make a graphic on this [00:28:00] for sure, and get it out there on social media. Um, you know, Sarah said core result. What is the core result? And I just wanna pause for a second and just say, you guys, if you’re listening and you actually don’t know what that core result is, we do need to talk about your offer engineering, um, April girl for sure.

    [00:28:17] April: You know, if you’re here and you’re like, oh my gosh, well I can do all these things and they kind of get this and they kind of get that and da, da, da. So we need to identify, but what is that core result? And then what was the next thing you said? What is.

    [00:28:29] Sarah: Something, the core result that you can consistently provide for clients that go through your program.

    [00:28:36] Sarah: Okay. Yeah. Program offer. We’ll use the word offer. That’s your world. Mm-hmm. Mm-hmm. Um, the, the key there is, is some people are, are gonna fizzle out, maybe not finish your program or not take action or whatever, whatever. I mean, but what I mean is when people go through your program and finish it, what is the consistent.

    [00:28:55] Sarah: Okay. If you were to like go behind the scenes in my own business, you’re gonna laugh at something [00:29:00] because I’m kind of practicing what I preach. Okay. Like you will see that the result that I. Pretty much guarantee for my one-on-one clients and my Mastermind people is that we will double their revenue with the women.

    [00:29:13] Sarah: We will two x their revenue. Okay? Have I 10 Xed the revenue of people’s businesses? Absolutely. Okay. Right. Have I eight Xed and six Xed? Absolutely. But what can I consistently provide for those clients? Two x. That’s the core result. I will double your revenue with.

    [00:29:33] April: So everybody is absolutely thrilled with you, and then you create these repeat customers that stay with you on a longer term journey because they in fact did accomplish through your teaching and leadership and your frameworks and your coaching, your method, what you said because you led them in with the two X and not the 10 x.

    [00:29:54] Sarah: Absolutely. And I dive a little bit April, I, I don’t know, like the specifics about your [00:30:00] coaches or clients. Mm-hmm. And they may not have like a monetary value. Mm-hmm. But I remember working with a couple that they teach, uh, marriage, marriage counseling. Right. Basically is what they teach online. Mm-hmm.

    [00:30:09] Sarah: Their marriage coaches. And they had always been using like, We ripped up the, the divorce papers and we renewed our vows, and we have never said a bad word to each other ever again. That was kind of their thing, right? And you’ve got some people coming into their trainings like saying, um, he, we have not like, slept in the same room for five years, like, let alone ripping up divorce papers, right?

    [00:30:31] Sarah: And so they started to change their results where it was like, we’re gonna help you start to at least sleep on the same. Right. This person, they started sleeping on the same floor or they started sleeping in the same room or, and I know that that’s like really practical, but that’s an achievement in a marriage.

    [00:30:50] Sarah: Marriage, right. That’s an achievement. And while you don’t have this explosive like lead generation, that’s what your hooks are for people, but this explosive lead generation, [00:31:00] they consistently provide that result of getting couples to sleep in the same room by the end of their program. Right. Okay. It’s not the sexiest result, but it’s something they can consistently provide.

    [00:31:09] Sarah: And then those clients refer the heck out of their program and that’s how they generate an avalanche of, of loyal customers through testimonials and case studies that are realistic. Go figure.

    [00:31:21] April: Go figure. So the rethinking that we’re doing here today, we’re not saying you guys can’t share your, you know, your big pie in the sky testimonies.

    [00:31:30] April: We talked a little bit about whether or not you even have them yet as a business. First of all, if you don’t have those yet as a business and you just have the realistic ones, awesome. Great job. Like you’re, you’re doing amazing work for your people if you do. Amen. If you do, is there like a, you know, the mix, I mean, these really like wow testimonies, right?

    [00:31:50] April: Is there like a percentage mix that you recommend? Like you could share like one pie in the sky, but how do you then communicate, you know, but this is what is a standard expectation for those people that [00:32:00] go through our program.

    [00:32:01] Sarah: Absolutely. Absolutely. So we actually do not recommend on front end offers using the pie in the sky, cuz that is when your clients are most vulnerable.

    [00:32:10] Sarah: So we absolutely cut them out. April, you may disagree with me. We cut out the most extreme testimonials on front end offers. We do use them for higher ticket offers, $5,000 and above offers, we will use those. Um, cuz you have to understand who is in the. Okay. Making the extra a hundred thousand dollars when you’re selling a $5 coloring.

    [00:32:32] Sarah: Okay. Is real hard for someone to imagine and be relatable. I know. That’s so funny. That’s like a real life customer. Okay.

    [00:32:42] Sarah: We’re getting real here. Right? I love it. So we do reserve those high-end ones for actually. Offers that are further up what you offer. Um, and then we just recommend that you have three different relatable testimonials in whatever pitch or webinar [00:33:00] it is that you, um, use for your front end clients.

    [00:33:03] April: Amazing. Uh, you’re a genius. This is your area of expertise. So if that’s what Sarah says, then that’s what you guys should be doing. Uh, I don’t know. You know, this, this totally makes sense. Everything we’re talking about is so logical and you know, this process that you’re teaching is helping leaders to rethink how we’re connecting with our audience, helping our listeners, our clients, your clients, you know, everybody who creates a change to communi.

    [00:33:30] April: Better and more realistically about the most common, as you said, core result, realistic change that they can make. And yes, it totally makes sense that we would do the more realistic transformations. We call ’em transformations. With the, with the more upfront offers for sure. Um, certainly the, the moonshot results, and you guys should share those, especially if you actually have, if they’re ethical.

    [00:33:56] April: We wanna make sure, I think there are a lot of businesses out there that are sharing case studies that [00:34:00] might not necessarily be true and ethical. I’m just gonna say that. It’s easy

    [00:34:03] Sarah: to do that in terms, right?

    [00:34:05] April: Yeah. Um, so, you know, making sure they’re ethical with these higher ticket offers. Um, but then also saying, and this is a legal thing that I’m not getting into.

    [00:34:13] April: I’m not an attorney, but I know that our go-to attorney we refer to who’s been here on the podcast would also say, make sure your contracts say, you know, these results aren’t common, and make sure that your mm-hmm. Terms and terms and agreements are correct as well, but, This mix. Okay, so let’s go back to the mix that you said.

    [00:34:30] April: Okay. That is, uh, realistic testimonies on upfront offers about three relatable testimonies, uh, in your conversion event, your live event, your webinar, your sales page, whatever that is. And then reserving some of. Those higher achieving case studies for over 5,000 that you would call like higher ticket, uh mm-hmm.

    [00:34:52] April: Or an actual legitimate, you know, 20, 30, 50, a hundred thousand dollars

    [00:34:56] Sarah: program. 100%. 100%. If you [00:35:00] are in the long game of business, right. Right. That’s the next, right. The time that we’re recording this, we are at the end of 2022 and, um, the world is nuts right now. Business is nuts. Things are shifting, pivots are happening, and the temptation is going to be to be more extreme and more extreme and more extreme in what you can offer and what you can charge and what you can do.

    [00:35:24] Sarah: And the reality is, is you are losing sight of like your greatest clients on. Okay. Don’t underestimate. I remember a time when I was in, my husband was in med school and my business was struggling so much. I was legit making cream of chicken soup from scratch April, because I could not buy the 69 cent can.

    [00:35:45] Sarah: Okay. That It was bad. Okay. I had like a neighbor drop off a bread maker cause I couldn’t buy bread. Like it was so bad. We were in so much trouble. And I just remember. What an extra like hundred [00:36:00] dollars a week meant to me, right? Right. Our food budget was $225 a month for a family of four back then, an extra a hundred dollars a week.

    [00:36:08] Sarah: And so don’t underestimate the results you are getting for your people. One less fight a day for a married couple is a result, okay? And their first five sales in a business or in a, in a licensing agreement, whatever. It’s a huge deal, and those people will praise the Lord for you. I don’t know if you’re religious or not, but they will be so grateful for you over the long term for those first five.

    [00:36:38] Sarah: And for that first, that first hundred dollars that you help them bolster in their business. And so regardless of what spectrum you’re on, as far as coaching and pricing and packages and offers and all that kind of stuff, just don’t let go of the fact that the world is nuts right now. The world is nuts and you producing these incremental 1% [00:37:00] changes in people’s lives are changing lives.

    [00:37:02] Sarah: Share it. Share it. There are more people out there that need you than you think, and you’re repelling them by using these astronomical results that you’ve provided once or twice, and you’re missing probably your most effective, um, client that’s out there wanting your services.

    [00:37:19] April: Thank you so much for saying all that it needed to be said.

    [00:37:23] April: Absolutely. Uh, and, and you know, you guys, this is also a really important time to take a pause and make sure the offers that you have engineered are correct. Amen. That they are, you know, everybody is talking about high ticket, high ticket, high ticket, and I mean, we have very expensive high ticket programs.

    [00:37:40] April: Our clients build very expensive high ticket programs, but they’re. Equally valued to the ROI that people receive. You know, if you’re feeling this pressure, there’s a lot of coaches out there that are saying, go high ticket. Go high ticket charge more. And the programs are not engineered correctly to do that.

    [00:37:58] April: So I just want [00:38:00] you, if you haven’t yet to take a pause on that overvalued messaging, that it doesn’t mean that high ticket isn’t something that you can or should. Or currently, you know, do engineer, but also to look at your ecosystem of offers in what’s happening in the world and, and just determine if there are other things that you guys can do to create more, um, I call them micro transformations.

    [00:38:27] April: They’re micro transformations, right? We can build programs. With micro transformation benchmarks and we actually stop to recognize those micro transformations like Sarah’s talking about. Or you can do individual offers and programs to deliver micro transformations. That all comes down to how you guys wanna live.

    [00:38:46] April: You know, your what type of programs you guys wanna engineer, but even if you have these bigger programs, Make sure you are clearly sharing, like Sarah said, the case studies of the micro transformation benchmarks that people are [00:39:00] receiving. And commonly, when does that happen? You know, I had somebody, um, Ask about one of our programs that we, it’s, it’s a six month program, but it goes on for a year and they’re basically like, how long is this gonna take me to do this?

    [00:39:15] April: And the answer to that was I shared with her the benchmark she needs to hit. And I also, just like you said, I shared with her the things that get in the way, like time team finances, kids working in nine to five, that either can accelerate that or slow that. And so you guys, in order to share, if you’re struggling with like, I, how do I share what Sarah said, this core result?

    [00:39:40] April: If you’re kind of struggling with that, I’m not really sure what that is. Go back and just make sure that you have mapped out those micro transformations in your offer and just speak to the first couple ones, you know, because those might be where people stay for a while depending on those external circumstances that they have.

    [00:39:58] April: And so I just, I love this [00:40:00] conversation so much. And it’s so real, and hopefully you guys have enjoyed this as much. So, uh, homework for this is, you know, going back, looking at your case studies and identifying that core result that you can consistently deliver every single time again and again, and using that to be relatable in your marketing and your relationship building with your clients because they’re never gonna be disappointed.

    [00:40:22] April: No matter how great they Amen did. Amen. If you sell them the a hundred thousand dollars in 30 days in 99.9% of ’em don’t hit that. They’re gonna think that you have failed them or they have failed themselves. So this is, this is really awesome. Thank you so much. Okay. So how can people connect with you more?

    [00:40:41] April: As I’m sitting here thinking I have like 10 people I need to introduce you to. Um, so I’m really excited to do that after this episode. I’m like, you guys, you guys need Sarah in, in, in your business. Uh, so I love that about just our, our circle of community here on the podcast. Um, How can [00:41:00] people connect with you?

    [00:41:01] April: What you know, who do you work with actually, who do you really get in there? Who do you work with? How can people be in your life and your ecosystem to learn more about relatable marketing strategies, particularly to women?

    [00:41:14] Sarah: Oh, I love it. And what, where I would really encourage people to start with is I wanna have a conversation with them.

    [00:41:20] Sarah: And the best way to do that is every single Wednesday, uh, it’s at the same. Time every Wednesday I teach for 45 minutes. Okay. And I teach for 45 minutes. Uh, about a principle s specifically around marketing to women. Okay. That, I mean, that is my zone of genius. And so if you’re kind of like, oh, I’d like need more male customers, well, the secret to that is you actually need to attract.

    [00:41:45] Sarah: The females, but that’s a conversation for another day. But show up there. I go live whether there are, there’s one person in the room or whether there’s a hundred people in the room. I teach every single Wednesday for 45 minutes about these principles of marketing to women, and there is always [00:42:00] homework at the end of that.

    [00:42:01] Sarah: There’s no pitch. I’m not selling anything. It’s a no pitch training. It’s a no pitch webinar. Totally transparent about that. At the end, however, there is homework and that homework you will share with me and we will. And we will give you that first step forward on what it looks like to start changing that case study or to start changing this thing that’s turning women off or whatever it is.

    [00:42:21] Sarah: So it really is you. You’re gonna take a little test at the end of that, you’re gonna get some homework and then there’s a conversation with you and I, and we’ll go ahead and put the link in the show notes and I’ll see you guys on

    [00:42:29] April: Wednesday. I love it. Thank you so much for just your service. That’s just such a servant’s heart too, to the people and just helping people to get results and, and you’re just, you’re really amazing.

    [00:42:40] April: I’m, I’m very grateful to know you, so thank you so much for being here on the show and pouring into our listeners and just, uh, it is very important information, so we appreciate you so much. Thank you. You’re

    [00:42:52] Sarah: the best. April, thank you so much.

    [00:42:54] April: Hey, you guys. What an amazing episode with Sarah. It was a little bit longer than most of our shows are, but why would we [00:43:00] stop when she is just pouring her genius into us?

    [00:43:03] April: And, and I’m so grateful you made it to the end of the episode. So you are a rockstar. And so let’s talk about how you’re gonna actually implement this. So we’ll make sure that all of the resources that Shera, Sarah, Sarah shared, and of course how to connect with her for that live amazing business strategy and coaching with no pitch that she.

    [00:43:21] April: Every single week, we highly recommend that. So please tap into her. Um, particularly if your business, your brand needs to reach more women and you wanna increase and convert your women’s sales. So with that being said, what is the action item after this episode? So let’s go back to, The actual work that Sarah gave on this show today, if we’re only doing an incremental implementation, I wanna always make sure you’re leaving this podcast, implementing something.

    [00:43:47] April: Even if you’re writing on the subway or you’re waiting for your kids at the bus stop or whatever it may be, that you can actually receive a micro transformation from this particular episode. So let’s, Sarah said was to [00:44:00] finish this sentence, and this sentence is, when somebody’s reading the case studies on your.

    [00:44:07] April: Okay. And they are over the moon. They are saying to themselves, that is great, but. And then there is that blank. And those are all the reasons why they’re saying to themselves that those results cannot work for them because this other person had a different situation. And so Sarah’s recommendation is step number one, fill in that blank.

    [00:44:28] April: And then we talked in the episode about what to do next. And you can always go back and replay this episode, but if you haven’t yet, we’re talking about very fast implementation. I just want you to name three. Things that people are saying to themselves as to why they cannot have the same result as one of those moonshot testimonies that you have shared.

    [00:44:48] April: And then you can take the next step and adjust your copywriting in your marketing to connect with your audience better. Thank you so much for listening to this episode. I love that you guys are here. If you haven’t shared the Sweet Life Entrepreneur [00:45:00] podcast, we would really appreciate it. We love getting this show in the hands of others, and obviously there’s no pitching to you and there’s no advertising here because we wanna give you guys incredibly amazing business value that you can take to the bank. Thank you so much, and I hope you guys have a great day.



    How To Start Building An Affiliate Program With High Level Partners – with April Beach and Laura Sprinkle (Episode 281)

    How To Start Building An Affiliate Program With High Level Partners




    Imagine having highlevel people tell everyone about your program. You receive personal email introductions, direct messages that they were told to find you, and registrations from people you don’t know, into your latest program launch. I can attest that this is the best feeling in the world. To be recognized for your area of service, and to have others refer their clients and friends your way, is truly a gift and accomplishment. But even your biggest fans, your best clients, and your closest partners need a process in which to follow, to refer people your way. This process is a wellorchestrated system that follows a story of a journey into your world and business community.  
    In this episode, I am delighted once again to have a friend Laura Sprinkle on the show. Laura is the mastermind behind affiliate programs for Amy Porterfield, Todd Herman, Steven Kotler, Selena Soo, yours truly, and so many more. Laura’s unique method of choosing the right affiliates, nurturing them, and delivering a clear and easy-to-follow process of referral has made her the go-to in this space. Laura teaches how to find the right affiliates for your program, she’ll help you know who will not make a good affiliate, and she is very clear on how to create your goals, well beyond dollars, to build your profitable affiliate system. 

    At the end of this episode, you will:

      • Know the 3 things you need to have ready for your Offer to be “referable”
      • Know the payout % 
      • Know the first levels of affiliate partners you’ll want to reach out and invite
    Resources mentioned: 
    Click here to access Laura’s guide HOW TO SCALE YOUR BUSINESS WITH REFERRALS ON REPEAT
    Download the Ultimate Guide To Online Offers for ideas on the best programs to create
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:43] April: Hi guys, and welcome back to the show. I’m April Beach and I am so glad that you were here.

    [00:00:47] April: This is episode number 281, and we have. Favorite people and friends on the show back yet again to talk about how to build high level affiliate programs [00:01:00] with the best partners in the whole entire world. And so this episode is brought to you perfectly timed with our masterclass called the Offer Engineer.

    [00:01:10] April: So before we can even build affiliate programs, we need to make sure your offer is ready. We actually talk about that. In this show and the steps to get your offer ready. And so if you need to level up your offers to scale so that you can bring in affiliates, make sure that you are checking out the offer

    [00:01:28] April: It’s our latest workshop that helps coaches, consultants, experts, and SME scale. And it is coming up, especially if you’re listening to this show in real time. Definitely head over there so you can take action on what we talk about today. Okay. My good friend Laura Sprinkle is back on the show.

    [00:01:47] April: And here is what we were talking about. When you are a coach and an author, a consultant, if you’re a subject matter expert, one of the things we need to do is make sure that we are increasing your sales. And one of the best ways [00:02:00] to increase your sales is to have other people who know you, who love you, who love your work, who love your program, actually refer people personally to you.

    [00:02:11] April: I can attest to how good it feels to be introduced with total strangers by a high level colleague or friend of mine who knew my program well enough and knows their client base well enough that they make personal recommendations. It’s like handholding people from one world into your world, and it is the best way, first of all, to have clients that are ready to work with. Number two, increase your sales. Number three, it also levels up your brand. So I want you to think about that. Imagine having high level people tell other people about your program, receiving a personal email invitation, receiving a text intro, or an Instagram chat introduction from one of your very close, [00:03:00] reputable friends in your space that tell somebody else that they need to work with.

    [00:03:04] April: And when we build your affiliate program correctly, when the structures are put in place and when you have the right partners, this is exactly what you can expect. And so this is what we’re breaking apart in today’s business coaching show. If you’re new here, Welcome to the show. I’m April Beach. I’m a business strategist and mentor for experts, coaches and consultants, and have been for 27 years.

    [00:03:27] April: And the thing that we deliver to you here on this show are trainings and steps and processes that you can bank on that the only people that are in here pouring into you. On the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast are vetted experts who have been in the trenches of online business for years and years and years, and this episode is no different.

    [00:03:49] April: So my friend Laura, is absolutely the go-to person for affiliate programs. She is behind the creation of affiliate programs for Amy Porterfield. Todd Herman, Steven [00:04:00] Kotler, Salina Sue. She’s behind our affiliate programs as well, and she has a unique method that we’re gonna talk about here of making sure that you’re choosing the right affiliates.

    [00:04:10] April: We don’t want all the affiliates. You’ve seen those launches before. We don’t actually want to go for that in many business cases. And so that’s what we’re talking about here today. She’s gonna break down how to find the right affiliate partners, and she’s gonna help you know where to start in the process, even to different people that you might not be directly connected with.

    [00:04:30] April: And at the end of this show, you can expect to know three things you need to have in. For your offer to be ready for affiliates, we are also diving into the percentages of the payouts and what to pay affiliates, and you are going to know the first levels of affiliate partners that we want to go after for your business, your program, and actually how to do that.

    [00:04:53] April: So this is episode number 281. All the show notes and all the goodies that we’re talking about here, including that [00:05:00] Offer Engineer workshop, and all of Laura’s rock, your affiliate program information can be found by visiting All right, let’s go. Hey you guys. I am so excited to be back with my friend Laura Sprinkle on the NextGen of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast.

    [00:05:22] April: You guys probably remember Laura was here hanging out with me a couple years ago, and she and I met at a mastermind. It was like Selena Suz Master Mastermind in San Diego. Feels like forever in a day ago. , but, and we had known each other before then I think we met in, we got to finally see each other in person then, and it was really, really special.

    [00:05:44] April: And the stuff that Laura does in the way she orchestrates relationships are so powerful and the way that she helps us as entrepreneurs. Know how to look at our relationships with other [00:06:00] businesses and how it can be this win-win for everybody is just one of the reasons why I love her so much. Because it’s so genuine.

    [00:06:07] April: It’s so real and it’s so mutually beneficial for everybody across the board. The way Laura helps companies grow and, um, you know, not diving into your official bio. But let’s talk a little bit so people know that you are the bee’s knee about , who you have worked with. You know, it’s okay to name drop on here, you know who you’ve worked with in the past to help them build their programs, in this case, their affiliate and referral programs to help them build their programs in how you helped some of these leaders big to small.

    [00:06:45] April: Really create, uh, what we call an ecosystem of amazing relationships to grow their business. So welcome back to the show, Laura. I’m so glad you’re here. Thank you. Tell everybody about who you are, what, what lights you up, doesn’t have to be business [00:07:00] related, and who you’ve worked with in the past. And then we’ll dive into what we’re talking about today.

    [00:07:04] Laura: I’m so excited. Thank you for having me, and thanks for, for listening. Uh, so who I am, so I am an affiliate program strategist and I have helped clients. My very first client in this realm was Selena Sue, which is how we got connected originally, which is so exciting. Uh, so. Set up programs for Salina Sue, Todd Hermann, Amy Porterfield, um, worked with Kate Northrop, um, heroic and Brian Johnson, Steven Kotler and the Flow Research collective, just a lot a lot of people who are incredible and like I just could talk about them all day long. Like seriously,

    [00:07:48] April: they’re so, I remember when you sent out the email that you were doing stuff with Steven Cutler. I’m like, oh my gosh, okay. I’m a huge fan, obviously do a lot of flow state stuff in my kids even read his books as well, [00:08:00] and so I was like, I don’t wanna be a part of anything that this guy is doing.

    [00:08:03] April: And I was so excited for you that, that, that. That was such a cool thing that you’re, you’re getting to work with that team as well. Yeah. So you’ve been doing this for a while, so you’ve been helping businesses create, um, really deep, not just surface level, but highly profitable affiliate relationship programs for a a hot minute and you know, some, and what is the number? You dropped it a couple weeks ago when, when we were in like a networking call. Really cool. Laura, by the way, does these amazing networking calls you guys, um, where she just brings together, she’s such a queen at bringing together just cool people who, who wanna connect.

    [00:08:41] April: And we’re gonna be talking about that more today. But give us some of the figures of numbers and, and dollar amount of some of the sales that the affiliate programs that you’ve engineered have, have done.

    [00:08:51] Laura: Yeah. And I wanna say too, the way that we set up affiliate programs and the way that we. I wanna, I wanna say a [00:09:00] require, but it’s not really a requirement, but the way that we help our clients think about affiliate programs, it’s not like a one and done thing, right?

    [00:09:08] Laura: It’s not like, okay, only for your next promotion, only for your next launch. Like we’re gonna 10 x and then we’re gonna call it quits. Like the point is to create that ecosystem that continues to grow with you. So the number I’m gonna share is really like that initial. initial launch and therefore it is actually much bigger because I have been doing this for half a decade and these people have launched many, many times since that original launch with us.

    [00:09:34] Laura: Um, but our clients have brought in over 30 million in revenue from their affiliate partner programs. And my favorite part about that number is that win-win that you talk about. We actually call it the quadruple win. So not only are millions of. Being generated for small businesses, but also millions of dollars are more in the hands of other small businesses that are their partners and affiliates that they care about [00:10:00] going to their families.

    [00:10:01] Laura: You know, supporting their clients and their teams and their causes that they believe in. And like that is the thing that really lights me up. That’s what you asked about. And yeah, I would say the

    [00:10:11] April: quadruple win. So it’s like, yeah, it’s 30 million, but that was only for the initial launch and, and now that has this, Afterburn, you know, snowball effect because these relationships have been built and I, you know, it’s so really important.

    [00:10:23] April: If you guys have ever participated in an affiliate program before, then you know what I’m talking about. If you haven’t been an affiliate for somebody, it feels so good because I remember the first time I was an affiliate for somebody, I’m trying to remember, it was like, I think it was Louis House, like back like 2012 or something, a really, really long time ago, and I still remember being part of that and it felt so good to help somebody else do something amazing that they had been worked, they had been working so hard on it.

    [00:10:55] April: Felt so good to me to be able to be a part of that. And then like, the [00:11:00] monetary benefits or, or, or just honestly like icing on the cake as well. Um, but just being able to be a part of building somebody else’s a cool thing, um, is just, it’s so rewarding to, to feel like you’re helping with that momentum and you’re helping push that along.

    [00:11:14] April: And, and I, and I know intimately the importance of affiliates and we need that. Like we need each other, especially. in an online business space. You know, we don’t have Amy Porterfield’s audience, right. And so, especially in an online business space that is, is so saturated, like relationships, all around relationships.

    [00:11:31] April: So, um, I can just say that in going through with your stuff and, and being on the other side too, it’s just, it’s just so powerful. So, Let’s talk about what totally lights you up about the relationship side. So first of all, let me set the framework you guys today we are gonna help you know what you have to do to have in place in order to build your affiliate referral program.

    [00:11:55] April: Okay, so in the next 10, 15 minutes, you’re gonna know exactly what you have to have into [00:12:00] place. But you know, unlike a lot of podcasts that we’ll just talk about service things. We also want you to know why these things are important. We’re just not gonna go through and say, Hey, here’s the things you have to do.

    [00:12:10] April: We want you to understand the why and the reasoning behind these so that you can independently think through yourself as you’re going through the process of these things as well. First of all, let’s define what type of affiliate referral programs are we talking about that you help people engineer and build?

    [00:12:28] Laura: Yeah, such a great question and I think so much of what we talk about in Rock Your Affiliate Program and in how we help clients can help no matter, no matter what kind of partnerships you’re doing. And we specifically love working with course creators and membership creators who want to have multiple people promote their offer at the same time.

    [00:12:52] Laura: Like if you have a webinar or a workshop and at the end of that webinar workshop, you’re going to, you know, open the doors for [00:13:00] enrollment for your program and you know, you want 10, a hundred, a thousand. We don’t have a lot of clients that do a thousand. I wouldn’t have recommend different, most people, but you know, you want a few people sharing about your workshops so that you can get, you know, more registrants up.

    [00:13:17] Laura: Those are the types of, uh, partnerships that we most frequently do. .

    [00:13:22] April: Okay. Awesome. So those of you guys that are doing kind of that, that launch type of strategy, open closed cart type of, uh, a business model is, is what this can work great for what we’re talking about today. And you know, I will also say that there’s so many other things that we’re gonna talk about today that if you are not doing that business model, make sure that you are tapping in here because you’re gonna be.

    [00:13:44] April: Deal a lot of these strategies and apply them to your business for incredible results as well. So what does, let’s just go right to the end and reverse engineer it. When somebody wants to actually build this type of a program, how do they start thinking [00:14:00] about how to engineer these, first of all, the relationships and, and who to reach out to and, and why is who they reach out to, um, you know, chosen in a certain way. Take us through that process of thinking.

    [00:14:11] Laura: Thinking.

    [00:14:12] Laura: Amazing. Yeah. Once you’re ready, and I know we’re gonna reverse engineer of. What does that mean? Once you’re ready, . But once you’re ready, I mean, to me, the thing that’s really, really exciting about partnerships beyond the revenue even is like, we can change the world, right?

    [00:14:28] Laura: When I mentioned, you know, millions of dollars in the hands of small business owners that you care about, it’s like growing your business through partnerships means you get to pay people that share your values rather than sending money to corporations like Google and Facebook. And if you. And or you can do both, right?

    [00:14:46] Laura: Like you can, you know, tap into pay the ads and also partnerships. Um, so for me that’s number one is do you share values and do they have something genuine to say about your offer? So, [00:15:00] I would recommend that you wait, and we’re gonna talk about this more, but you wait for partnerships until you have actually sold your program and had people go through it.

    [00:15:09] Laura: Because some of the best people to promote your offer are your alumni, are the people that have that firsthand, tangible experience with you. Uh, and. Going outside of that circle of people, you’ll wanna start to connect with those who serve your ideal customers in a complimentary way. Like April and I serve in such a complimentary way. Yes. And we also share values. Yeah.

    [00:15:32] April: And so let’s like unpack that for you guys. Okay. So first of all, thanks for hanging out with us here today on This Sweet Life podcast. Please like, share this with people because we really want getting, you know, everybody to get the word out about this amazing episode we’re talking about here.

    [00:15:45] April: So we wanna unpack and kind of share behind the scenes of how Laura and I work together. So, our expertise, our area of solutions that we provide to clients go so well together, you [00:16:00] guys. And so we want to use us as an example of when you’re looking for great partners. So I help entrepreneurs engineer their leading programs and offers.

    [00:16:12] April: You can’t bill the referral program until we have that done. And so I make a perfect prerequisite partner for Laura because people need to go through the process of doing the work and completing their actual structure of engineering their offers with me before we can go into that process of, of then bringing in others to, to market that out.

    [00:16:36] April: Think about like, who is a prerequisite for your offer and, and who are the people that you know, need as far as, for what they do is, is delivered better when they’ve completed what you do. Right? I probably did not say that in as well as you could , like

    [00:16:55] Laura: you wish that they would take this person’s program. Yeah, before [00:17:00] yours because then they could get just astounding results. Like yeah, if you’ve worked with April before you create a affiliate program, like that’s really like that’s kind of end of episode right there. Like work with April 1st and then come to me and we can get tons of eyeballs on your offer.

    [00:17:17] April: We need to, here’s the deal you guys. We need to have a transformational me. Signature program or offer. That’s it. We have to make sure it’s great. And so what Laura was saying is we have to test it, right? So we have to make sure we get people going through it. And so once people ha have clients going through their program, uh, so you’re saying that really is that very first step to go through the engineering of the program and then bringing in the clients and, and having them receive those transformational.

    [00:17:48] Laura: yes, you definitely like, wanna make sure you have a solid offer. And, and even beyond that, you also wanna make sure that you have solid messaging around [00:18:00] your launch mechanism. So I mentioned, you know, doing a workshop or a webinar, you’re gonna wanna have some type of marketing, some type of sales mechanism in place because you know you wanna have something that your affiliates and your partners can actually refer to, can actually send people.

    [00:18:17] Laura: Right,

    [00:18:17] April: right, right. Um, and so just outta curiosity, because we always try to update this show on those latest information, what have you seen in the last year or show is that sales mechanism that seems to be the most popular, that’s working the best. I know this is totally a random question, but I’m sure people are thinking it, so I just wanted to, to ask that what are, what are people that you’re working with most commonly doing?

    [00:18:39] April: Is it still webinar? They’re kind of, you know, seeming to get outta date a little bit with certain audiences. Are they live virtual events? What, what are the trends that you’ve seen lately?

    [00:18:48] Laura: Yeah, I’ve seen a lot of boot camps and challenges where it’ll be, you know, free to sign up for a certain portion and then it’s like a paid upgrade to stay later or to have coaching involved [00:19:00] as well.

    [00:19:00] Laura: There’s a Facebook group involved. Um, so I mean, I would say that that’s like on the high end. Of output and activity and like all the things, and there’s giveaways and pr, you know what I mean? There’s all sorts of stuff happening. So I definitely have seen that and I’ve also seen people go even more low key of like, we’re doing, you know, uh, a low cost paid workshop.

    [00:19:21] Laura: Come do this thing. Come hang out with us. Come learn something valuable. And if you wanna take the next step, great. If you don’t, great, you’re gonna get value from it anyway. , you know, I think people are also going back and doing more live events, um, in person, which can also be a launch mechanism, not one that I’m like super savvy on.

    [00:19:41] Laura: Um, But people like you will hear all the time like, oh, webinars are dead. Or like, you know, this thing is email’s dead. And at the end of the day it’s like, this stuff has been around, well, email’s not been around forever, obviously, but like direct communication has been around forever. Like it’s not dead, [00:20:00] it’s all still working.

    [00:20:02] April: It’s like, know your audience. To know what your audience wants. Right. You know, if your audience isn’t responding to it, then engineer something and tweak it and, and build something distress amazing that your audience totally wants. Okay. So we have to have their program and, and then we have to have a really well-engineered sales.

    [00:20:18] April: Process that you can communicate to your partners and say, Hey listen, here’s what we’re doing and this is when we’re doing it and this is where we want you to drive traffic to. This is where please send people here. And I, you know, for me, so we as a company went through Laura’s program. You guys rock your affiliate program a while ago.

    [00:20:37] April: Um, and, and we act as affiliates now for Laura. And I remember going through that process and even as a coach who engineers these things and realizing. Wow. This is really the test on how well organized your offer and your sales conversion process is because you are going to be communicating it with others on a really, really, um, detailed, uh, [00:21:00] organizational project plan.

    [00:21:01] April: And you better make sure that everything is structured right. So that is a huge prerequisite because here’s the thing with this, you guys, you, anybody that’s representing you, let’s. an affiliate is, is, is sharing how amazing you are. If something goes wrong, no matter what, it’s gonna reflect on them. And so we really wanna make sure that you have these things in place very well because they’re, they’re sticking their nick out to say, Hey, listen, you know, April’s awesome at this, and then they send somebody to my thing and if the whole thing fails, I’m gonna make my affiliate like, Look like shit.

    [00:21:38] April: Right? . And so that’s really, you know, we need to honor our affiliates in making sure we’re structuring things really, really well. Um, because, because they’re endorsing us. And, and that’s as a whole across the board, not just with the program, with the, with the sales process

    [00:21:53] Laura: too. Yeah, for sure. And it doesn’t mean that it has to be complicated or, or have a bunch of bells and [00:22:00] whistles or, you know, have a hundred thousand dollars affiliate prize.

    [00:22:03] Laura: Like some, you know, some big names too. Sure. It doesn’t mean that it does. Like, you know, you wanna have your dates in place and, and stick with them. And I’ve broken my own rules probably more than any of my clients have for sure. Of like, oh, I’m gonna change this thing. And it makes it harder. Right? If someone tells you a date and then they change it on you. Yeah. It’s gonna be harder to share that thing. Right.

    [00:22:27] April: Okay. So, uh, our listeners, they have their offer engineered, they have their sales process. Now what. .

    [00:22:34] Laura: They are also going to wanna make sure that they have the price point on their offer and know how much they’re really excited about sharing with the affiliate for commission.

    [00:22:46] Laura: And people ask me this all the time of like, what’s the general commission? Like what’s best practice? And like there is best practice and there’s also like, you need to know your numbers and you need to know how much delivering your. [00:23:00] Costs. Mm-hmm. , because I would hate for you to get into a scenario where you’re actually going in the negative because you’re using affiliates, right.

    [00:23:07] Laura: And. Paying affiliates is not like you’re losing money. It’s not like you’re giving them money. You know? It’s like you’re gaining the revenue from those new clients that you would not have been in front of without your affiliate partners and taking the time, energy, resources to pay ads or to get out there in the world and to meet those customers yourself.

    [00:23:30] Laura: That takes, again, time, energy, money, , all those things. So it is definitely worth it and you need to come up with, you know, a percentage. So if you’re in the course space, I typical, I, you know, I hesitate to say typically, but I typically see anywhere between 30 and 50% for courses. .

    [00:23:48] April: Mm-hmm. . I love you said that. I love that you said that. Okay, you guys, so know your numbers. Um, and we always like to say, we want you to have at least a 70% profit margin on your offer. [00:24:00] So if you’ve engineered your offer, this is just a side note for tech, like, and we talk about your cost of engineering, your offer and running it on ongoing basis, we want you to have at least a 70% profit margin.

    [00:24:09] April: Ideally with online businesses, we want it up to a 90% profit margin and that way. It’s fine for you to then give away 40 or 50% you can afford it because you know that your cost and your profit margin in order to operate it is, you know, besides like a, a boost in ad cost or whatever that would be for you.

    [00:24:27] April: Um, so that’s usually kind of the overall profit margin that we want with online programs is 70 to 90% just with your cost to run it. So you guys can take those two numbers, like Laura said. 30 to 50 and then you know, an overall profit margin in of 70 to 90 and kind of tweak your numbers accordingly and just make sure you guys aren’t paying out like online business.

    [00:24:47] April: We have very low overhead and we tend to see a lot of extra costs on so many different software that. You know, might be excessive, so you might wanna be able to even take a look at your operational expenses and reduce some [00:25:00] costs so that you can pay your affiliates more like how it would be so much better.

    [00:25:04] April: Just like Laura said, rather than paying Google or another software, you might not need to increase the amount of money you can pay out to an affiliate, and that would be super awesome. That would feel a lot better too.

    [00:25:14] Laura: Yeah. And it’s like paying, like instead of needing to go create this whole marketing team for your company, it’s like you get to pay, pay your affiliates to spread the word for you.

    [00:25:25] Laura: Um, and of course you’re gonna support them and, and you’re gonna have cost associated with that. And. . Yeah, I, I just love it if you can’t tell . But, um, so you’re gonna wanna know, um, that you’re also going to wanna make sure that you have, you know, your tech set up, like you said, in order to get payments. Um, so you wanna be clear on what tech stack you’re using in order to make those sales.

    [00:25:48] Laura: You wanna have customers coming through your funnels. You wanna have them loving your program, probably already starting to refer, uh, even before you set up the systems to optimize. Um, with [00:26:00] us and you wanna get excited about what you can do and the possibilities and wanna make sure that you can handle, you know, the volume.

    [00:26:09] Laura: You know, if you have 10 partners sending, like if you got, you know, 10 partners sending one additional client your way in the next launch. So 10 additional, like, are you gonna be able to handle that on the back end? Like make sure that you are

    [00:26:22] April: right. Right. Oh my gosh. What a wonderful and terrible and super scary problem if you can’t, and that happens. Yes. . It’s like, it’s like, it’s like be careful what you wish for. Um, yes. Okay, so now we have all this like prerequisites in place now. What is, you have the most amazing philosophy on actually the structure of the affiliate program and, and how to reach out to people. We kind of talked about it a little bit in the beginning.

    [00:26:49] April: Talk to us about, you know, why relationships are so important to you and, and how you really want entrepreneurs to, to look at this, this network and these, this [00:27:00] beautiful depth of ongoing relat. .

    [00:27:02] Laura: Yeah. So I think that you’re referring here to the relationship rings, um, which is one of our beautiful exercises we take our clients through.

    [00:27:11] Laura: And for me, again, I do believe that this can, this can change the world if we pay people that we care about. Um, I love sending my affiliates including April money, uh, every month. I love getting it so much fun. Yes. , I’d much rather pay you than corporations I don’t know or care about. Uh, and so we look at it as, You know, the inner ring are the clients that have come through your circle.

    [00:27:36] Laura: Um, then we go into your colleagues, people you’ve met in masterminds and such like us. And then when you go out, you start to look at those categories of people. And when we say like, oh, someone who engineer helps engineer an offer will be a great partner for somebody who creates an affiliate program.

    [00:27:52] Laura: That’s true. And. Don’t want anybody listening to do because this is a surefire way to break relationships [00:28:00] is start cold pitching and hopping in those dms of like, Hey, I wanna be an affiliate. Yeah, ,

    [00:28:08] April: why do we hate? I can’t put my figure on it so bad, but why do we hate that so much?

    [00:28:13] Laura: It just feels so. Give something to me, right? It’s not something, it’s not a win-win. It’s not, Hey, let’s connect first on a values basis. It’s like, I don’t even know you and you want me to do something for you. It makes no sense. It feels really icky. And so our thing is like no cold pitching and like real, true, genuine relationships that feel good because the truth is, Partnerships, like let’s say that you sent 200 of those dms and we actually have had clients before working with us do this.

    [00:28:49] Laura: Let’s say that you sent 200, you might hear back and get positive results from like two. Okay, great. That’s a 1% conversion rate. And if you wanna play those numbers, you could [00:29:00] totally do that. There are people that teach this, by the way, so you could play those numbers and you can. Those two people are probably not even gonna convert that well.

    [00:29:09] Laura: They’re gonna send you crappy customers that you don’t wanna deal with, and it just doesn’t feel good. So not only does building genuine relationships convert better, , it’s also gonna feel better, right? Like I think people try to disassociate of like, you can either do stuff that feels good or you can make money.

    [00:29:28] Laura: Mm-hmm. , and I’m like, Hmm, let’s, that’s actually the same. Like, let’s have a party and make a butt ton of money together.

    [00:29:37] April: Okay, so, so what, so what do you recommend, how do you want people to really, um, move forward in this? And, and obviously this is what you guys do, um, but, you know, where, what do you recommend as far as somebody saying, okay, I really want to, I’ve, I’ve, I’ve built my signature program.

    [00:29:54] April: I know, you know, I know our, our marketing process and our sales processes in place and buttoned up, and I’ve brought people [00:30:00] through what I do and, and I. created raving fans. Now I’m ready to have other people share this. Yeah. What really is that Very first, next step and call to action. .

    [00:30:11] Laura: Yeah. Like you said, besides coming and working with me and taking one of our workshops, you should definitely do that.

    [00:30:17] Laura: Yes, for sure. But to even get prepared to do that or to come, not even prepared, but like to come ahead of the game. Right. This is like prerequisites, but if you wanna get a step ahead before coming and working with us, I would really start making a list of dream partners. Start giving generously. Like how can you.

    [00:30:36] Laura: Uh, you know, share their content, hop on coffee chats with them, you know, move their businesses forward without asking for anything in return. Like give generously, uh, and really just start to build relationships. Hey, I’m, you know, considering creating an affiliate program or interested in partnerships, like start to hop on and just start to orient yourself toward relationship building well before you need [00:31:00] it.

    [00:31:00] Laura: Honestly, I would do that even. Right. You have your offer in place, like just start meeting people and networking and not in a networking, like, I need to collect all the names, but like genuine. I wanna know you, I wanna cheer your kids on like, I want to love up on you, like even 10 people. Like start doing that now and you’re gonna be so much further, uh, when you’re ready.

    [00:31:24] April: You.

    [00:31:24] April: That’s so good. That’s so good. And do you recommend, you know, one last question. Do you recommend people become an affiliate for the people that they, because it is, it is it, is it this feeling of like, Hey, I need you to be an affiliate for me, but then I need to be an affiliate for you? I mean, how does that actually work in the scheme of, of basically marketing and, and how we fit promoting other people’s programs into our market plan as well. Is there an expectation for that that you’ve seen or how do you recommend, um, people people approach

    [00:31:57] April: that?

    [00:31:58] Laura: I love this question so [00:32:00] much and I have such a different philosophy, I think than than most people talking about partnerships. And I wanna say I love reciprocity. and if I am doing something only to get something in return, that creates a really sticky, yucky energy.

    [00:32:18] Laura: And that is like you’re setting yourself up for someone to be disappointed and for a relationship to be broken. I’m not. Yeah, , I am not saying don’t promote people who promote you like I would a hundred percent. I actually, as we’re talking, I was like, oh, I need to send someone, you know, April’s way and like.

    [00:32:39] Laura: It’s not that I don’t promote people who promote me cuz I’m like, send everybody my way and I can’t promote you in return. It’s not that at all. It’s whoever you are going to promote. Well, and actually I also wanna separate your question out. Number one, I would definitely recommend becoming an affiliate for people that you care about and you love their programs. It’s a great way to make money. It’s a great way to learn. It’s [00:33:00] fantastic. It’s a great way to

    [00:33:00] April: make friends. You guys. I have made so many friends by work I’ve been and Lauras thing of meet the coolest people. .

    [00:33:08] Laura: Yeah. Mm-hmm. like you can, you can meet, yeah. All the people, you can win prizes. Like Yeah, it’s a party.

    [00:33:13] Laura: It’s, you don’t have to deliver the program. Like it’s great. Yeah. Yes. Become an affiliate and never, well, I’m just gonna say it. Never do it. Only because you want them to promote your thing. Cuz again, you’re just setting yourself up for a sticky situation. Like promote people because you want to promote.

    [00:33:34] Laura: And expect that they’re gonna be doing the same for you, and then you’re just energetically clean and it just feels

    [00:33:41] April: good. Right. Well, and I think that, I mean, I mean, you know, this is, this is business. You know, we’re, we’re adults, you know, we’re, we’re big girls. We can talk about this, but you guys. If it doesn’t make sense for you to ethically promote somebody else’s program, not ethically meaning like it’s good or bad, but like it doesn’t fit into the, the [00:34:00] things that you talk about with your community, then, I, I don’t feel like there is a way, like when people, when I promote people’s programs, I don’t have any expectation like, oh, they’re gonna now become an affiliate for me at all.

    [00:34:13] April: Because talking let’s, you know, as a business strategist, if I asked them to become an affiliate and it doesn’t fit into their content strategy and their messaging. It’s gonna be really weird, and I’m actually putting them in a, and jeopardizing their messaging and their brand. So it doesn’t mean that they still won’t send people to me.

    [00:34:32] April: Kind of like one off if, if they know, oh, you know, April can really help you in this area. But I honestly, my personal opinion, I don’t have any expectations on people that, you know, I become an affiliate for them, that they’re gonna turn around and then be an affiliate for me, because I actually think it’s a case by case basis of what fits into the ecosystem.

    [00:34:53] April: That each business is creating in their relationships with their audience and what, you know, might be [00:35:00] good for one, just might not necessarily be a fit. And it’s nothing personal. It’s just not necessarily a, a fit. Um, and, and I think that that is, I think I would just encourage people to, you know, be affiliates with other affiliates that are totally cool with that.

    [00:35:12] April: They’re like, oh yeah, no, it totally, you know, you can promote my way, but it wouldn’t make sense for me to promote back to you because it isn’t really like what we talk. Totally fine. I mean, this is business, but again, you know, and this is aside from what we’re talking about in building an affiliate program.

    [00:35:29] April: But always having like those people’s names and contact information on hand and just sending people’s like, oh, this person’s great at this. So any chance you get, just, just sharing how amazing that other person is, even if it doesn’t fit for you to promote their program is, is, is something that we always wanna do, but I just feel like it, it might not always be a fit and that’s, Right.

    [00:35:51] Laura: It could be, again, it doesn’t like the, the ones that are set up where it’s like I have to send five emails and then you’re gonna send five emails. I [00:36:00] think for me, that’s where things get sticky. Um, like it’s more. Like it could be. Yeah. Like I, you know, you’re featured on a podcast here and then they become an affiliate there.

    [00:36:12] Laura: It’s like, it doesn’t have to be tit for tat. Like, I’m keeping this spreadsheet score of how many leads you’ve sent and then how many I’ve sent. Like, I think that’s where people just like, yeah. Take it a little overboard on the recipes. .

    [00:36:25] April: Doesn’t that sound exhausting? I mean, I can think of so many better things that we could be doing of our, with our time than, than, than tracking that Totally.

    [00:36:35] April: Yeah. Okay. I’m so glad we talked about this. We weren’t even planning on talking about this. All right, . So, uh, so today on the show, we helped you guys know what you need to do to prepare to create an affiliate program. Um, that is, that’s most important, that you have your prerequisites checked off. Let’s make sure that you guys are ready to go, um, when you’re ready to work with Laura.

    [00:36:56] April: Um, Laura, I’ll make we make sure of. We have all of her [00:37:00] information. If you ever lose her information, send me a DM on Instagram and I will directly send you Laura’s information, right? That’s how it works. You don’t have to join. Clicky link or something. I don’t care what goes wrong comes around. Right. And the thing is, is we just want you guys understanding that, like I think that what Laura has really done a good job leading the way in is that it’s not just about the financial structure and the benefits of affiliate programs, but it’s really about creating ecosystems of relationships with the most amazing humans that all are rallied together for a cause of leveling.

    [00:37:34] April: Others towards the same goal. And I, I, I love that that’s how you lead this. I love that. You know, we didn’t spend this whole episode, you know, talking about numbers and structure and, and links and, and money and all those things because the strategy behind it, those are just the details. That’s not the actual strategy. and I love that we got, we gotta talk about that today. .

    [00:37:59] Laura: Me too. [00:38:00] Thank you so much. I hope, yeah, I hope it was valuable for everybody last

    [00:38:03] April: night. I’m so excited you guys are here. So good. So good. So we will make sure that you guys have links to share , Rock Your Affiliate Program. And I wasn’t even, we weren’t even gonna talk about this on the show, but let me make sure that you guys know.

    [00:38:13] April: Rock Your Affiliate Program is, I can tell you this, a step-by-step process that actually Laura and her team actually give you the frameworks and swipe copies and just like, it’s amazing that walks you and your team through the process of building an incredible affiliate program from this strategy into those details and making sure you don’t mess it up.

    [00:38:33] April: Okay , making sure that you don’t screw it. All your ducks are in a row. Everything’s, you know,, you know, working the way it should be. , it’s, it’s a really powerful process. And, and we obviously love referring clients over there. Laura, I know that. As we are talking about where we are in the year when this episode drops, you have a couple of workshops coming up. How would somebody find those workshops so [00:39:00] that they can, when they’re ready to move into this process with you?

    [00:39:03] Laura: Yeah, for sure. So we’re gonna create a special link, so it’ll be at So you can, you know, get on the list for the workshops. You can. Come work with me and my team for free to start to put these pieces in place. And if you wanna take the next step in Rock Your Affiliate Program, we would be super happy to have you.

    [00:39:24] April: They’re awesome. You guys are gonna love it. You’re gonna love it, and I love that you guys do that, um, prerequisite time for free as well, so you can get into their ecosystem and see what it’s like hanging out with them and learning from them.

    [00:39:34] April: And it, it’s really a beautiful place to be. , so thank you so much for being on the show. I can’t wait to see you again in person. I think we’re gonna do that here soon. We have to do that here soon. All right. Yes, please, . Okay. All right. Well, you guys be awesome. Thanks for tuning in and we’ll talk to you next time.[00:40:00]


    Leveraging AI-Powered Prompt Generators for High-Impact Content Creation – with April Beach and Bob Dietrich (Episode 280)

    Leveraging AI-Powered Prompt Generators for High-Impact Content Creation




    Unlock the Power of Personalized Content to Level Up Your Coaching, Consulting, or Expert Business
    In today’s fast-paced digital landscape, coaches, consultants, and experts need to consistently produce high-quality content that resonates with their audience. In this episode, we dive into the world of AI-powered prompt generators and how they can transform your content production process. We’re thrilled to have Bob Dietrich, founder of Unleash AI For Business Summit, as our guest expert to share his insights and experience in leveraging AI for content creation.
    Join us as we explore how to develop clear prompt generators for personalized outputs, learn the latest advancements in AI, and discover the hottest software currently used for video, audio, and content creation. By the end of this episode, you’ll have the knowledge and tools you need to level up your content production game!
    Specifically, we discuss the hottest software for video, audio, and content creation
    • Top AI-driven tools and platforms for various content formats
    • Integrating AI-powered tools into your content production workflow
    • Success stories: AI in action
    • And real-life examples of coaches, consultants, and experts who have successfully implemented AI in their content strategy


    At the end of this episode, you will:

      1. Have a clear prompt generator that produces personalized outputs
      2. Learn the latest in AI and the hottest software currently used for video, audio, and content creation
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:



    [00:00:43] April: Hi guys. Welcome to podcast episode 280 and we are diving back into talking more about AI in your business. Why are we talking about AI and business? Because we are content creators. We are experts, we are leaders, and [00:01:00] we’re all people who lead other people. That’s why you’re listening to this show, and in the process, what we do is creating teachings and training and materials to help other people elevate according to our area of expertise, right?

    [00:01:12] April: However, It’s very, very time consuming to do. And historically engineering your offers, your programs, your content, has been one of the longest consuming tasks that we manage as CEOs in our company. Whether you’re still doing it yourself or you have a team that helps you create your content, it’s expensive and is time consuming.

    [00:01:34] April: And so with the inception of AI into our business, we can. Become more productive and create more transformational content according to our authentic voice and genius. And so that’s why it’s so important that we are continuing to talk about this because this show is dedicated to helping you level up your business.

    [00:01:54] April: And that’s why we’re bringing you more episodes on ai. Here’s what you can expect from this episode. [00:02:00] We are going to talk about how to engineer prompts, how to actually use AI correctly in a way that is going to save you time and still sound exactly the way that you need it to sound so you don’t sound like a robot.

    [00:02:13] April: And we’re also talking to today’s guest about the new AI is called Unleashing AI four Business Summit. And by the way, take a second right now. Pause this and go get your free ticket. I will be a speaker at the Unleashing AI for Business Summit coming up here in May of 2023, and I’m gonna be breaking out the framework on how to use AI to engineer transformational programs.

    [00:02:39] April: It’s gonna be amazing. You can get your free ticket by going to unleash AI for spelled f o r So pauses for a sec. Go grab your ticket, sign up for that, and then come back and listen to the show. At the end of this show, you are gonna know a very [00:03:00] simple, prompt generation acronym that Bob Dietrich, our amazing guest, who is the creator of Unleashed AI for Business Summit, walks you through.

    [00:03:09] April: It’s gonna save you hours and hours of creating the output you’re looking for. We’re also talking about the latest in. And Bob uncovers some really cool secret tools that I didn’t even know about that after we recorded this show, I immediately went and tested them on some of the content from this episode.

    [00:03:28] April: So if you are ready for all of this, then you are in the right place. You can find all of the show notes, a link to the behind the scenes video. Bob Screen shares in this. If you are not following us on YouTube, make sure you’re following us at Sweet Life Company on YouTube where you can see the behind the scenes.

    [00:03:46] April: But all of this will be available right at your hands in our show notes, which can be found by visiting sweet life Or you can just go directly to sweet life [00:04:00] This is episode number two 80. Let’s go ahead and dive in. Hey everybody. Welcome back to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur and Online Business podcast.

    [00:04:09] April: I am here. A new friend Bob Dietrich, and he has come into our orbit in all things ai. I’m super excited to have been introduced to him from Amy Yamada. You all heard Amy’s episodes a couple of weeks ago, and we are diving in more to AI for content creation. Bob, can you introduce yourself, let our friends know how you got into this world of everything AI over the last couple of months or maybe years. How, how long have you been diving into this?

    [00:04:42] Bob: Um, you know what, how long have we all been in it and not known it? Right? Right. That’s a real question because we’ve all been in it for so long and we’ve not known it. Um, everything from our Facebook feeds to the Google searches. I mean, as soon as the internet came out, AI was pretty much invented.

    [00:04:56] Bob: So, uh, so we’ve all been in it for a while. Uh, [00:05:00] but today, I mean, Now that we’re in it, now we’re more aware of what we can do and we have things like chat, g p t available. Um, but we got some really important questions like how do we get it to work properly? How do we implement it into our business? Um, I was at a party, uh, last weekend and I’m telling people about chat, G P T, like they should know.

    [00:05:18] Bob: And it’s like most people don’t know. I mean, we are literally at the bottom of the upswing of the curve, uh, you know, the bell curve of, of a product’s life, right? And. Just at the beginning, it’s like ages when, you know, dot coms are just about to start. So if you’re watching this, you’re just at the beginning of this huge bell curve that’s happening and it’s very exciting,

    [00:05:39] April: What a remarkable actually time in, in the world to live. And I know that there are a lot of people that are scared of it. Uh, in, in our entrepreneur world that we are part of, we tend to be total go-getters. We love the newest things. We love diving into them and. Why what you’re doing is actually so cool because you have [00:06:00] created these amazing summits that are all about unleashing the power of AI for thought leaders, for entrepreneurs. Tell us a little bit about those summits that you have been hosting and, and the ones to the, in the ones that are to come.

    [00:06:14] Bob: Yeah. So, um, a summit, if you’re not aware or familiar with them, is basically a group of interviews. A set of interviews anywhere from 10 to 15 to 30. I mean, even 60 interviews, depending on how about how large it is.

    [00:06:27] Bob: Uh, ours tend to be about a full day, so about 16 interviews, and we bring on top experts. And our, our strategy is really, To, um, we all know that chat G P T exists. If you’re watching this, you’re probably familiar with that. The question is, how do you make it work the way you want it to and what other AR tools are out there?

    [00:06:43] Bob: And so our program, our summit, is designed to bring in business owners and say, Hey, you’re using chat G P T, how are you using it to get. Information out to make your business run more efficiently, to, to reduce your cost, to increase your profits, to gain that competitive [00:07:00] advantage. Um, and also what other tools are you using that also help you, uh, excel in your business.

    [00:07:06] Bob: And so it’s been remarkable because each. Person, although, hey, we’re using chat G B T, here’s how I’m using it. And your mind is blown. Just like you first used, you know, first time you saw Jet Chat G v t, it was like, wow, my mind just got blown. Well, get get ready. It’s gonna get blown again and again and again.

    [00:07:21] Bob: Every time you see chat, G B T and somebody else use it in a different way, it’s just. It’s phenomenal. It’s, it’s, um, it’s the magic eight ball of the 21st century .

    [00:07:30] April: It’s, it’s so funny as you say that, I’m thinking that, uh, my husband and I were talking last week and he was having, um, his bio generated and then he had his bio generated in the Voice of Yoda, and it was absolutely hysterical.

    [00:07:42] April: I mean, just these funny things too that you don’t think about. And he goes, this is it. This is what I’m gonna put on my LinkedIn profile. This is it. This is what it’s gonna be. You know, so it it, like you’re saying, I mean, you just don’t even think of some of the things. I was just in a meeting prior to this with somebody who was talking about doing their whole entire task list and actually having [00:08:00] chat actually organize their order of operations of all the things they had to do in a day.

    [00:08:03] April: It wasn’t even. Externally facing content. It was literally helping them organize their own thoughts and ideas to be a more productive person. So I agree with you and I can’t wait to be a part of speaking at your upcoming summit that we’re gonna be having here in a couple weeks and, and we’ll be sharing information about that as well.

    [00:08:22] April: Me too. So one of the things that I’m most excited to hear about is what also tends to be stumping people, right? I’m of course, excited to learn your solution like all of our listeners are, and that is how do we actually know the correct inputs to get the right outputs for what we need? And. AI to do for us in our business.

    [00:08:47] April: And you call that prompt engineering. Can you explain just first of all, high level, what is prompt engineering and why is it so important for our users to under or our listeners to understand?

    [00:08:58] Bob: Sure, sure. [00:09:00] So prompt engineering, not my word, not my phrase, but I’m gonna give it to you anyway, because here’s what it means. Prompt engineer engineering basically means the creation of the prompt, the input that goes into an AI so you can get the output. Right. So that is the input, the prompt is the input, whatever you’re inputting in there. And, uh, if you input, you know, it’s kind of like the first time you, you went to computer class and you started learning about computers.

    [00:09:24] Bob: It’s like garbage in, garbage out. That was like one of the first thing you learned. And so if you put garbage into the chat, cheap pt, guess what? It’s not magic. It’s not gonna spit out good stuff. It’s gonna give you garbage out, right? So you have to give it, um, the right input, the right prompt to. Pull out the stuff.

    [00:09:39] Bob: When you pull out the inform information you want, when you give it the right prompt, it’ll blow your mind, right? And that, and if you don’t give it the right, uh, right prompt, uh, it’ll be a big disappointment. . Right.

    [00:09:50] April: Just, just can create more content. Yeah. And I would say nobody needs more content. Right? We need a transformation or, or what is the clear outcome of what we’re looking for.

    [00:09:58] April: Exactly. Uh, [00:10:00] really great to know about prompt engineering, and you actually have a very special formula that you guide people through in order to understand how to create prompts. Can you tell us a little bit about.

    [00:10:12] Bob: and, yeah. And it, and it’s not a hard, fast rule, um, but it is something that, uh, that I think it, it’ll be a good guide. So let, let’s go through it. Um, I’ve created this acronym. It’s not a pretty acronym, but it’s something you can remember. and I, I like acronyms because every letter stands for something, right? And so the word is Cats Paww, right? Uh, Cats Paww. Right, right. And so Cat, if you reme can remember Cats Paww, then you can probably remember every step here.

    [00:10:39] Bob: So let’s go through the, what is Cats Paww? So the first thing you wanna do when you’re generating a, a command, and probably by the way, I’ll probably get Cats Paww replaced with something cool. But for now, , I actually think

    [00:10:49] April: that’s, I, I remember it already. Right. There’s nothing in the coaching space that’s called Cats Paww, so nobody’s gonna go

    [00:10:55] Bob: forget that .There we go. All right. So, uh, so the first thing in the C [00:11:00] stands for command, right? You want to give it a command, like, write this or write code for this, or Correct this, or explain this or analyze this, right? So, A command, right? So C is the command. Um, a is the adjective. Write this emotional or compelling, or outrageous or thrilling or heartbreaking or whatever, right?

    [00:11:19] Bob: So write this adjective, right? So ca a is for adjective, right? Um, T is for tone. . So write this adjective in the tone of, right, and this is kind of your writing voice, right? This is it, the flavor of the, of the, uh, of the conversation. So you’re gonna write an email, uh, that is compelling in the tone of, um, a casual tone or a, uh, perspective tone.

    [00:11:42] Bob: Um, inter perspective or passionate tone. Or enthusiastic tone, right? So T is for tone. So it’s c a t s is for the subject. What is the subject, right? Um, write this adjective. Uh, write this emotional, enthusiastic sales letter [00:12:00] or email or subject or landing page, right? So s is for the subject. What is the subject?

    [00:12:05] Bob: What are you gonna gonna have it, uh, produce, right? Um, and then you wanna say, uh, from the perspective of. Who, the customer, the product, the competitor, the ex, you know, the storyteller, uh, the advocate, the influencer. The performer. Right? Who’s, who’s it in the perspective of, right? So now we’re at the P. So let’s go to the A.

    [00:12:26] Bob: So Katz, Paul A is for, uh, uh, the A and K Paul. And, uh, and then we’re saying what’s the, the ambition or the goal, right? Mm-hmm. . . And so the g the ambition or goal is to, uh, to have it sell or have it to maybe reverse the risk or make it easy to buy or make it impossible to say no or, or give it a sense of urgency or a sense of scarcity maybe, or, um, offer a guarantee or, you know, what’s the goal of the.

    [00:12:56] Bob: um, of the communication of the prompt, right? [00:13:00] Um, then w and w are with and without, right? So with this person, with this thing, with this qualifier, um, or with, and or without it, without being upsetting people, or without being salesy, without being boring, or without being dull, or without being tedious or without offending people or whatever it is.

    [00:13:22] Bob: Um, so that’s basically cat’s paw. So let’s go through it again. The command. The adjective, the tone, the subject, like sales letter, email, whatever, the perspective of from who, right? And the perspective of the goal, uh, like, like what do you want it to do? Make a person feel a certain way or produce a certain result. Um, and with or without something, with, with a qualifier and without being, say, salesy or boring or pushy.

    [00:13:50] April: Wow. What a framework. Yeah. I see as you, as you are breaking that out. In playing with AI in, in starting to [00:14:00] use it more regularly, I absolutely see the power in your structure and I wish I had had that before I had started playing with it because I think I have spent hundreds of hours just wondering what was coming up from what I was putting in.

    [00:14:14] April: So that is really incredibly powerful. What, in your experience do you find that entrepreneurs are using ai. For I, is it email marketing, social marketing article? Like what, what are the trends? I mean, I can’t even say trends. It’s also new, right? Yeah. What are the most common uses of the outputs of the content that you have seen so far?

    [00:14:38] Bob: Okay, so, um, uh, I’m gonna answer that before I do I wanna say, Most business owners are not using it, right? So this is your advantage right now if you’re watching it, right? Most businesses aren’t using it. The ones that are aware of it, maybe half of ’em are using it, maybe less than that. Um, and they’re not, so they’re not using it properly.

    [00:14:55] Bob: They haven’t figured it out. Some business owners are using it. So let’s talk about those people. [00:15:00] Who are you, who’s using it? How are they using it? Um, so those people who are using Chat G P T, most people are using, you know, uh, some form of it in Google and whatever, but when you really talk about, say, chat, G P T or some of the audio or video programs out there, um, they’re using Chat G P T for, you know, things like emails, things like sales letters, um, but you know what really is cool? Totally overlooked is the research. Um, do we have the ability to do screen share anything here? Um, yeah,

    [00:15:30] April: absolutely. Okay. We, we love, uh, let me make sure that you have power. Yeah. Can you, can you power it up from below?

    [00:15:37] Bob: I certainly

    [00:15:38] April: can. Awesome. And we’ll make sure this is on YouTube for you guys. Those of you’re listening in audio, make sure that you cruise over to YouTube and we’ll put a link to that in the show notes.

    [00:15:48] Bob: Okay. So I’m just gonna find the, uh, Uh, the entire screen. There we

    [00:15:52] April: go. Oh, this is so cool. This is so cool. Okay.

    [00:15:56] Bob: So, um, I am going to share my screen and what I wanna show you here [00:16:00] is, can you see my screen right now with chat g p t up? Yep, sure can. Okay. So I was working with somebody, uh, earlier and she was saying she wanted to create her program.

    [00:16:09] Bob: She’s, uh, she’s working with. People in recovery who want something more out of life, uh, to stay sober. Like they’re, in other words, they’re sober already. They’ve gone through the process of, of being through a rehab and now they wanna get really jump into life, right. Um, and really make something outta life.

    [00:16:25] Bob: So she’s doing a next level course. It’s like after you’ve conquered. Recovery, what do you do now? And so we put in something saying, uh, you know, that said, I’m working with people in recovery, want something more out of life now that they’re sober. Please write, uh, what people in recovery are most interested in.

    [00:16:40] Bob: And so what it does is it puts all the information out. This is what they’re all interested in, right? These are what they’re interested in after recovery. It’s like, okay, great. So please gimme some statistics around this. Right? And so what it did was it spit out all these statistics. I just did this this morning.

    [00:16:54] Bob: So this is fresh information. Um, so it says, okay, uh, 88% [00:17:00] of people, uh, reported making positive changes in their personal life since becoming sober, right? 62% uh, said that they pursued a new career. 67% said they had made new friends after becoming sober, 72% re reported spirituality or faith was improved.

    [00:17:16] Bob: Um, 80% of the people reported that they had positive changes in their diet, so on and on, and. . Um, you can use this if you’re building a recovery program to show people, Hey, you guys have a very, very good chance of succeeding if the right things are in place. So now the next problem is prompt, is what are some things that will help people be successful to continue their recovery and help them, you know, to help them become successful?

    [00:17:40] Bob: And so what it does is here are some things that individuals in recovery. Be successful and maintain their sobriety over the long term. So they need a strong support system. They need healthy coping mechanisms. They need a sense of purpose. They need avoiding triggers and accountability. I mean, that sounds like everybody, but especially people in [00:18:00] recovery, right?

    [00:18:00] Bob: Because without some of these things, they may go back to, you know, drinking or taking drugs or alcohol or whatever. Right? So, . So this is, this is where they focus, so this is what her course should be focusing on, right? And then we said, okay, well what are the pain points they’re experiencing? Well, they’re, the pain points are cravings.

    [00:18:17] Bob: Oh my gosh. Social isolations, financial and legal issues. Mental health issues, right? So mind blowing already, right? This is, and so, okay.

    [00:18:26] April: Right. So keep

    [00:18:26] Bob: going, keep going. Yeah, yeah, yeah. So it’s like, okay, so now create an outline for a program called Next Level Recovery. That’s her program. Right? So look for it.

    [00:18:34] Bob: It’s coming. It’s coming soon. It’s coming. It’s coming. And so it says, here’s the outline for your program based on everything we just talked about, right? And so it basically flows this outline, it gives you seven points to it. It’s like, you know what? We want a little bit longer, add three more modules to this outline.

    [00:18:49] Bob: And so now it’s 10 modules long and it spits out 10 modules of, of. Of, of, you know, her program based on what we, what we wanted to do. Now. She said, well, I wanna start, you know, [00:19:00] nurturing my email list before I start getting out there. I said, okay, well let’s do this. Um, but this is an email, uh, by the way, uh, I, I asked that, write me an email to potential expert speakings, inviting them to speak on a summit for this.

    [00:19:13] Bob: Product. So, or for this, uh, for a program about recovery. So, so we said, okay, make an announcement for this event and rewrote the announcement. And then we said, okay, write 20 subjects I can email to my audience in recovery in the next 10 weeks. You know, that would kind of, kind of get the email list warmed up a little bit.

    [00:19:29] Bob: Mm-hmm. , and it gives me these 10, uh, these 20 different, um, subjects that I could be talking about. And I, and I took the first one, the power of gratitude. I said, write me a, a blog PO. A 10 point blog. , right? You have 10 benefits of the power of, of gratitude in recovery and how they can implement these principles and it produces this blog post.

    [00:19:49] Bob: Now I can cut and paste this into my email and start warming up my list right away while I’m building out my program, right? And I did all this in about 10 or 20 minutes, right? And then, [00:20:00] um, and then, I mean, it goes on and on, so, so, Yeah, that’s, that’s what I wanted

    [00:20:05] to

    [00:20:05] April: show my mind is just absolutely blown.

    [00:20:07] April: I hope you guys are watching this video. If you’re listening to the audio, make sure you also watch the video replay of this. What a, as you were saying this, cuz what I’m gonna be speaking at, on, at your summit is offer engineering and how we actually extract genius to, to create methodologies and transformational programs.

    [00:20:26] April: I’m really excited to talk about that and mm-hmm. , we’ve been testing that a lot and, but what. made me think of was earlier today I was in with a group of businesses, so just kind of another use case where we are licensing their courses to corporations and our goal this morning was to come up with the sales deck and part of coming up the sales deck are coming up with statistics.

    [00:20:50] April: And numbers and pain points for the organization or corporation. And that was a, a real sticking point that has always in the past required a lot [00:21:00] of exhausting research. And I never once in this whole entire morning, so now based on this, I need to go back and tell all of our clients, you need to input this into chat G P T, because exactly.

    [00:21:11] April: We were struggling with coming up today is exactly what you just showed. Mind blown, absolutely

    [00:21:17] Bob: amazing. And so when I say research, it’s like start from the beginning. Start from your, you know, what are you, who is it that you’re wanting to talk to? What are their pain points? What are their, their, what are they looking for?

    [00:21:28] Bob: What you know, and where do you want to take? Them and what’s the name of your program? And insert all this information in, in a, in a, in kind of a, a logical chronological flow. And it’ll start to, you know, build it for you cuz it’s remembering what you just input. It’s remembering what, it just outputted based on all the information inputs that it got.

    [00:21:45] Bob: And then it, it kind of builds on itself. Builds on itself, builds on itself.

    [00:21:49] April: Unbelievable. Unbelievable. Um mm-hmm. , I’m literally, I am speechless. And this episode is dropping right away and even eight weeks from now [00:22:00] after. , there’ll be, there’ll be so many more use cases. And so I’m excited to be here talking to you and experiencing these things and learning from you and learning from the other experts you bring in.

    [00:22:12] April: And then hoping to, to spread the word on how we all can use this before we wrap up. And we’re gonna make sure you guys know how to get access to Bob’s Unleashing the Power of AI Summit. We need to make sure you guys get in there. Uh, they’re, I mean, I’m just so excited to be part of just. An incredible group of people that are spearheading this and we wanna make sure you guys are involved.

    [00:22:36] April: Can you share with us what are, what are just, we always talk about chat g P two, we’ve been talking about that a lot. But what are the other hot AI tools that are, are on the rise and people are using in addition to, um, hoping to ai.

    [00:22:50] Bob: Okay, so, so this is really, uh, fun to talk about because, uh, chat g p t I mean, I, I, I can tell you that, that without a doubt, somebody’s gonna [00:23:00] come up with this party game, uh, for chat G P T and you, and you just, you know, maybe you pull a card or something and then you type it into chat G P t and you know it does something, right?

    [00:23:08] Bob: Yeah. And it’s Cards Against Humanity on chapter media or something like that, right? Uh, although it won’t give you any information like that. So I don’t know exactly what it’s gonna be, but if it’ll be very fun. Anyway, so, um, some of the, um, , I know the idea right there. That’s funny, right? Yeah. So, uh, some of the things that, that you’ve seen out there, that I’ve seen out there, I mean, descript is, is popular if you’re not using descript and you haven’t looked it up, D e s c r i p t

    [00:23:36] Bob: It, it is amazing. It’ll take your videos, right? It’ll pull it up into the system, it’ll cut out all the ums and ahs in, you knows, and whatever all the filler words if, if. It’ll transcribe everything. And if you didn’t like something you said, you can take it out. And if you wanna say something different because you misspoke, you said, oh, it’s on April 15th, when you meant April 27th.

    [00:23:59] Bob: You can take the [00:24:00] 15th out, put the 27th in and it will change the video and it’ll change, even change your mouth a little bit. Look, you make it look like you said the 27th, right? And so, um, it is a super cool tool. For editing. Uh, it’s editing on steroids. It’s editing for a, you know, with ai. Oh my goodness.

    [00:24:17] Bob: And it’s super cool. So, . Yeah, it’s, it’s makes editing a lot more fun. And that’s kind of their theme. Um, I could even show you a, a link to a video, two minute video that’ll show you what, uh, what it does. Uh, even the video’s fun. Um, there’s another tool that I really like, Otter ai. Some of you have probably used it, but, um, and I have, I’m not using it yet.

    [00:24:37] Bob: This is like, I’m super excited to unwrap this. Christmas present. So Otter AI is basically a transcription tool where you put it on your computer and you, you flip it on and it’s on all the time. It’s transcribing everything, right? If I had it on right now, I’d be transcribing this, and when we’re done, I can go back and take what we just talked about and create a video on it, create a little excerpt on it, you know, whatever I want.

    [00:24:59] Bob: But it’s all [00:25:00] on. It’s all recorded audio and transcription on auto ai. So that’s another tool that’s pretty cool. Um, one of my favorites though is called Video ai. Now, video ai. If I was recording this, for example, what I would do is I could take this, uh, conversation, upload it onto video ai, and what it will do is it will cut it down into like small 32nd.

    [00:25:23] Bob: Reels. Now I can post those reels on Instagram and it, it, it’s already got an algorithm in there to say, Hey, what’s the, what’s the, uh, most interesting points of the conversation between April and Bob? And it’ll give me a little highlight reel and then I post it on, on Instagram and I don’t really need to do much of anything.

    [00:25:40] Bob: It’ll tell to give 10 of ’em. It’ll take 10 of ’em and it’ll just post it. It won’t post it for you, but you know, you do it yourself, but still it’s creating these. , these little video clips. And, uh, it is, it is super cool. And, you know, other people talk about like synthia and these other, uh, avatar things where you can get this, you know, animated looking [00:26:00] version of you to start speaking like, uh, like you.

    [00:26:03] Bob: Um, but that’s not quite there yet. And it’s kind of a little creepy and people don’t really want, that’s too comfortable with it. You know, . And so, uh, it’s like, yeah, okay. Um, it’s like the max head max headroom of, of 2023. Right?

    [00:26:18] April: Oh my gosh. How funny. Remember that? You have to, you have to be a certain age to remember that.

    [00:26:22] April: Yes, I remember that. Our, our listeners are of the age they remember, they remember Max Headroom. That’s so funny. Right. Um, you know, I’m gonna go to video AI after this and upload all this there, and Please do. I’m going to, and we don’t ever do this for the podcast, you guys. , but we will put these clips and then we’ll put it in the show notes of like what we came up with. Just playing with that. I totally am excited to do. Yeah. How amazing. ,

    [00:26:47] Bob: yeah. Yeah, do that and send them to me. Please tag me if you put ’em on Instagram or Facebook. I would love to see those. And, um, uh, and the more you know, the more I find out, the more I’ll be sharing with you. And that’s the beauty, by the way, of these events.

    [00:26:59] Bob: Unleash [00:27:00] ai for Go there. You can register now. Um, and even though the summit’s over, you can still buy the summit for 27 bucks. I mean, it’s a, it’s a deal for that. And then you. Uh, you’ll be on the list to receive the invite for the next free summit and the free one after that, and the free one after that.

    [00:27:16] Bob: The more people I interview, the more applications I see. The more AI tools that come out, the better they get. I mean, by the time May tw, May 9th comes out, oh, let me tell you this. So we had it scheduled for May 9th, right? That was our original scheduled date. Mm-hmm. for a, uh, unleash ai. And this was in February.

    [00:27:32] Bob: And, and things were moving so fast and so many people were coming up and saying, Hey, I got this tool, I got this tool, I got this and that. We said, we gotta do it faster. So we moved it up to April and. And it was still like, April’s like a month, you know, a month and a half away. Let’s move this up to March now.

    [00:27:47] Bob: March was very ambitious and it still turned out killer. It was so good and, uh, and, and I’m kind of glad we did now that it’s over because, you know, it was a lot of work to produce it, but, um, it’s so. [00:28:00] Poignant right now, it’s so on target and it’s gonna change. And by May or yeah, by May 9th, it’ll things, some things will be different.

    [00:28:07] Bob: And by August or July some things will be different, right? So it’s moving that quickly. Things are moving so fast and things are changing so fast that um, you know, you wanna get it now and, but you know, things are gonna change. The rest of the world’s gonna catch up, then you’re gonna be ahead. Ahead of the curve, you know, in front of the wave. Right, right,

    [00:28:24] April: right. And I mean, and just the productivity for our team alone has just been incredible. Mm-hmm. , I’m the, the person where it, it will have taken me two hours to write an email. I’m just not naturally a writer and mm-hmm. . So some of these tools just in productivity and business are just gonna get so much faster and learning how to make it very authentic to who we are and not robotic and true to our brand voice and our, our leadership voice and our personality.

    [00:28:48] April: It. Absolutely amazing. I can’t wait to be a part of your upcoming summit and speak at your summit. And I know that I’m so excited about the other speakers you have there that I can’t [00:29:00] wait to learn from as well. It’s just gonna absolutely be epic and um, thank you so much for coming on the show and yeah, I’m so glad we get.

    [00:29:07] April: Get this in here while we’re talking about AI on the show, and of course unleash, unleash AI for business coming up slash April. We can get you guys that ticket signed up. And uh, Bob, thank you so much. This has been awesome. I can’t

    [00:29:22] Bob: wait to much. You’re very welcome. I, I’ll see you guys all on Unleash AI four, not the number four, but f o r

    [00:29:29] Bob: Sounds

    [00:29:29] April: good. Thanks. Sure. What an amazing time talking to Bob. I learned so much and I already opened up some of the tools we talked about on this show to play with in order to produce this show for you guys. So here are your action items at the end of this episode. First of all, go get your free ticket.

    [00:29:47] April: I would love to pour into you as I’m going to be a speaker at the Unleash AI for Business Summit coming up here. I want you to get your free ticket to that, and I’m gonna teach you how to embark on offer engineering [00:30:00] using ai. Super cool. Grab your free ticket to the next summit by visiting Unleash AI for business.

    [00:30:07] April: Spelled, and we’re gonna make sure you get that free ticket and dive into all the things Bob talked about on today’s show. Play with them. Go to the show slash two 80 and we’re gonna have a recap of all this, including links to all the resources Bob talked about.

    [00:30:27] April: So I hope you do those two things. I hope you. Free ticket to this. This is new to me. This is new to you, but we’ve been playing with it a lot and we’re getting amazing results. Engineering transformational coaching programs and offers with the help of ai, and I can’t wait to show you that, and so I can’t wait to see you at the upcoming summit as well.

    [00:30:46] April: Again, unleash AI for No, I don’t make money from this. I just want you to be part of it. I can’t wait to see you there. Hope you guys have an awesome day.[00:31:00]


    How Web3 and NFTs Can Grow Your Coaching Business and Build Loyal Fans – with April Beach and Brain Fanzo (Episode 279)

    How Web3 and NFTs Can Grow Your Coaching Business and Build Loyal Fans - with April Beach and Brain Fanzo


    This episode is for coaches, consultants, authors, speakers and niche service providers who want to learn about how you can utilize Web 3.0 in your business, to grow your following and to create loyal fans who love and support you. 
    By now you’ve heard of Web 3.0, NFTs, and blockchain, but you’re still unsure of how to use, create or overall tap-into these technologies for your coaching, consulting, writing, speaking or creating business. On this week’s show my friend Brian Fanzo returns to help you understand NFTs and how these digital currencies can further your business and movement. 
    In the past, we’ve spoken of using NFTs as a currency for clients who hold your coin to gain exclusive access to content, trips, and access to you! In today’s podcast, we start there but take our conversation further as Brian guides our thinking to a much broader and more important (in my opinion) consideration. We dive into how your long-time super fans can truly be part of the change and movement you’re creating, by holding your NFT and thereby investing in the future of your business. These concepts are new to most, but in this show we start with the basics and end with the ideals of how you can get started in Web 3.0 for your coaching, consulting, or creator economy business too. Brian also walks us through his journey creating the $ADHD Coin and the realities of his learning process that lead to even greater consideration for the Coins potential than what he originally expected. 


    At the end of this episode, you will:

      1. Have 100 ideas for creating your own NFT
      2. Know where to start in Web 3.0 to get your feet wet
      3. Learn about how NFTs enable your movement, expand your reach, and get the people going…
    Resources mentioned: 
    Listen to the episode where Brian walks through the different terms:
    Listen about NFTs from the beginning:
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:44] April: Hi you guys, and welcome to episode 279 on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. All the show notes and everything we talk about can be found by visiting

    [00:00:56] April: Click on the podcast and we have a really cool show [00:01:00] in store for you today. We’re kind of wrapping. Three show series on AI and how to use these things to build and grow and scale your coaching business. If you don’t know me, I’m April Beach. I’m an online business architect and I’m an offer engineer, and I help coaches as consultants, authors, speakers, and experts scale their business online by creating million dollar programs, courses, trainings, content licensing, certifications, retreats, and VIP..

    [00:01:27] April: So everything we talk about here in the show is always gonna be driven back to creating your genius creating world-class programs so that you can surpass seven figures and grow your business. Now, today’s episode is really, really cool. We’re talking with a friend of mine, Brian Fanzo. He’s been on this show before.

    [00:01:46] April: All right. But we’re bringing Brian back, especially around these episodes that we’re diving in with chat, G P T and AI, because I wanted to talk about NFTs in web three for your coaching business. [00:02:00] So in this show, we dive into how you can actually. Build super fans by using NFTs. We know Web three, we’ve talked about this before and I am sure that you’ve heard about this before.

    [00:02:12] April: We’ve spoken about it in the past, but in this show, Brian actually goes into the use of NFTs to grow your consulting business to. Build superfans in a community and we talk about how to engineer offers or engineer a community of followers. If you have a podcast as an example, where you can actually create superfans and give them extra access by creating a custom N F T.

    [00:02:40] April: So at the end of this episode, you’re gonna have a hundred ideas. Probably way too many. I know we’re entrepreneurs. We never have a shortage of ideas, do we? Uh, you’re gonna have a hundred ideas for creating your own N F T. You’re gonna know where to start with Web 3.0 to get your feet wet. It’s really web three.

    [00:02:58] April: not Web 3.0, web three, [00:03:00] to get your feet wet. Clearly, I need to be getting my feet wet a little bit more, and you are gonna know how NFTs enable your movement, your message, your people to actually join you in your mission to grow and scale your coaching business more. So all of this is coming up here with my friend Brian Fanzo on the show, and I’m so excited for you to dive in with.

    [00:03:23] April: and all the show notes and everything that we talked about can be found again by visiting sweet life Click on the podcast, and this is episode number 279. All right, let’s do. All right, you guys. Well, my friend Brian is back on the show again. I think the last time he was here was about, oh gosh, like four or five years ago.

    [00:03:41] April: And Brian is, is really, truly always the tip of the sword when it comes to, um, the future of work in a way that. Actually matters. And so I’m super excited to have him back on the show this week as we dive into the next gen of the podcast, talking all about NFTs and, and what [00:04:00] they mean for us as creators.

    [00:04:02] April: And so first of all, I know you’re super busy and your girls are growing up and, and life is spinning. So thank you so much for hanging out with me again for a little bit here on this show. Let’s dive right in today and talk about. For those listeners that still don’t know how to wrap their head around it, actually, what is an N F T and why should they care about this in their business?

    [00:04:24] Brain: Excited to be back. Uh, you know, it was great to hang out again. Um, I’ll say, you know, like, you know, a year and a half ago I had no care or interest in NFTs or cryptocurrency. It felt very Ponzi scheme ish. It felt very like Crypto bros. So I just put that out there as like, if it’s foreign or you’re kind of polarized by it.

    [00:04:43] Brain: I understand I was in that same boat, uh, not too long ago. But for me, one of the things that I’ve always looked at was, How do we, how can we, you know, really grow a community where there is a shared ownership between us as either creators, entrepreneurs, authors, [00:05:00] speakers, with those that are our audience, right?

    [00:05:02] Brain: The, that whole a thousand True Fan, uh, essay by, you know, Kevin Cruz, I think that’s like one that we’ve all referenced, but in a weird space digitally. We didn’t really have a way other than like maybe we were monetizing, giving them early access to something. And so NFTs to. Of course it stands for non fungible token, but in, in the bigger sense of this, it allows us to have digital ownership in, in, in things that, that are, we traditionally wouldn’t have.

    [00:05:30] Brain: And, and I, most people are like, well, what does that even mean? Because. We haven’t had ownership of anything, of data or information or products or services online, but we have offline, right? Like if you own a car, you know that you own the car, you have the keys, you have the deed to the car, you, you know that it’s sitting in your, in your driveway.

    [00:05:50] Brain: But if you think about it digitally, what have we, what do we even own? Like. One could even argue we don’t own our website, we don’t own our email addresses, right? Like we are technically like [00:06:00] leasing them from Google. We are, we own a domain for a certain amount of years and we’re using, you know, and so this idea of ownership, the underlying technology and the technology won’t matter in a couple years, is kind of like cell phone towers.

    [00:06:14] Brain: Like we don’t care the techno, we don’t care if it’s 5g, LTE. We just want the fastest service we can get and we want it to be everywhere and not to. That’s what this all is. The blockchain is technically the, the underlying technology. But for those that are interested in NFTs, what NFTs mean to me is it’s proof of ownership online.

    [00:06:34] Brain: That is, it cannot be disputed. And what, and the beauty of that is when an NF. When an NFT is created, it’s, it’s, it’s put onto the blockchain and everyone can see it, and nobody can edit it. Nobody can delete it. Nobody can. And so there’s an element of like kind of transparency and ownership online that we’ve never had before.

    [00:06:55] Brain: Now the question becomes what do you do with that? How do you use them? What are do they kind of [00:07:00] represent? And I’ll just say for those that you know, you might have heard about like bored apes or crypto punks or some of these ones, like Jimmy Fallon has one and all. Those are like kind of like 1% of what the value of NFTs are.

    [00:07:13] Brain: That is much more in the collectible space, but where we’re moving is community ownership, and it’s really valuable when it comes to like personal branding and that kind of space. Yeah.

    [00:07:24] April: Thank you for explaining all that. And that’s a perfect transition for people to understand, cuz they do, they see those and they’re like, why, you know, why do I need to own a collectible piece of art in, what does that have to do with my course or my mastermind or my book that I’m writing?

    [00:07:38] April: And, and what does that actually have to do with that is totally irrelevant. So thank you for, uh, creating that, you know, separation in that. So when we talk about community ownership, and of course every single leader. Entrepreneur, um, service-based professional, like we [00:08:00] want our people to grow as we grow, and the goal is to create this long-term journey so clients continue to grow with us.

    [00:08:07] April: They continue to be a part of what we’re doing, and we can create that journey, obviously with our offers and our programs. But what you’re explaining in this kind of all hands in village, Ownership is, I don’t thi think people have really have ever thought about this if they have not already been listening to your podcast every single day, which by the way, you guys, you need to make sure that you’re tuning into Brian’s podcast, , because this is where we learn, me and my boys, we binge Brian’s podcast to learn all about this.

    [00:08:40] April: But let’s talk about what, what do you mean by community ownership and, and why should we care about that as, as leaders?

    [00:08:49] Brain: Well, yeah. No, I think, I mean, it’s, it’s a beautiful thing. There wasn’t really a reason to care about it previously because we kind of separated online and offline. But if you think about it, like I’ll, I’ll use the [00:09:00] reference of the car and then I’ll tie it to the Mastermind, but there, there’s a reason that the emblem of our car is on the front of the car.

    [00:09:06] Brain: It says the name of the car that we own in the back, right? Like we we’re technically marketing for Mercedes, for Lexus, for Tesla. Every time we pull up. And part of that is because it’s like, Hey, we’re proud of what we own. Right. It’s a little bit of peacocking and like the, you pull in, you’re like, I’m, I’m a Jeep guy.

    [00:09:22] Brain: Right. Anyone that has a Jeep. Yeah. I like, it’s like a family. Like we feel like we’re that world, but interestingly enough, The things we own digitally. Where do we like peacock? How do we show up? If someone has followed you for all these years, how do they know what masterminds you belong to? How do they know what books you’ve bought?

    [00:09:40] Brain: How do they like, other than like someone coming in my house and seeing all these books in my bookshelf, there’s really no way for us to show well, who we belong to, what are the things that we’re about? And so what NFTs do in in one beautiful way, Is it turns word of mouth marketing into an actual powerful thing digitally.

    [00:09:59] Brain: Because [00:10:00] I, I use this example all the time. You know, I’m part of the National Speakers Association. I will walk into rooms with, you know, at an event, 500, you know, a thousand people. I have no idea of anyone in there, is part of the National Speakers Association. I can show up in a Facebook. Engaged for a year, have no idea of anyone else in there.

    [00:10:20] Brain: Is part of the National Speakers Association. Maybe they put it in their bio, maybe it’s a logo on their website. But imagine if you had a representation of that on your profile photo or in your digital wallet where I said, Hey, I’m gonna go check what April belongs to. And all of the things that you belong to are represented there.

    [00:10:40] Brain: and the proof of ownership exists because, let’s face it, I don’t believe everything I read on LinkedIn, right? Like there’s a lot of people that graduated from Harvard. I don’t believe they graduated from Harvard, right? , because how? How do we prove that they did? Like you literally just put in the years and the thing in the LinkedIn, like we don’t have to submit something, but imagine, and this is where we’re going.[00:11:00]

    [00:11:00] Brain: When we, in, let’s just say three to five years, every single thing, every time we, we, we finish, uh, a training. Every time. Let’s say you finish your master’s degree, you’re gonna get an N F T into your wallet that says, on this date, this person, we verify. And the beautiful thing about that is it’s on the blockchain.

    [00:11:19] Brain: Nobody can edit it. It shows that this university gave it to you in your wallet. And so now like proof of experience, proof of what we’re doing. And that’s gonna go into things like an author, right? Like we’ve seen, you know, people that make claims. Like I’m a, you know, ti you know, I’m a New York Times bestselling author.

    [00:11:37] Brain: Like how do we even prove that, right? Like, I mean like right. You know, if someone does pretty good content marketing, you can pretty much make all the Google results. Say that I’m the bestselling author, but imagine if when you became a New York Times bestselling author, they gave you an N F T that represented and proved that you did that.

    [00:11:55] Brain: That’s where we’re moving this. And so the things that we’re hearing right now, a lot of it’s collectibles, a [00:12:00] lot of it is like this kind of investment strategy, but where we’re moving that matters for the audience is that if you. Good person doing good things, and you want to have proof of all of the good things you’ve done.

    [00:12:12] Brain: NFTs and the blockchain are gonna make that possible.

    [00:12:16] April: Oh my gosh. As an entrepreneur, I have a, now, based on what you just said, I have a hundred different NFTs. I wanna create for our people. Yeah. Uh, this, this is, and again, you know, we actually as a team have been talking about this for a long time when we took our break on the podcast, is that, you know, there’s these people that are like these sweet.

    [00:12:37] April: Business engineers that we would love to identify who they are that have been listening to this show forever, because they believe in what they’re doing and in our relationship with them and helping them do that. And so, uh, of course, I know our listeners now have so many ideas. They’re like, oh, I, I wanna create this for my really cool, you know, retreat that I’m doing to identify the people that are gonna go in there, go there.[00:13:00]

    [00:13:00] April: First of all, I’ve, I have a million questions, but I think the first two most important questions are where does somebody display their NFTs? Like it, do they get, obviously they get something to put on their website, because you’re right, we’re trained to go to the website and look at their bio page, but like, where, where do we put them to display?

    [00:13:21] April: Where could I go to check out your, like what you own and, and what identifies you as a person?

    [00:13:29] Brain: Yeah, so like, and this is, you know, this is where one of those things like the technology’s kind of keeping up with us as we go, and you know, just for context as well, like, you know, Starbucks just announced that they’re moving their entire reward system.

    [00:13:40] Brain: They, they’ve added on an N F T component. They call ’em, they call ’em digital stamps. Those are NFTs. Um, on Instagram, they’re calling ’em digital collectibles at the moment, so I can post my digital collectible on, actually, if you go to my Instagram account, my last three posts, two of them are actually NFTs that are verified.

    [00:13:59] Brain: So you can click [00:14:00] on the photo, it’ll pop up and tell you what the photo is. But if you say, I wanna more information, you’ll click a button and it’s gonna open up a marketplace that’s called open. And so right now open is the most popular marketplace. But I want you to think of opens. See, kind of like Amazon, where Amazon doesn’t really own any of the products that we, we go to Amazon for.

    [00:14:23] Brain: They’re owned, they’re somewhere else, but it’s like kind of like that display dashboard front door. But the ownership component is a tied to what we are, what is referred to as a digital wallet. And this is where right now on like I, I tell people a lot of times, I want you thinking about the use cases and thinking about the value and start building, okay, how do we, how do we get this to our audience?

    [00:14:45] Brain: What, who are the people that we would want to create? But some of the technology is still a little bit hard. The barrier to e entry is a little high because there’s this wallet that you know that it most people know. The wallet’s called Meta Mask is the name of the wallet that is most. [00:15:00] But the thing about meta mask wallet is that like I could, I could technically send you to a, a, a portfolio landing page and you could see everything that is in my meta mask, but it would feel very like disconnected cuz you would see like a picture of a monkey.

    [00:15:15] Brain: You’d see some of my own art. You’d see art that I’ve bought. From like a collector. And so where we’re moving is that we are going to be able to display these in a more transparent way. And some of the tech is coming, like right now, like even Instagram, when I open Instagram to post my digital collectible, it says Connect your wallet.

    [00:15:34] Brain: I collect that, it, it opens up a pop-up and says, do you wanna authenticate like your wallet to Instagram? Which is what I’m doing technically in that, like posting there to Instagram. But that’s where things get a little bit overwhelming because it’s like, well, how do I see someone else’s? How do I, you know, get some on my own?

    [00:15:51] Brain: And then I, I know the question that comes afterwards is like, well, how do I create my own NFTs? Right? Like, now I wanna, I wanna create like that, that same piece. And [00:16:00] the beauty of it. There’s lots of different options and ways to do it. Just recently, just this week, Reddit, which is, you know, Reddit is one of the largest social communities in the world.

    [00:16:11] Brain: They just rolled out NFTs over the last three months that they deal it all natively in the Reddit platform. So if you’re a Reddit user, you could click on your avatar and say, I wanna create a digital collect. That represents me and they would actually allow you to buy it. You could buy it with us dollars, you know, and they were ranging from like 15 to a hundred dollars.

    [00:16:31] Brain: Now it feels weird cuz you’re like, wait, why am I buying my avatar? But we also have to remember our kids are buying Roblox skins and, you know, halo, uh, avatars and I mean, everything Yeah. In this world is very digital skin. Like, and I will just tell anyone, once you do it, once you’re kind of. Oh, I kind of like that I get to purchase and own something that represents me, right?

    [00:16:55] Brain: Because like if someone went to my Twitter account route right now, you’ll see that like my [00:17:00] Twitter account is a, is a, my photo is an octagon, not a circle. The reason that is, is because I’ve verified that what I’m displaying is an N F T that I own. And so it’s actually built into Twitter as well right now.

    [00:17:13] Brain: But I think the bigger picture of this is where we’re going is eventually digital wallet. Will be the new single sign on for everything. So rather than saying, do you wanna log in with your email, your Facebook, or your Gmail, what it’ll say is, do you wanna log in with your Facebook, your email, or your digital wallet?

    [00:17:31] Brain: And what the beauty of that digital wallet is, which is different than Facebook, different than Google is, I own the wallet. No one has the keys to it. Now here’s the downside of. I, if I lose the password, I lose access to my wallet cuz I, I own it, right? There’s no like, there’s no digital place that I can call up and say, can you reset my password?

    [00:17:52] Brain: It’s like I am the owner of it. And so we’re moving toward the, the framework of this is called decentralization, but we’re not there and like, [00:18:00] That’s where I think everyone can get very overwhelmed. I, I’m not like a crypto, like massive crypto fan. Like I look at cryptocurrencies as kinda like investing, like kind of stock market investing.

    [00:18:09] Brain: But I don’t look at crypto in the same way that I look at NFTs for entrepreneurs. So for those that are thinking about this, I always say, like, my number one tagline is, I got lots of taglines. That’s kinda what we do. But, um, the, the one that I always say is, you wanna be a collector. Before you’re a creator, and that’s very hard for someone that preaches, press the damn button.

    [00:18:28] Brain: Like I, I will promise you, once you buy your first N F T and like Starbucks is rolling it out here in the United States over the next two months, all of a sudden you’re gonna be like, oh, I can buy this in Starbucks. It’s gonna give me a discount, and I’m also gonna have a chance to be sent. To Peru on this exclusive, you know, expedition to share how Starbucks does their copy process.

    [00:18:50] Brain: Like that’s how they’re kind of doing it. So we’re seeing the onboarding coming in lots of different ways. But yeah, it’s a very, um, the tech, the tech simplifying the technology is where [00:19:00] we’re at right now in this onboarding, you know, kind of N F T world.

    [00:19:04] April: That explains so much. Um, can you share a little bit about your process in going through, in creating your A D H D coin?

    [00:19:13] April: Can you talk a little bit about like the learning curve that you went through? Um, share with everybody what that coin is and you know, the. How you came to decide that that was what you wanted to do, and really just H how did you actually do that? I know we don’t have a ton of time, but kind of high level so people at least understand it’s like we don’t know what we don’t know, and so I think that would be really helpful.

    [00:19:35] Brain: Yeah, so there’s so NFTs. Technically, if you think about it this way, it’s a token that has a piece of art that is the front door, like the demonstration of it, right? So if you think about that non fungible token, well, there’s also tokens that are creator coins that allow you to create your own economy.

    [00:19:52] Brain: And so I was actually looking at Patreon. I’m a huge fan of Patreon. Love what Patreon can represent. I’m a big fan of like Mighty [00:20:00] Networks and a lot of these, uh, you know, really nice, uh, communities that we can build the problem, become. When you’re monetizing or you’re creating some kind of, you know, uh, economy there, you’re attached to the platform, right?

    [00:20:12] Brain: So like, if you’re building on Patreon, someone’s, it’s a subscription model. Well, goes back to my first comment on like, I wanna reward my super fans and I don’t want it to be just pay to play. And so in the, what I created, uh, a little over, uh, 19 months ago, 20 months ago, was a crater coin. Now I will tell you, I was gonna launch on Patreon and someone presented this option of a coin and I was like, I’ll try it.

    [00:20:36] Brain: I’ll, I’ll sure, I’ll, I’ll see if that works. Um, it took me eight months of trying it to figure out like what the hell this whole thing is, but what is beautiful about it? Different than what? Like a traditional subscription model is, is I have a coin that is backed by a 16 z, one of the largest venture capital companies in the world.

    [00:20:56] Brain: And what the beauty of that is, it allows people to [00:21:00] buy and sell coin. Kind of like, if you think about it, it’s investing in, in the community that I am building, but you don’t actually have to buy or sell to, to benefit from it. So here’s the examples that I would use is, If you engage in our discord, which is where our community hangs out, or if you listen to our podcast, I will often give away coins and, and reward people for saying, Hey, what anyone that clicks on this link, you’re gonna get five d h ADHD coins.

    [00:21:28] Brain: Now, A D H D just happens to be the name that I use. The coin could be named anything. But what works out really neat on this is that there are people in my community that have spent $0. On my coin, but they’ve been actively engaged supporting me and they’ve, they’ve been rewarded with coin and they’ve been able to get to a certain level of coin and based on what they’re holding, it unlocks certain things.

    [00:21:53] Brain: So, and this is where it’s like a real big difference between subscription and non-subscription is that you don’t send me the coin. [00:22:00] To partake in the things that you get. So one of the examples is, uh, every Friday I do a co a call for those that hold 93 coin or more. 93 happen to be my hockey number. So I just use that as the benchmark.

    [00:22:12] Brain: And the beauty of it is I have people that join that call. They have spent $0. On the coin, but they’ve been active in my commuting. I have others that joined the call that found out about it a week ago, and they said, Brian, um, I wanna get on that call, but I don’t, I’m not gonna spend months going in your discord.

    [00:22:29] Brain: I don’t got time for that. I’m like, okay, well, you can buy 93 coins. Now, the beauty of it is all you have to do is hold them. You don’t send them to me as a, as the entrepreneur, as the creator. Now you might be saying, well, well Brian, how do, how do you get rewarded? Like, how do I benefit from that? Well, I hold.

    [00:22:46] Brain: Over 50% of the coin. And the more people that hold the coin, the more the coin’s value goes up. Now, on top of the fact that I can transact in it, actually anyone can transact in it. So I had someone in my community that said, [00:23:00] Hey, I just brought some brand new LeBron James sneakers and I would love to trade them for a D H D coin because I wanna join that call.

    [00:23:09] Brain: But I don’t have a financial means. Well, they happen to be my size, but it could have been anyone. And I said, okay, I will send you a certain amount of a D H D coin. He sent me those sneakers. He’s now able to participate on the call and join. And the beauty of it is if he no longer wants to be a part of my community, he can actually sell those coins and move forward.

    [00:23:30] Brain: And so, like unlike what you know, like I, I think of it like from like a gym membership or even like your favorite online course, we’ve all bought online courses. We we’re about 30% complete and we’re like, you know what? I no longer need this, or I’ve changed, or I, my life is gone. The, the hardest part of that is you kind of felt like it’s a waste, right?

    [00:23:48] Brain: Like I bought it, it’s over, but what if you owned one of those limited seats or a certain amount of coin? Got you. That access, well, now there’s like that ownership exchange, which is that same ownership that exists in aee, [00:24:00] so the crater coins is, I would. There’s a few, there’s not many of us that have it.

    [00:24:04] Brain: Uh, one of the better use cases out there is Joe Peli, who’s kind of known as the godfather of content marketing. Um, he does it to where if you, if you share his newsletter, he’ll give you $20 of the coin for every person that signs up. And then if you have a hundred of his coin, You get free merchandise and you get access to an exclusive chat that he replies to on a regular basis.

    [00:24:28] Brain: For him, he’s using it as affiliate marketing, uh, play, but rather than just giving someone dollars that they can go spend somewhere, he’s giving them like investment into his brand, the tilt coin. And so those are like, to me, the tilt coin. It’s probably the best use case other than myself and, and Joe and I have worked together on kind of building our arenas, but these are the things that are moving forward.

    [00:24:48] Brain: And if it sounds a little foreign and complex, it is, but we are moving to a world where much like Patreon or membership sites seem very foreign for many years. Eventually [00:25:00] it’ll become the native piece that says, you know what? I wanna, I wanna be a part of the Sweet Life community. I wanna hold the sweet life coin and I want to, I wanna invest in what we’re building as a whole.

    [00:25:10] Brain: And the beauty of it for us as entrepreneurs is you don’t need thousands and thousands and thousands of people. It’s really just your core group of people that are allowing you, kind of explore and grow from, you know, your coin. That is so

    [00:25:21] April: fascinating and I, uh, great examples. Thank you for putting them in a way that helps for us to understand.

    [00:25:27] April: And I know that immediately our, our listeners are going, okay, well what do I currently have? What value am I creating? How well am I doing, bringing in community? Uh, and it’s really a good almost. Check for how we are as businesses saying are, are we continuing to create things that are community driven?

    [00:25:46] April: Are we, you know, crowdsourcing type of things that we’re doing? Are we caring about those people that did buy that course and that didn’t finish it? Cuz 98% of people don’t finish ’em anymore. And, you know, are we actually caring about [00:26:00] what’s happening with our content and making sure that our content and our teachings are, are actually being immersed into the world in a way where other people can.

    [00:26:09] April: Participate in it. Thank you for sharing your experience in this. And I also, I mean, that is exactly what you were saying. So it’s important, it’s important for our listeners to know that immediately people are like, oh my gosh, I wanna create my own thing. Right? But I don’t hold any coin. And I was even confused when you were saying, because I, like, I have my Coinbase wallet where like my, my Bitcoin and you know, my Ethereum and stuff is, but that’s not even what we’re talking about here.

    [00:26:35] April: Right. And so, So many different, I think that a glossary. Um, do you have a glossary of terms ?

    [00:26:42] Brain: I I have a podcast. One of the, one of the episodes that’s super popular is it’s 41 terms of web three that everyone should know. And I literally go through all 41 terms. There’s, there’s a YouTube video on it as well.

    [00:26:52] Brain: I’ll send you the link so you can put it, uh, in the show notes for anyone that wants cuz it trust me. Okay. The terms are as just as Confus like I worked in the government [00:27:00] and everything has an acronym and was confusing in terms and when I got in this space, I was. What is like, I was like, I need a wallet.

    [00:27:06] Brain: And then what’s the difference between a coin and a crypto and is it exchange the same thing as a, it, it, it blew my mind. So I did an entire episode, uh, you know, and I’ll give you that link so you guys can share that out as well.

    [00:27:18] April: Okay. For sure. So we’re gonna share that one, and then I’m also gonna share your very first, your very first, you know, n F T 365 podcast episode that you dropped.

    [00:27:26] April: I mean, li I, Sam, my youngest and I listened to it all the way, driving down from the mountains and we kept like hitting pause and then rewinding it and we’re like, wait, wait, wait. Let me hear that again. Let me hear it again. And by the time we got down the mountain, we totally understood the importance of our brand identity.

    [00:27:42] April: In these NFTs and it was, it was so cool and it was just so, it was just such a great way to understand and wrap our head around it. So yes, the glossary one, we’ll make sure all of you guys have it in the show notes. And just if you aren’t really sure where to start, then just start at the beginning and just go with Brian and [00:28:00] grow with Brian.

    [00:28:01] April: Um, thank you so, so, so much. And is that the best place for people to connect with you and follow what you’re doing here because you truly are a thought leader in this space. So how is the

    [00:28:10] Brain: best way. Twitter is like my, you know, my favorite. I’m active everywhere. So literally wherever your favorite platform is, they can find me.

    [00:28:16] Brain: Um, but, you know, I did, I have done a daily podcast now, 300 and today’s date, 346. So 346 days in a row out, missing a day. But that’s a lot of content, right? And so I always tell people, you know, starting at the beginning, I’ve purposely made it evergreen. I purpose. It’s not news heavy, it’s not crypto bro heavy.

    [00:28:33] Brain: It’s not like my goal is to t. What is going on? And so, you know, start at the beginning and then you can kind of pick and choose, like kind of going through the, the titles of the episodes. The podcast is in every platform. We also do it if you’re not like a, uh, if you wanna like learn with some visual represe.

    [00:28:50] Brain: Representation. Uh, we also have the YouTube, uh, as well that I do a video. Some of them I put like, you know, video with like, you know, a lot of instruction on the screen. Others, I just kind of [00:29:00] try to talk through things at, at, at that level. But yeah. Uh, NFT 365 is the, is the podcast and we’re counting down, we’re almost to a a year.

    [00:29:08] Brain: Uh, and that’s where the 365 came from is, uh, I. I blindly thought, well, what if I did a daily show and I didn’t think I could do it? But now we’re close to the finish line and, uh, I kind of proving myself wrong, but yeah, NFT 365 is the best place for sure.

    [00:29:21] April: Are you gonna stop on 360 6? So are you gonna take a day

    [00:29:25] Brain: off?

    [00:29:25] Brain: Off?

    [00:29:25] Brain: Off

    [00:29:26] Brain: So there will be an episode on day 360 6, but I, I am not continuing every day. The, the podcast will continue. We’ll have a couple episodes a week, kind of as we move into season two. Um, but yeah, I can never do, uh, it, it’s the, it’s the craziest, most exciting, most overwhelming, most sacrifice I’ve ever had to do for any content.

    [00:29:45] Brain: But, um, great. I, yeah, I’m very glad that, uh, season one will be coming to our finale Very.

    [00:29:51] April: Oh my gosh. Yeah. Yeah, I’m sure. I’m sure you did. You did more than what I’ve done in five years and in a year. It’s crazy. And I needed a year off from that. [00:30:00] Right. So I can only imagine. Thank you so much for creating all that though, because that’s where I learn and that, I mean, that’s where all of us learn is you forging the way and making it in a way that’s easier for us to understand.

    [00:30:10] April: Because you came from this space too. Like you have the ability to explain it to, you know, the, the knowledge, the. Economy as well and being in, you know, the, the, the, also like the government background and the speaker and the millennial stuff and you just have the ability to just bring it all the, be together and explain it in a way that actually makes sense to us.

    [00:30:30] April: And I appreciate you so much for that. Thank you so much for being back here on the show and we will be following along and tapping into all of your faucet of wisdom more and more. Thank you. I appreciate you.


    How To Personalize ChatGPT AI To Create Authentic Content To Grow Your Coaching Business – with April Beach and Amy Yamada (Episode 278)

    How To Personalize ChatGPT AI To Create Authentic Content To Grow Your Coaching Business - with April Beach and Amy Yamada



    This show is for established experts, coaches, consultants, authors, and speakers who want to learn more about how you can grow your business, streamline your marketing, speed up your content creation, and reach more clients using ChatGPT AI. ChatGPT and AI are quickly changing the world of content creation. From the way we create courses, to social media, to expert content, using AI is a powerful tool to save time and gain more eyes on your brand. In this episode, we’re diving in with Amy Yamada, ChatGPT expert on how to get started using AI in your business.
    In this episode, we cover the first 3 steps to customize ChatGPT to sound like your authentic voice including a bio-generator to train AI to know and sound like you, how to find your writing style, and the importance of using prompts to customize the software for your business.


    At the end of this episode, you will: 

    1. Know the first 3 steps to get started with ChatGPT
    2. Understand how to use ChatGPT to interview you so it gets to know you and generates authentic content
    3. How to use your AI authentic generated content to expand your use of ChatGPT and stream your content, course creation, and marketing copy faster. 
    Resources mentioned: 
    Download The Ultimate Guide To ChatCPT 
    Download The Ultimate Guide To Million Dollar Online Offers™
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:45] April: Hi you guys. Welcome to episode number 278 here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I’m April Beach, founder of the Sweet Life Company, host here on this. Sweetlife podcast, and we are known for delivering business trainings and coaching that you would [00:01:00] pay thousands for if you went to buy them somewhere else. If you and I have never met before, I’m an online business architect and an offer engineer, and I help experts, coaches, consultants, authors, and speakers scale your business past a million dollars by creating million dollar programs, courses, training programs, retreats, as well as content licensing and certification programs for high profit, deep impact lifestyle freedom.

    [00:01:26] April: So if you’re ready to level up your business and build your next level of your offer ecosystem and your million dollar genius programs, you are in the right place. And this episode is brought to you by our complete online guide. Two engineering million dollar online offers.

    [00:01:44] April: You can download the guide completely free by texting the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0, or simply by going to [00:02:00] Welcome to the show. This is part two. Like, I’m gonna whisper . We had an amazing episode last week with our guest, and so frankly, if you’re here and you’re dropping in and you didn’t listen to episode number 277, you should actually take a second and go listen to that because last week. On the show, we dove into all of the foundational very important things that coaches and consultants and service-based providers should know about using Chat G P T to scale your systems and create authentic content.

    [00:02:36] April: This part two, and I’m so excited about having our guest, Amy Yamada back here on the show. If you do not know Amy, she’s a seasons business coach who empowers established coaches to grow their business in a way that is fully aligned with their authenticity and their desired lifestyle. And she has been doing this for 11 years.

    [00:02:58] April: What makes Amy so [00:03:00] special besides all the other things that she does, is she has, she has this model, okay, you’re going to hear about this today. She has a method, a proven method. You know, we talk about creating proven methods all the time. Here on the podcast. Amy has one, and her proven method helps coaches and consultants really develop a brand of authentic.

    [00:03:20] April: That that is lives its fullest, right? What is interesting, what we’re talking about here in the show is she is turned that framework of hers into using artificial intelligence, which frankly, you and I both know, we don’t have to say it here. That’s one of our concerns about AI is how do you make it authentic?

    [00:03:39] April: How do you make it unique to you? How do you keep it in your voice? And those are all of the things that we are talking about here on today. So I’m gonna stop talking so we can get right to Amy. Again, thank you so much for being here. This is one of those great episodes we would really, really love for you to share.

    [00:03:56] April: We don’t have any advertising on here. I have refused advertisers for six [00:04:00] years on this show, frankly, cuz they annoy me when I’m listening to podcasts. But we really rely on you guys to up arrow and share this episode on LinkedIn and Instagram. Please tag Amy, tag me and use the hashtag Sweet Life podcast because this show. Is a game changer and it would really mean a lot to us if you took a second to share it. Okay, we’re gonna dive in episode number 278 with Amy Yamada. All about getting started in setting up chat G P T to be your authentic voice. Let’s dive in.

    [00:04:34] April: All right, you guys, we are back for part two. This is episode number 278. I wrote down 288 on my notes, so sorry if I confuse you guys in the last episode, but this is episode number 278 with my friend Amy Yamada, who is a ushering us into the world of AI content creation and using, uh, Chat GPT. And listen, guys, frankly, I’m so new to this, I [00:05:00] was calling it chat like G B T for at least three weeks, and one of my kids had to correct me.

    [00:05:05] April: So, um, if you’re like me and you are as new to this as I am, then you’re definitely in the right place. If you missed last week, All right, so last week’s show we talked with Amy about what is this tool, um, special use cases right now for coaches, consultants, and service-based experts, what to be ready for, uh, the importance of, of, as Amy says, bringing.

    [00:05:30] April: Um, the human voice into AI, but, so we do want you to go back and listen to last week’s show, but we’re just gonna do a little catch up here and I want my friend, Amy to introduce herself again and share with you about what we’re diving into here on this show. Yeah.

    [00:05:45] Amy: Thank you for having me back for this second episode. I’m super excited about today’s episode. Um, uh, as I mentioned last time, I’ve been a business coach for the past 11 years and my, the core elements of what I’ve taught over the last 11 years have been all. Your authentic [00:06:00] voice, deep connection, and really having a message that is from your heart to your ideal client’s heart.

    [00:06:05] Amy: So I’m just all about the human element of being a, uh, of being a coach, a mentor and expert influencer. And what, cause I would notice that even when humans were writing their own copy or creating their own content, I would look at it, I’m like, wait, like you’re not connecting deeply enough. So I always love to bring in this deep connection element, like bring in who you are.

    [00:06:23] Amy: So when AI came to be what it is today with all the rage on Chat G P T. I initially was resistant to it. I’m like, this is artificial, right? It’s like this little robot that has no heart about, hold on. What if I was open to this technology and brought in everything that I’ve been teaching for the last 11 years, and bring in the messaging, the authenticity, the humanizing elements into this tool, and my mind was literally blown over and over and over again, and still is to this day.

    [00:06:52] Amy: So I am taking a stand. Ironically, humanizing ai, bringing in our authentic voice and knowing how to use this tool so [00:07:00] that we’re optimizing the input. And for those of you haven’t used it yet, don’t worry, you’ll get there in order to get the most quality output from the tool. So I’m excited to dive in today.

    [00:07:10] April: Uh, I’m excited too. So, and, and this is so important because. Of be besides the obvious, uh, a use case for me is when, uh, the very first time I tried to use it, before I started learning from you, I think I plugged in something like write me, uh, an article on licensing content. Right. And it, I mean the, the quality, the information in there was good.

    [00:07:31] April: But it would never be in a voice I used. And I thought, I, I said, my people would immediately know that that was never me that wrote that. I would never say it that way. It, this is absolutely not gonna work. And so I stopped and I was like, I’m not using this thing, this thing that’s never gonna work for me because it’s clearly actually not me.

    [00:07:48] April: And, and then you came along and, and you were talking about No, no, no. I’m gonna actually show you how to use it and have it really truly become your authentic voice. And that’s what we’re diving [00:08:00] into to today. Yes. Which I’m so excited about . So you know, which is also why, you know, my kids can’t use it to write their school papers cuz they’re teachers would be like you.

    [00:08:09] April: I know you don’t know that word. You really don’t know that word, right? , you know, so, so let’s go ahead. Let’s talk about what we’re gonna talk about today. Today. It’s super exciting. We’re talking about getting started with chat G P T in the way that Amy helps you humanize it and make it sound like you.

    [00:08:28] April: And by the way, before we get started, you all listen to me here. Look at me. If you’re watching this video. Pause this for a second and go download the guide. Okay. So if you haven’t yet downloaded Amy’s ultimate Guide to Chat GPT, you’re gonna want it because it’s gonna be important to combine what we’re learning about today with that guide, and it’s just gonna explode your results with this.

    [00:08:50] April: So you can text ChatGPT to 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0 or you guys can go to [00:09:00] where the show notes are for the slash 278, and you can download it right there. And it’s, believe me, it’s worth your time to pause us and then come back to us. So let’s imagine you just did that. All right, carry on, Amy. Let’s talk about W what are, how do we get started with this? You know where you’re in there and you’re looking at this prompt. I, it’s just like, and I, you know, it’s kind of this blank, what do I do now?

    [00:09:24] Amy: And that’s, that’s, that’s how I initially used it. I think that’s how most people initially used it. They put in some like, quick prompt and then what it, what it creates is like not us at all, and truly sounds like a robot because it is. And, uh, and so one, once I got really deep into this, I, I really thought about, okay, how can we make sure that it sounds like us? And so, just like anything in life, what you get out of it is truly what you put into it.

    [00:09:51] Amy: It’s a reflection, it’s a direct re reflection. And so ultimately, uh, I designed what I call the Heart speech model. And that’s all [00:10:00] outlined in the ultimate guide to Chat GPT for online coaches, which all of you now have access to. And um, and so I’m not gonna go into the all of it cuz we would need like a full day, but I’m gonna give you the highlight reel of what I consider the most important elements, uh, three elements that I’m gonna go through. So,

    [00:10:14] April: yeah, and it is important. So if you guys, if please, if you have the guide, make sure you have it handy. Otherwise, just pause and take notes while Amy’s taking you through this, because this is, this is direct implementation. Yes.

    [00:10:26] Amy: Yes. So, so the the, what we really wanna do is have ChatGPT get to know you. Okay. And you know what’s funny? When, when you were talking about even having a hard time, like saying Chat GPT or saying it, Uh, when I was doing a little voice transcription, I said it so quickly that the way it was transcribed was Chachi Petite . So ever since then, my community and I have nicknamed Chat GPT, Chachi

    [00:10:53] April: That’s why I’ve heard you say that. I like why they come up with it. That’s awesome.

    [00:10:57] Amy: Yeah. And so now I think of ch actually, [00:11:00] I, I think there’s like a deeper meaning. I would say there’s a deep meaning to. I’m like, oh, maybe I, it accidentally happened that way so I could already humanize this thing. So it has a name, right?

    [00:11:09] Amy: And so I like to lovely call it Chachi. And I imagine this cute little robot that sits on my desk and it’s like, and it has a little heart. It’s so cute. So Chachi, so hear me say Chachi. It’s ChatGPT, it’s the same thing. Um, so the first thing we wanna do is have Chachi get to know you. And one way that it can get to know you is to have interview.

    [00:11:28] Amy: So there is a section of the guide that’s called the bio generator where it’s going to write your bio and there’s a specific prompt in the guide where you are telling Chat GPT, Chachi, that you are an expert interviewer. I don’t have it in front of me, but it’s basically saying interview. Interview me with one question at a time about my business until you have enough information to write a Forbes profile on me like a Forbes level profile.

    [00:11:55] April: Yeah. So you’re basically sitting there telling Chachi that he or [00:12:00] she or it or whatever you all want your Chachi to be. Yep. Um, is, is is an expert interviewer. Yep. And then asking him to interview you. That’s right. Or to interview you. Fascinating.

    [00:12:11] Amy: Exactly. Mm-hmm. , and think of it this way, if you were to work with a human copywriter, for example, right? Yeah. If you, if I said to a co, like if I say I had a copywriter, Her name was Lisa, and I said, okay, Lisa, you’re my new copywriter. Um, I have a workshop coming up. Write some copy about it. I’ll see you later. She’d be like, hold up, . Right, right. Like, I don’t know you. Right. So a great copywriter would sit down with me like at least initially to interview me, get to know me, get to know my voice, my tone, my style, my point of view.

    [00:12:41] Amy: What, who am I, what’s my story, right? She would get to know me. And then she’d wanna know more specifically about the workshop and what is it about, what are we, what are the benefits to the audience? Who is the audience, right? So all these elements like you, you can also do with with Chachi. So the first thing I, I would have it do is just go to the bio generator [00:13:00] section.

    [00:13:00] Amy: You’ll see the exact prompt that you can then put into chat G P T, so it can interview one question at a time and you just answer it. You don’t have to be the nice thing, okay? The nice thing is you do not need to be polished in your. It is not here to judge you. It’s here to support you. So just be messy with it, right?

    [00:13:17] Amy: Just answer the questions to your best of your ability, and then as soon as it has, usually it’s like seven questions or so that you answer, and then it’s, I’ll say, thank you for answering my questions. Um, here is your bio, and boom, it’ll write a bio based on your answers to it. Now, the bio itself may not be in your voice, and that’s.

    [00:13:36] Amy: It’s just one element for chat PT to get to know you. It might be a little bit more too, like too formal or bland or whatever, but it will have like the essence of like who you are, what you’re about, how you got to be in business, right? So that’s, that’s one of the steps for chat PT to get to know you, have it, interview you.

    [00:13:53] April: Mm. Okay. So, and, and I was always wondering why you led with that first, cuz I’ve heard you say that [00:14:00] before and now it completely makes sense. Mm-hmm. , so the tool itself remembers the user. So let’s talk about that a little bit and about how that works for people that might not be familiar with that.

    [00:14:11] Amy: Yeah, totally. So, um, well it, it remembers you. If you’re using the same chat, so this will make sense for those of you who are using it. And if you have it, just you know how it is. Like anything else, it’s once you start playing with it, you’ll get to know it better. But on the left column, you’ll start to see, anytime you start a new chat, it’ll create its own title of that chat.

    [00:14:32] Amy: So if you have put your bio in a chat, then it’ll remember you. Otherwise, I would say save it, like copy and paste it into another document. We actually have created a tool called the Prompt Generator. There’s one section of it, one tab of it, that’s called personalized, and it’s where you create what I call your authenticity assets.

    [00:14:50] Amy: So your bio, your VO here are the four assets. Your bio, your voice, which is your writing style. Mm-hmm. , your target audience, and then your products, [00:15:00] which could be whether they’re free offers or paid offers. So once, once you save these different elements that I call your authenticity assets. Now we’ve also added this, the heart speech to that section as well.

    [00:15:11] Amy: I’ll get into that. But now you’ve got this, this great place. Whether or not you have the prompt generator, it’s not the point. But if you have one document that you paste, like copy and paste from, Chat GPT into this document that has starting off with your bio, then you can bring it into any prompt that you do when needed.

    [00:15:28] April: Wow. Wow. And so it’s already there in the way you’ve set this up, the way you’re guiding like a self, like I said, myself and my team to go through this and, and guys we’re learning at this, and I’m nowhere as far a advance in, into this as I wish that I was at the recording of this. Um, usually when we drop this, I will be though promising you and promising me, um, that we will be further into this practice.

    [00:15:49] April: Okay? So that fir the bio generator is really important. So once we have the bio generator and you have. Set up then you talked about, uh, [00:16:00] finding the, the writing style, like finding that actual writing style that is ours. What, what does that look like? What’s that step two?

    [00:16:07] Amy: Yeah, totally. So that, that section is called, uh, finding your Voice, which is identifying your writing style. So this is where, again, in the guide, there’s a specific prompt. and what you’re gonna tell Chachi, again, you’re, you’re telling Chachi who it is, right? Saying, okay, you are an expert writing style analyzer. Right? And then, and then you can tell it using the sample below. Describe my writing style, something like that, right?

    [00:16:33] Amy: And so what you do is you put in this prompt and then you, you copy and paste something you’ve written that sounds like you, right? So whether it’s an email, a blog, a social media post, something that you’ve written that sounds like you. So you put in this, this prompt plus. This writing sample, and then you push enter, and then it’ll, it’ll then re respond to you saying your writing style is, uh, has enthusiasm and, and is very personable and you use, it writes a little paragraph [00:17:00] that summarizes your writing style based on what you’ve shared.

    [00:17:04] Amy: Got it. Fabulous. It’s been fabulous. Like it’s plus don’t we all like learning about ourselves, it’s kinda like, right, what’s my horoscope today? Right? It’s like, you know, like, you know when you see those little quizzes on

    [00:17:13] April: like, I was gonna say, that’s we’re all addicted to the Facebook quizzes.

    [00:17:16] Amy: Click bait

    [00:17:17] April: wait, what friend’s character am I?

    [00:17:20] Amy: Exactly right.

    [00:17:22] April: This is so cool. I mean, come on you guys, this is so cool. And, and let me remind you when she says in the. That’s the guide that she’s giving you for free with this episode, . So let see how important it is for you to have that, um, at least have access to it. And then you can listen to this episode again with the guide by your side.

    [00:17:40] April: Uh, so very, very important. Okay? So it knows. Who we are. Yeah. It knows our, our bio at this point. Yeah. It knows what our, our writing style that, that authentic voice. Uh, so that, you know, I, I won’t put out content that my audience knows. Certainly did not come from me. Right. And then what is that third [00:18:00] important step that you wanna bring us through today? Yeah. To help our listeners get set up.

    [00:18:03] Amy: Yeah. This is my favorite part, . Selfishly, it’s the heart speech, so, This to me is the juice. This is my secret sauce that I’m so excited to share with. , which is to truly bring your heart into Chat GPT. And the way that that I came up with this was something that I’ve done with my clients for years, which is when whenever I’d say, well, tell me what it is that you do, they would give me their like elevator pitch version that was so bland and not their heart, right?

    [00:18:35] Amy: And so I’d say, okay, let’s just set aside marketing and messaging and sales and scale. Let’s just set aside all that stuff. And from one human to another, I would take them through an exercise and close your eyes. drop into your heart, like really connected on an intimate level and think about what do you really wanna say about this topic?

    [00:18:54] Amy: If your, if your soul could speak, if your, the deepest part of your being could speak and share your point of [00:19:00] view about this topic. What do you really wanna say without editing yourself? And I mean, there have been moments when I, myself, have been brought to tears to hear what someone’s true, authentic voice is.

    [00:19:12] Amy: And so now the way we brought it into AI ChatGPT is. Transcribing your voice. Now there are extensions you can use online, but just to keep it super simple, I just have used either the notes section on my phone or Otter, you know, the app Otter that transcribes what you say. And so I just always recommend, I’m like, just connect in like, and it can feel in so what you’re by yourself, whatever connecting like.

    [00:19:36] Amy: Just say like, start recording. What I really wanna say is, and just go there and think about what’s a topic that is relevant to what you’re doing. So for example, with me, I’m speaking into humanizing AI authenticity, deep connection ChatGPT. So I can easily go there, right? Drop in. Like, you know what I really wanna say is I am such a stand for your authentic voice and being who you are and bringing your [00:20:00] gift into the world and the way to use this tool.

    [00:20:02] Amy: And I go on and on, right? And say my truth without editing myself. Then you’ve got the transcription copy and paste it into Chat GPT and then give it ano a prompt of what you want it to do with it. Right? So I can say, write a social media post about my upcoming workshop using my voice. That

    [00:20:22] April: is that to me, and it remembers that. Like, I mean, this is mind blowing. Okay. . I don’t, I wanna make sure our listeners picked up on something. Yeah. This is Amy’s method. This is her Heart Speech Method. This is her proprietary method that she’s used with her clients for years. Yeah. To go deeper, to have them step into the leadership that they have in their spaces.

    [00:20:43] April: So what she’s taught, and she has figured out how to put this into ChatGPT guys, this is, this is not something she just came up with. This is something that’s proven. That has been used in coaching and consulting businesses that has catapulted businesses that you know Amy is [00:21:00] known for, and she has now created that framework to bring into this, which is exactly what all of us want, which is exactly what all of us need in order to actually keep using it and or even try to use it because there is that fear.

    [00:21:16] April: Of us being, you know, like thinking that’s, everybody knows it’s not gonna be me or I don’t really wanna fall into AI. I love, I love writing my own stuff. Well, you are. Yeah. And I just, I see. I just, this is so powerful. So. Let me understand this because I haven’t gotten this far yet, admittedly. Yep. In your, in your, in your program. That, that I’m super excited to be in. So when I do this, when I insert this, it actually saves that like as a file, like my authentic voice is how does that, what’s the text side of it? Yes. Help me understand this.

    [00:21:50] Amy: Yes. So the tech side of it is, it, it will save it in a chat that you’ve already done. So you can pull up an old chat that has it. What I [00:22:00] recommend is to also have it in a separate document outside of Chat G P T. So again, in our program we have the prompt generator and we have a tab for it. But even if you don’t have the program, you can just have a Google doc, have some doc right where you save it just so you have one place you’re not having to dig through.

    [00:22:16] Amy: I’m sure as it evolves you’ll be able to just do a quick search for it and the, you know, and I know there’s other AI platforms, Jasper and whatnot, but for now, to keep it simple, I would say just have another doc that you. These elements also, uh, I know we’re, we’re focusing on these three, but there’s of course the ideal client avatar.

    [00:22:33] Amy: You know, so you’re identifying that as well. But once you have your authenticity assets saved, then you can pull it into a new chat, pull whatever part of your authenticity assets into a new chat and just, and then tell it what you want it to do for you. Yep. Oh, I can’t hear you. Are you muted for

    [00:22:50] April: a second? Yes. Uhhuh. . Yeah, I was. I was, my dogs were barking. Oh my God, this is great. Uh, my little chihuahua, he wants to do, he wants to do chat. I wonder what his voice would be.[00:23:00]

    [00:23:03] Amy: at this, this AI round table that I was at recently, there has been ai, like these people are like, again, these are genius. There is AI that has, has been able to understand the language of bees and bats. What, so what, what’s doing is it’s because there’s patterns that they notice in the language. Like, so for bees, for example, I was like, are you kidding me right now? That sounds fake, but he’s like, no. They notice the patterns and what, what bees often say to each other are stop or shush.

    [00:23:37] April: That is, yes.

    [00:23:38] Amy: Bizarre. And then with bats, bats have, um, baby talk, like when they’re talking to the baby bat and they have names for each other. I was like, this, this has to be like, I’m pretty gullible. But like, no, cuz it’s, and it makes sense. It’s noticing patterns. And the renewable conversation about whales and patterns with the whale community..

    [00:23:54] April: I, I know I was thinking dolphins, dolphin. I can’t wait to understand. You know, I, I think there might be some of that already. I mean, this [00:24:00] is, this is amazing. Well, my chihuahua is saying that I want treats, or you have to get off this podcast cuz I have to go outside and go. Totally is saying right now, just keeping it real here.

    [00:24:12] April: Uh, so this, this is, this is just mind blowing. I mean, the whole entire idea. Um, as, as a content creator for me, I, I love creating content, but I’m not fast at it. It’s never been something that has been speedy for me. I can’t just sit down and, you know, type out some stuff unless I’m really in flow state and I really have something to say and I’m really fired up about it.

    [00:24:38] April: Right. It, it’s not very common, but yet content like here on the show and everything that we do is. Is the centerpiece of what we do as a company. And so being able to learn how to use this tool to create it authentically for, for my voice and for what our clients really connect with. And then our, [00:25:00] our established area of expertise is I can’t wait.

    [00:25:02] April: Uh, and I know that our listeners can’t either, and that’s why they are here listening to this episode. Um, so let’s talk about next steps. If you guys haven’t downloaded the tool, make sure that you do that. Again you can text Chat GPT to 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0. You can go to the show notes for this episode at, and you also can go to Amy’s website because I think it’s really important.

    [00:25:34] April: One thing that we know is that, frankly, what we’re talking about here on this show, uh, Is going to change drastically in the next couple of months. So I want you guys to be following along with Amy. So as we continue to evolve into this and there’s more use cases and mu you know, more streamlined processes, I know Amy and her team are gonna be on top of that. So how can, uh, how can people follow you and make [00:26:00] sure they’re connecting with you? Yeah,

    [00:26:01] Amy: so just very simply, just go to and every social media platform that I’m on is just my name. So if you just look me up at Amy Yamada on your favorite platform, it’s likely that I’m there . So, perfect. There’s anything that I dunno about, but . Yeah.

    [00:26:14] April: So perfect. Uh, and then I will also say, you know, I, I invested my team and I invested in Amy into her program to, to help us utilize this and we’ll make sure. The, the links to actually join Amy in her programs to accelerate your teams. It’s really what it is.

    [00:26:30] April: It’s an acceleration into this in the most wonderful way. Um, we’ll be in our show notes as well and we’ll make sure that that information is provided for you guys too, and certainly an investment that I was really excited to make. So, I think it, I think it’s good for all of us. Amy, thank you so much for being on the show.

    [00:26:45] April: If you’re watching on YouTube, she has this beautiful Puget Sound Ocean behind her.

    [00:26:51] Amy: It’s actually a nice day, day in Seattle. So ,

    [00:26:53] April: it’s a beautiful day in Seattle. Yeah, I know. It’s . It’s probably rare. This it [00:27:00]

    [00:27:00] Amy: Sunshine .

    [00:27:02] April: All right. Well you guys, thank you for hanging out. Please share this episode with your friends. Um, tag Amy in this. If you share this, make sure you tag Amy. You can use the hashtag Suite Life podcast to expand the reach of this as well. And we really appreciate your help getting this information out. Have a great day. Thank you so much.



    Getting Started with ChatGPT AI To Scale Your Coaching Business- with April Beach and Amy Yamada (Episode 277)

    Getting Started with ChatGPT AI To Scale Your Coaching Business- with April Beach and Amy Yamada



    This show is for established experts, coaches, consultants, authors, and speakers who want to learn more about how you can grow your business, streamline your marketing, speed up your content creation and reach more clients using ChatGPT AI.
    ChatGPT and AI are quickly changing the world of content creation. From the way we create courses, to social media, to expert content, using AI is a powerful tool to save time and gain more eyes on your brand. In this episode, we’re diving in with Amy Yamada, ChatGPT expert on how to get started using AI in your business.
    In this episode we cover what AI content creation is, use cases for ChatGPT AI, considerations for use in your business, and the future of AI in terms of ethical content creation and the concern for fake coaches and untrained professionals using AI to market. 


    At the end of this episode, you will: 

    1. Understand ChatGPT use cases 
    2. Understand what AI content creation is
    3. Know how you may want to start leveraging ChatGPT or similar AI in your business now
    Resources mentioned: 
    Download The Ultimate Guide To ChatCPT 
    Download The Ultimate Guide To Million Dollar Online Offers™
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:



    [00:00:45] April: Hi everybody. Welcome to episode number 277. This is the Next Generation of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast, and you are in the right place if you’re interested in knowing how to use AI to create content and scale your [00:01:00] business. This particular episode is brought to you by the Ultimate Guide to Building Million Dollar Online offers, which is a huge 20 page guide that downloads every single online offer and how to customize it for your business to scale your business in profit past a million dollars. It’s an amazing tool. If you have not grabbed it yet, go to, or you can simply text the word guide to the number 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 8 8 0 and download this incredible tool. If you’re new here to the show. We don’t have any commercials. We dive right into the business training and the coaching that we have delivered here for now six years, and we are very, very glad that you are here. I’m April Beach. I’m the founder of the Sweet Life Company.

    [00:01:50] April: I’ve been a business coach and strategist for 27 years, and I am an offer engineer and a business architect, which means I help coaches, consultants, expert [00:02:00] speakers, and authors, scale their business by creating million dollar programs, courses, trainings, license programs, certification programs, and an offer ecosystem that gives you the life that you want. If you’d like to apply to work with us, you can do so by visiting sweet life

    [00:02:18] April: Okay, let’s dive into what you can expect from today’s show. So we’re talking all about ChatGPT let me give you a little behind the scenes. I’ve heard about this from my kids. You know, maybe you heard about from your kids too. That really wanted to use ChatGPT for school and then of course that was just, just nix right away as technically it should be. But you may have heard about using chat G P T or Jasper or another chat tool for a while and you know it’s coming, but you don’t actually know how to dive into it or what to do with it.

    [00:02:51] April: Well, that was a place that I was at. And finally, about a month ago, I dove in with our guest today, Amy Yamada. You are gonna absolutely love [00:03:00] her, and started exploring the world of AI. So in this episode, we are opening up to the, the beginnings of this. So we wanna make sure we’re having a great foundational entry point.

    [00:03:11] April: In this show, it’s an excellent episode for those of you guys who have an established business and you’re scaling. Okay? So we want to streamline your systems. You’re, you’re good at what you do, you’re a coach, you’re a consultant. You’re already very good at what you do, and we wanna utilize AI tools to help streamline your systems.

    [00:03:27] April: This episode is for you. We’re gonna dive into what chat G P T is, use cases for chat, G P T. And even the futures. I asked Amy about the futures and what we need to be ready for as an industry. We, in this show, at the end of this show, you are going to understand how you can use it in your business. You are going to definitely know whether or not now is the time for you to dive into using Chat GPT in your business, and you’re gonna hear some really powerful use cases on how other coaches and [00:04:00] consultants are using this.

    [00:04:02] April: If you don’t know Amy, she is absolutely a gem. She’s been a business coach for 11 years, as you’ll hear in her gold that she brings, is teaching entrepreneurs how to find their authentic voice. And so that’s why this is so special when we’re talking about using artificial intelligence with finding your authentic voice because n nobody actually could teach this, I think, as well as Amy, because that’s really her mission. And you also get to hear about that here. Uh, with years of experience in the industry and a reputation for excellence, Amy is a highly sought after coach known for her ability to help our clients achieve their fullest potential and live the life that they truly desire.

    [00:04:41] April: And so all of the show notes can be found by visiting, including. And let me pause here. This is not like a hiccup in the recording, including the tool, the actual ultimate guide for using [00:05:00] chat GPT that Amy is giving you with this episode. And frankly, you need to grab it to utilize these, this episode

    [00:05:08] April: I usually don’t tell you guys what to do. Uh, I usually say, oh, and it’s your choice, you know, but if you’re gonna take the time to invest and listen to this episode, uh, and in future episodes on this, You’d be doing yourself a disservice if you didn’t download this guide, so that can be found in the show notes by visiting sweet life 2 77, and let’s go ahead and dive in with Amy right now.

    [00:05:31] April: All right, you guys, I’m so glad that you’re here with us. This is episode number 277. And my friend Amy Yamada, is here and we are diving into probably the hottest topic. Actually, I was just telling Amy before we started recording that we literally moved around our content calendar here for this podcast so that we could talk to Amy about what we’re talking about here on this show.

    [00:05:55] April: So it’s really, really important. We’re so glad you guys are here joining [00:06:00] us today. So, Amy, You and I, we actually met joining a mastermind. I think we actually joined a mastermind at the same time, in the same month. A couple years ago. Yeah. But since then I’ve been paying attention and I’ve been following everything you’re doing and you’re leading with the one and only Chat G P T. Welcome to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast. We’re so glad that you’re here. Tell everybody a little bit about yourself, your business, what you do, and then we’re gonna dive into this very, very hot topic.

    [00:06:28] Amy: Yeah, definitely. Thanks for having me. And you know, it’s so funny. Had we been talking just a few months ago, I would not be talking about Chat GPT. Right. Like I, this wasn’t even right. I mean, I, of course, I’d been hearing about AI, AI’s coming, the future’s coming, and I was just, you know, doing my own thing with my business, coaching business and, uh, really focusing on, on helping entrepreneurs, primarily coaches, established coaches and, and, uh, scaling their businesses and focusing on VIP days, lifestyle experiences, destination retreats, cuz I love all that in-person, deeply connected [00:07:00] stuff, right?

    [00:07:00] Amy: It just lights me up and um, and then here comes AI. And, and I was looking at it, I was like, wow. My, honestly, my initial, uh, feeling was resistance, right? I was like, I don’t know about this thing, because even AI right, artificial right artificial intelligence, like this feels fake and I’m all about authenticity and being real.

    [00:07:18] Amy: And so I was like, I don’t know about this. And I, I started to play with it and I just was like, ah, like this isn’t really doing it for me. But then I thought, okay, I’m gonna be open to. And I’m gonna bring in all of my, my passion around messaging, deep connection and really being your authentic self with everything you do and see how I can use it with this tool.

    [00:07:35] Amy: And everything changed. So , so I’ve been, uh, doing this, you know, business coaching for the last 11 years. I wouldn’t change it for anything. I love speaking and coaching and. And really at the end of the day, I love connecting with awesome people, finding out what their true gift is and making sure they’re getting it out into the world and, and having fun with, with it along the way. So…

    [00:07:54] April: uh, well, I think that’s so important that you said that because, and you’re, and you’re so good at what you do, [00:08:00] and then, that is why, that actually is one of the reasons why it makes you the perfect person to talk about and actually teach AI and AI content creation because you are known for helping people find their authentic voice.

    [00:08:14] April: And then you do exactly like I said, and then you look at something that is, that is artificial, uh, you know, software out there that is frankly, smart enough that it passed the bar exam for heaven’s sakes, you know, . Um, and, and, and how, and how do, how do we do that? How do we make it ours. And you know, a bigger question, which we probably should not dive into first, cuz it’ll just crash the whole entire episode.

    [00:08:36] April: But the bigger question is, is how do we differentiate between now you know, businesses that actually are established are expert businesses and those that aren’t. That are tapping into ChatGPT in other sort of software to create content that they frankly, actually aren’t even qualified to teach themselves.

    [00:08:54] April: There’s a whole, there’s a lot of ethical things around that. I mean, see what I mean? I’m like, we can crash this whole entire episode right now, [00:09:00] just going down that road. But let, let’s kind of talk about the basics. Let’s do an introduction to ChatGPT um, talk to us about like, first of all, explain to our audience. What is this thing?

    [00:09:11] Amy: What is it? Yeah, what is it? Uh, the, the, the, the most simplified version I can say is that it is a tool , like, just think of it as this emerging revolutionary technology. It is a tool that you can use in your business, in your life to streamline and simplify things. So technically it’s a, a type of artificial intelligence, you know, AI system.

    [00:09:35] Amy: Uh, if you look up the definition, you’ll see things like it’s a language model. What does this mean? So the, the way that I like to think of it is, This is a tool that all of us have access to. There still is a free version now. There’s a paid version for $20 a month. And it is, it is the wave of the future. I mean, it really is. And it’s here and it’s now, and I haven’t seen something as revolutionary as this since the invention [00:10:00] of our cell phones and then smartphones. Right. And before that, the internet. So it’s not some flash in the pan like buzzword, you know, that’s just like here temporarily. Like there will be early adopters and there’ll be late adopters and there might be someone like my friend’s dad who just decided I’m never getting a cell phone.

    [00:10:16] Amy: Right. , that’s very rare. . Right, right. Just like refused. Yeah. So anyway, but my point is, This is something that I, I truly can already see how it is changing the world, and it’s not here to overwhelm you. It’s a tool, just like the internet was probably overwhelming. I mean, it’s so hard, hard to remember what it was like without it, but I, I am dating myself, of course.

    [00:10:37] Amy: Right? I, I’ve been here. I remember. Yeah, I remember. I remember when email, when I first had an email, like I was in college and I was like, what is this email thing? Like, what? Right. , it’s just one another, another tool that we all have access to. And it’s incredible that now can do so much for you. And it’s beyond like using Google, right? It’s, it’s beyond that. So it’s, [00:11:00] it’s an AI tool that is designed to understand and generate or, and to understand, generate natural language. And then we’ll get into what that means. Yeah, yeah,

    [00:11:08] April: yeah. Okay. So a absolutely, and, and I agree with that. And, you know, we actually own multiple businesses and we do a, we do a lot with AI and, um, data kind of farming in, in one of our other companies. And it was really interesting because when I mentioned this to my kids in college and my kids on high school, they’re like, just a couple months ago, like you, they’re like, oh, yeah, yeah, we know about that. We’re not allowed to use that. It’s really, it’s really what they. Um, but it, it is interesting. I mean, these, these things have been slowly merging.

    [00:11:39] April: AI has been slowly coming, well, I can’t say slowly, it’s probably really fast, but, uh, you know, people like me have just really come to notice it. Um, and, and it is this wave that has definitely dropped into. Um, especially the coaching and consulting space. Just this week since we booked this show and Amy’s coming in to [00:12:00] work with our clients next week, you guys, and our intensive, I’m so excited about this, but since, since we actually plan this show, you know, I saw something, Kajabi has an AI thing and Discord has an AI thing, and you know, there’s all these, there’s all these things that are, that are happening, and so I’m like, okay.

    [00:12:16] April: I need to understand this. My team needs to understand us. We’re actually in one of your programs right now learning how to understand this. Mm-hmm. , but it is something that, you’re right, it is here to stay and it’s going to change the way that we do business. Mm-hmm. and change the way that we create content. So let’s actually go to that. Um, how, how are people using this tool? What, what are a couple of the, the use cases for ChatGPT

    [00:12:40] Amy: Yeah. Great question. One way that people are using it, especially in the coaching and consulting world, is for content creation. So think email, copywriting, social media posts, um, it can create like an outline of your workshop or if you wanna create a workbook for your workshop or worksheets for your workshop.

    [00:12:56] Amy: So it’s, it’s content creation. So [00:13:00] imagine going in, like, I know there’s people that are tuning in that have been using it, some that haven’t. So whether you’ve been using it or not using it, it’s all good. Just imagine being able to go onto a web page. And to type in and say, you know, I am a business coach and my ideal clients are established coaches, consultant, speakers, experts, and I am teaching them ChatGPT..

    [00:13:20] Amy: Uh, create an outline of a workshop that is about how to use ChatGPT to sound like your authentic voice. And boom, within seconds it will create a workshop outline that I can use and I can, of course, I can give it more in the initial prompt of what I want. So it’s, it’s more authentically me, but what it has access to is 175 billion parameters a database.

    [00:13:45] Amy: Billion with a B, right? 175 billion. And it’s, I mean, just imagine how, how resourceful this tool is to be able to bring in like what is going to be best for you and your ideal client for the outline of this workshop. Now [00:14:00] you can of course use and not use whatever you decide cuz I’m, the piece that is missing is authenticity, right?

    [00:14:06] Amy: The emotional right human element of it. And that’s where I come in with my heart speech model. But just imagine being able to use this tool if you haven’t used it yet, and say, Hey, I want this thing. And within seconds it creates it for you. Or then say, oh, now I would like for you to write a promotional email or a series of promotional emails for me leading up to this workshop.

    [00:14:24] Amy: Boom, it’ll create it for you. And then you give, if you give it more specifics in your prompts, it’ll be more aligned with your authentic voice. The, the, the list goes on. Blogs, people have used it even to write books. Um, it won’t write a book immediately for you, but it will, you know, if you say write a table of contents on this topic, it can do that. So there’s, it just is endless. But these are some initial ways that they can use it when it comes to content creation.

    [00:14:49] April: Yeah. Yeah. And again, I was just, um, getting ready to dive into something that Angela Laurie was doing about chat with book writing. Yeah. And I just wanna immerse myself in all of this. I [00:15:00] mean, because exactly like you said, and especially those of us that have been creating programs and trainings for decades, there are, these things took us months.

    [00:15:09] April: I mean, they’ve taken us forever to actually generate content. As a matter of fact, I just heard a statistic that it takes. I wanna, I’m sure I’m gonna butcher it, but it, you’ll get the point. It’s like 36 hours of work to generate. 20 minutes of teaching in a slide. You know, for, for us in the past it was just a statistic.

    [00:15:33] April: This, this company dropped it. Uh, and, and I was thinking, oh my gosh, this, but not anymore. Not anymore. This is, this is not the, not anymore. This is actually, this is actually not the case anymore. So, um, it’s certainly. , of course, my interest level being an offer engineer is it’s going to streamline the way that we’re teaching the world to engineer transformational offers and programs.

    [00:15:53] April: And so I’m very interested in, in, in hearing more about this and obviously diving in with your leadership and, and [00:16:00] having my team dive in as well, so, Now let’s talk about what do you think that those are amazing use cases. I’m sure everybody already is like, oh my gosh, how, how do I actually do this? How do I, and we’re gonna tell you guys how you can start with Amy and she has this amazing ultimate guide to get started that we’re gonna share with you guys.

    [00:16:17] April: So, um, what do you think that we. as entrepreneurs, as content creators, as thought leaders, what do you think we need to be ready for in the future? Now that we have AI tools like this? Yeah. Coming in and helping us, but maybe there is some little bit of competition with that as well.

    [00:16:36] April: For

    [00:16:36] Amy: sure. Just the sheer volume of content that’s going to be shared is going to to grow. I don’t have the statistics in front of me. Because people will have access to the efficiency and resourcefulness of this tool and be able to write content with within seconds, um, and repurpose it there. I mean, there’s so much you can do. So the volume of content is going to be [00:17:00] significantly increased to what it is now.

    [00:17:02] Amy: And recently I was, um, sitting at a, a round table, intimate circle of round table. Like people who are, who’ve been deep in AI way longer than I have. I mean, these, these men, I was the only woman there by the way. That was an interesting thing. I was like, yes, women in tech. Right? And so, but I was like, I can sit at this table.

    [00:17:19] Amy: And the thing that one of them shared was that, um, there is this statistic that says that in the near future, 90% of content that is out there will be AI generat. And so of course that can bring up something for all of us. Yeah. It’s like, well, what does that mean? And it, from my point of view, I, I know that there will be these elements that are like this content that is completely generated by ai.

    [00:17:44] Amy: And, and the, the, the negative side can be about uh, whether like there might be people that become fake experts. You know? Like I remember having a client of mine who just for fun, she tested, couldn’t write a book for me on this type of medical procedure. And she’s not even in the [00:18:00] medical world, but she was curious about right.

    [00:18:01] Amy: A friend that was dealing with this health issue. and she had to write a table of content. She’s like, okay, now tell me more about chapter one and chapter two and chapter. And sure enough, ul ultimately, kinda like what Angela, Laurie, I’m sure is speaking to, but with integrity, right? , um, it was able to like spit out ultimately a book that if my client Nancy decided, Hey, I’m gonna call myself Dr. Nancy, right? So there may be some, you know, some fake experts out there because, and it’s not that the content isn’t real, but who it’s coming from is not. There, there’s gonna be some of there. I’m sure there’ll be some of that. Um, and also like from my heart, the part that hurts my heart is that the piece that is most valuable from my point of view is the human being element.

    [00:18:43] Amy: So I am personally taking a sand for ironically, Humanizing AI and bringing in your authentic voice into it. I’ve been teaching authenticity and your authentic voice for over a decade, with your message, with your marketing, like being who you actually are, especially in the coaching and consulting [00:19:00] industry. Um, so that it we’re in a relationship based industry. So what’s most important Relationship? It’s trust, it’s honesty, it’s love, it’s compassion. Being real. And so this is the piece that I’m like, I want to help as many people that also care about authenticity to bring this into it. So, uh, so it is the, the world is changing.

    [00:19:21] Amy: I mean, not just in our industry, like truly the world. I mean, even, even like, Um, speeches are being written by AI, right? There’s, there’s so much, right? So it is something to, to keep an eye on, but I, I think that, you know, we’re standing for the good guys, right? The good guys who are gonna bring the authentic voice into it. They’re not saying, oh, the robots are taking over. It’s like, no. It’s a tool that we get to use just like we use the internet. So,

    [00:19:42] April: yeah. And, and I’m just taking notes as you’re saying this and, and humanizing AI and. That’s exactly why I wanted you on the show, and that’s exactly why I’m following your lead in this. And, and I’ve paid to have my team and, you know, learn how to use this. Yeah. And so this actually brings me [00:20:00] to, um, something else that I didn’t prepare you, I was gonna ask you, but That’s okay. Uh, but I, but I’m, but I’m sure you can answer it, or at least as, as much as you can project yet.

    [00:20:11] April: We talk about scaling companies, right? But you and I both do that. We teach coaches and consultants how to scale and a lot, a big part of that is our systems, our internal systems, our marketing systems. How do you see the activity and the roles within our internal teams changing? What roles have you had to like pivot some of your people to saying, Hey, listen. You know, chat, G p T is creating this for us. Yeah. And now we need to, you know, turn it into actual worksheets. It could be design or go back and, you know, plug it into our, our newsletter systems and our email marketing. How have you kind of had to rotate your team a little bit? Yeah. Frankly, to. I, I just feel like corral all this amazing content.

    [00:20:53] April: Yeah. And then we, in our company, we call it our content quarterback. Our quarterback takes our content [00:21:00] and, and she literally quarterbacks it out, right? Yeah. Like this goes to this, this goes to this, this goes to this. This is an event and this is a video. Right? And it’s a very important part of what we do. How have you seen your own team kind of changing in their activity in order to, to try to harness and, and frankly just get a grip on all of that? Could be, yeah.

    [00:21:19] Amy: Well, I like, I, you know, I’m, I’m, I’m very much glass half full , you know, kind of perspective. It’s like we can be that much more efficient with what we’re doing and so we can move faster and make a bigger difference. And I love. Um, now, uh, I’ll, I’ll do just a slight tangent in that, something that just as a, as a growing scaling entrepreneur myself with a team, something I learned over time was that, um, when it comes to managing money, you know, it’s, it’s about contract labor and I will just be vulnerable here. I learned over time that my contract labor percentage was too high for the size of business that I had.

    [00:21:54] Amy: So I had already started looking at that last year, reassessing my team, who I love and seeing [00:22:00] like what, what is it that I need to do to truly like lean out the team? So I just wanna share that because I know that, again, we’re about all about being real. Um, right. And then with chat, G P T and AI, it, you know, I know that there’s a also a fear around like AI is replacing jobs.

    [00:22:15] Amy: In some ways it is, you know, it can replace some jobs, but for those who are in fear of it, why not see the opportunity in it? So, for example, right, um, copywriters like I, as I started posting about chat, GPT, I literally have had copywriters messaging me like, Amy, you’re killing me. Right? Like, like, I’m like, I’m just one person.

    [00:22:33] Amy: Chat C PT is gonna be there whether I talk about it or not, but their fear has been this tool is taking over my job. And the way I like I respond to ’em is like, this is your time. Why? Mm-hmm. , because you can leverage this. So when it comes to team members, I would say to any team, anyone who is a team member, I would say leverage it and go to the person that you’re contracting for or working for and saying, Hey, I know we, this ChatGPT AI thing has become a [00:23:00] big deal.

    [00:23:01] Amy: I can see where you might think my job is replaceable. Here’s how I’m going to even bring more value to you because I know how to use it and to create a higher level of efficiency with what I do. So there’s just, yeah, these different ways to look at it, to use it.

    [00:23:14] April: Um, absolutely.

    [00:23:16] Amy: And uh, and really to me it’s like we can work so much faster. Create more time for other things. I mean, it’s, it’s just incredible what it can do.

    [00:23:25] April: Right. And I mean, we’re entrepreneurs, we’re gonna fill that time. It’s not like we, we create a chasm of time and we’re like, oh, all this time now we’re just gonna sit here , we’re gonna figure out something else to create and do with that time. For sure.

    [00:23:37] Amy: You know? Totally. Not like on vacation now, but, but I, but I love what I do, you know what I mean? Like, Isn’t this life about like finding what you love to do, whatever that is and just being mm-hmm. creating a life where you can just do it all the time. Like, why not? So I hear you. Absolutely. That’s so true. A

    [00:23:54] April: a absolutely yes. Like for me, I just travel more with my kids, you know? Just add on another month, you [00:24:00] know? I mean that, because that’s what we do, right? So it’s incredible. Alright, you guys. Okay. , Amy, first of all, well, we have a surprise for you guys. We’re actually recording two episodes here, so this is episode number 278.

    [00:24:15] April: Next week is episode number 279, and everything that we’re gonna be talking around here is going to be utilizing Amy’s ultimate guide to chat, G P t that she’s totally giving you for free, and it shouldn’t be free by the. With this show. Okay, so here, here’s one of the implementation steps. You guys know we always do implementation at the end of every show.

    [00:24:40] April: Go to the show notes on this page and you guys download it. And the shortcut, as you all know, to find the show notes is sweet life episode number 2 77. Or you guys can text Chat G P T to 8 0 5 2 5 4 0 [00:25:00] 8 8 0 and we’re gonna include Amy’s link where you can just download this ultimate guide.

    [00:25:05] April: So that is job number. If you’re serious about this, okay? Even if it’s the only thing you do, even if you don’t share this episode, which we want you to, and you should cuz it’s amazing. Um, but you, you have to go download this because next week we are going to be, and Amy and I are right now, y’all know how this works.

    [00:25:22] April: You get to hear next week Amy’s going to be. Walking you through how to get started with chat, g p t, how to humanize this AI to sound like you. And it’s amazing what she’s gonna be bringing you through, but you, you really need to have the download tool for it to even, even make it more worthwhile, um, in the meantime.

    [00:25:42] April: So you guys all go grab that again. It’s episode 2 77, suite life 2 77. Or you can text it like we said. Um, in the meantime. I really would love for people to follow what you’re doing, hang out with you, whether it’s Instagram, LinkedIn, and, and [00:26:00] please let Amy know you heard this episode so that she can connect with you even more here as well.

    [00:26:05] April: How can people connect with you to go deeper like we have as a company?

    [00:26:09] Amy: Yeah, and keep it so simple. Just go to amy Just go to my website and, uh, and of course, you know, when you receive the ultimate guide to chat G b t for online coaches, um, you will then receive emails from me. You can unsubscribe at any time.

    [00:26:24] Amy: Um, and then if you wanna look me up online, everything is under my name. So just use my name for Facebook and . Instagram, I don’t really use Twitter, but I do have a Twitter around, you know, LinkedIn. Everything is under my name, so I kept it really simple. Okay.

    [00:26:38] April: Super cool. All right. Thank you so much. I can’t wait for part two.

    [00:26:42] April: Sorry you guys, you have to wait till next week. But, but go grab the guide and uh, and, and we’re gonna dive in further. Um, but you don’t, you don’t have to wait until next week to connect with Amy, so. Alright. Thank you so much and, uh, let’s, let’s do it again. Seafood.[00:27:00]



    (Becoming Known) The In Person Networking System To Grow Your Online Business – with Elizabeth McFadden (Episode 276)

    (Becoming Known) The In Person Networking System To Grow Your Online Business - with Elizabeth McFadden


    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™


    Networking, when done properly, is an overlooked gem of wealth to grow your online business. However few businesses actually have a networking strategy and fewer have a networking system. This episode is for CEOs in founders Hall looking to expand your brand reach, generate leads, build relationships, and therefore increase your profit in out of the box ways, with fantastic results. 
    In this episode we are diving into the system of networking and how you can do much more than show up to simply shake hands and kiss babies. This episode and unpacks strategic steps and actions that you should do before during and after in person networking events and attending conferences that will exponentially increase relationships and build ideal leads intentionally. 
    We’re diving in with CEO and founder of Novella Brand house, Elizabeth McFadden, as she shares her system of networking she’s used for years to become the leader in her local market and an online leading company with clients across the country. The system is intentional and when used correctly it will generate ideal results every single time.


    At the end of this episode you will: 

    • Learn Elizabeth’s networking strategy system
    • Know key actions you take before attending a conference or an event to Connect with the exact people you’re looking for
    • Understand what assets digital and physical you should bring with you to each of that and why
    • Have key strategies if you were an introvert to maximize networking opportunities in your own authentic way
    • And you’ll have a very specific after event step-by-step process that grows your list build strategic partnerships and closes deals
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:




    (Becoming Known) The Secret Framework To Build A Million Dollar Talk That Moves People To Action – with Eileen Wilder Part 2 (Episode 275)

    (Becoming Known) The Secret Framework To Build A Million Dollar Talk That Moves People To Action – with Eileen Wilder Part 2


    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for:

    Established coaches and consultants who are ready to take action and step into your next level of authority and influence through speaking. 



    This episode is for established coaches and consultants who are ready to take action and step into your next level of authority and influence through speaking, and for those who’ve felt the call to speak, but you’ve dragged your feet for one reason or another. 
    Eileen Wilder aka: Million Dollar Speaker, delivers a step by step workshop style two part episode and teaches you her winning framework for not only crafting your signature story but delivering talks that move people to action and even change the world. 
    Eileen taught so much gold that we’ve broken this episode into two. In this first episode #274 you’ll work with Eileen as she guides you to build your signature talk. In episode #275, Eileen breaks down the exact details of her formula to engage your audience, and move people to action in a way that the whole room is buzzing. 


    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Have your story board planned and the scene set for your signature talk
    2. Eileen’s winning framework and be able to apply it to your talk 
    3. Know that you can simplify your talk and create even more action
    4. Have Eileens Signature Talk Framework
    5. Know the secret sauce Eileen teaches her students to move audiences and bring massive emotion and action into the room
    Part 1 of this episode:
    Resources mentioned:

    DM the words “April Beach” to Eileen on Instagram to get a free copy of her book @eileenwild 

    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:



    [00:00:44] April: All right, so you guys are back for more. I don’t blame you. This is the part two of our teaching with Eileen Wilder. On how to establish yourself as a thought leader and truly grow and scale your company by using. , and if you didn’t yet, [00:01:00] please go back and listen to episode number 274, which was the beginning of this. 

    [00:01:05] April: Our guest expert is so powerful and she has so much to teach you that we actually broke this up into two separate episodes, and I wanna make sure that you don’t miss this in addition to that. These episodes come with a ton of free bonuses and including a free copy of Eileen’s book and how to tap into her frameworks and get free trainings on the things we’re talking about in the show even more. And I don’t want you to miss that. So make sure that you are cruising over to the show notes for both of these episodes by going to 

    [00:01:40] April: Now every single thing we talk about is in here. We’re gonna give you the details and how to get all of this. And not only that, both of these shows are video recorded. If you haven’t checked out our video yet on YouTube, cruise over and follow our YouTube channel as well, because Eileen is actually whiteboarding for you guys as she’s going [00:02:00] through the framework, and I don’t want you to miss it.

    [00:02:02] April: Again, welcome back to part two of our two part little mini series. Which just so happens to be part of another miniseries that we are doing on becoming known with the one and only Eileen Wilder. So let’s go ahead and dive right back in. 

    [00:02:17] Eileen: So say, say you’ve got your signature message. Now there’s obviously, um, you know, when I, when I’m teaching my students, so the crash course, there’s gonna be an intro, then there’s gonna be your story, which comprises of the problem, the solution, and the payoff.

    [00:02:32] Eileen: And then there’s gonna be what we call your in. So without going too deep, there is like an a a way to begin and a way to end this message. But let me give you the meat of how to make the crowd super engaged. Yes. And uh, and then if I have time, I’ll do like how to start and how to end. Okay. Yes. Okay, awesome.

    [00:02:54] Eileen: So, okay, my business partner and I studied over [00:03:00] 500 hours of the best speaker. that have all exists throughout all time. Jfk, Dr. Martin Luther King. We’ve studied mega pastors who get people voluntarily showing up every week, um, and get the crowd crazy excited. Now, I will give this to you guys free, this book free.

    [00:03:18] Eileen: It goes much deeper. It’s, it’s a, um, like a, it’ll be a digital ebook, but it’ll be worth going into these principles cuz if you do them like these famous pants speakers, you’ll be invited on the biggest stages. on the internet and in the world. And I’ve had the privilege of being a part of some of them.

    [00:03:38] Eileen: And I know you will too. Mm-hmm. . So here is the framework. Huge gift. Thank you. So as we, we watched all these videos, we found that these speakers were doing a pattern. Okay. Wow. And the pattern, when we start, we were like, are they doing this? And we’re like, oh my gosh. They’re all doing the same speaking framework pattern.

    [00:03:57] Eileen: And as they do it, the [00:04:00] audience starts, Like, um, just more and more engaged. So much so that some of the audiences are like talking back to the speaker. You know, it’s, it’s getting like, kind of like excited. It’s on. If you’ve ever been to like a Tony Robinson, you see how it’s like, it’s not quiet anymore.

    [00:04:15] Eileen: It’s like, it’s like, Well, we’re like having a lot of fun, right? Um, my business partner likes to call it like, black church, white church. Like, have you’ve ever been to a white church? Like, like I have and Uhhuh , you’ve ever been to a black church, which is, I actually grew up in a black church, so it’s like so much more fun.

    [00:04:32] Eileen: It’s so much more fun. So much more fun. . So here is the framework so you can implement it inside your signature message. All right, so. So when you’re telling your story and when you’re speaking, um, in front of podcasts or big crowds, or even if you’re talking to a person, one other person, consider using some of these techniques.

    [00:04:54] Eileen: So let’s go. Okay. The framework starts first. [00:05:00] In first person, I, I was here, I was in this place and I was doing this thing. You’re in first person, okay? Very quickly. within maybe 60 seconds or less. You wanna switch in your story to you, you second person. Hmm. Let me give you an example. I was in this apartment at three small kids.

    [00:05:28] Eileen: I felt overwhelmed and like I was never going to figure out how to make money, how to ever buy a house, how to ever have my dreams. Have you ever been in a place where life was turning out differently than you thought it was gonna turn out? Have you ever experienced overwhelming disappointment? At where you are.

    [00:05:56] Eileen: Like you’re older than you thought you would be to, you thought you’d [00:06:00] achieve more dreams, more goals by now, and there’s kind of a quiet desperation, simmering inside of you that makes you feel like you barely want to get out of bed in the morning. Cuz why? Right? So, so you’re first person. and then you’re into you.

    [00:06:19] Eileen: Have you ever? I’m immediately now. Cause you’re not there for you, right? Mm-hmm. , you’re not there to tell your story. You’re there to tell their story. Have you ever felt like B B B B You can do? Sometimes they call it the rule of three in speaking. So have you ever felt like this and felt like this and felt like this?

    [00:06:36] Eileen: And the minute you do that, watch this. When you do it, you’ll see the audience leans in. 

    [00:06:44] April: I mean, like I’m sitting here, even as you’re saying it, responding to even you teaching us how to do this. And I know, and I know that what you’re doing, . Yeah. You know what I’m doing. 

    [00:06:54] Eileen: Yeah, yeah, yeah. I’m like, yes. And, and now that you know, you’ll see what everybody else is doing too.

    [00:06:58] Eileen: When you see them speak [00:07:00] so lot like professionals, they know how to do this, so and so, you’ll actually, what you will see as well as the audience will start nodding their head, they’ll start out loud, effortlessly, they’ll start going, mm. , it’ll be a verbal. Now in contrast, speakers who don’t know how to do this, it’s quiet.

    [00:07:19] Eileen: Yeah. And people start tuning out. You know what I’m talking about? Like, have you ever seen a boring speaker, right? Yes. 

    [00:07:25] April: Yes, yes. And I fear, Lord, please help me, Nina, not be that speaker when I’m on stage. is when 

    [00:07:32] Eileen: From Gods lips to your ear. Exactly. So I to you. . Mm-hmm. , Heidi, have you ever mm-hmm. , here’s another prompt.

    [00:07:41] Eileen: You know, when you, you know, when you’re in a place and you’ve tried everything the gurus told you to do, you’ve tried this, you’ve tried that, you’ve tried, and it’s not working. So you, you have, you ever, and you know, when, you know, when you, you, you, is the unlock for the audience to go [00:08:00] into the movie. So cool.

    [00:08:03] Eileen: I, okay, so that’s, so it goes, I. to you. Mm-hmm. so important. Just do that. If you’re listening, you’ll be a better speaker. Great. Next level. IU point. IU point. Extract the lesson from the story that, that they can apply now. Doesn’t like, so. . Let me give you some examples of this. The point doesn’t need to rhyme, doesn’t need to be fancy pants.

    [00:08:35] Eileen: What it kind of, what it needs to do is to introduce almost a contrarian idea or something for them to think about. Okay. Got it. Let give you some examples. So, mm-hmm. , IU point, very speakers don’t have, like, they’re not clear in what they’re trying to say. And if you just think about your problem, okay. You could introduce a point such as, I [00:09:00] didn’t know that.

    [00:09:04] Eileen: Let me, let me, hold on. Pause. Let me go. I didn’t know that. No, I’m gonna go, I’m gonna do a different point. I didn’t know that doing everything the system would tell me to do, going to school, going to college, and getting a job, I didn’t know that that pathway wouldn’t lead to wealth. that wasn’t as good. So I, I, so I’m, I’m 

    [00:09:29] April: like a little No, that’s a great one though. No, no, no, no. Yeah. I’m sharing absolutely. Mm-hmm. , just think about 

    [00:09:35] Eileen: an idea. Mm-hmm. , think about an idea for your problem that like, you could present as like, I didn’t know that this, and so it could be a lesson that they could apply. Let’s think about another lesson perhaps that you could be having as in your problem.

    [00:09:49] Eileen: Perhaps your problem is, I didn’t know that eating keto. would cause me to hold onto weight, not to release weight. Now, I, I have [00:10:00] no, I don’t even know anything about keto. I’m just making full , like I didn’t know this and there’s a point inside the problem. Okay. I you point, it doesn’t need to be fancy. It needs to be something where the audience will go.

    [00:10:13] Eileen: Hmm. . 

    [00:10:14] April: So we want them to rethink. We want them to rethink something that they have thought is what I’m getting from what you’re saying. Yeah. We want them to rethink a problem based on the story in your journey of what’s happened. 

    [00:10:26] Eileen: Mm-hmm. . Yep. Just kind of a clear one sentence articulating perhaps a false limiting belief that you had.

    [00:10:33] Eileen: Mm-hmm. that they maybe hadn’t thought about recently. Okay. Got in another bit that I have. One of my points is, . I didn’t, I thought that working hard equaled wealth. Hmm. And I didn’t realize that it’s not about working harder, it’s about working. . Mm. And then I explain, then I go and explains. But that’s my point in that session.

    [00:10:54] Eileen: Mm-hmm. . So it’s like, I didn’t realize Clear point. Mm-hmm. , when you have a clear point inside your story, [00:11:00] the audience will most likely write it down. You’ll see them start writing it down. Now they’re in the movie, they’re like, oh my gosh, I think that Right. I believe 

    [00:11:06] April: that. Right. I have a million things flying through my head right now. Okay. Yes. This is, this is so good. So, you know, people could say, I didn’t know that. Even if after I. All the social media strategy and all of the things that it, it actually wouldn’t equal dollars in my pocket. But then I realized that doing this one thing, was what I really needed. And I think that might apply to our, a lot of our listeners or I didn’t know that if I just launched an online course like everybody else, that they, that they wouldn’t come.

    [00:11:41] April: That I, and I realized that I needed, or, you know, wanted to do this. And once I learned this, or once I did this mm-hmm. , it was the difference. Granted, I’m falling all over my words and I’m taking too many words 

    [00:11:54] Eileen: as you want. Me too. I mean, I know, I’m kind of thinking of stuff off the cuff too, but that, that’s the idea though.

    [00:11:59] Eileen: What’s a, [00:12:00] what’s like a, a clear one liner lesson from what you were experiencing Right. In this problem. Right. Because most likely they’re ha they’re thinking that same thing. Like, wait, I thought that working hard world wealth. Like, what are you saying? What? Right. So it, it creates intrigue, curiosity. In fact, the best speaker that I’ve studied in making a clear point is Joel Osteen.

    [00:12:20] Eileen: Oh 

    [00:12:21] April: yeah. Who was scared to death to speak in the beginning. 

    [00:12:24] Eileen: So he a point. So don’t everyone here don’t, don’t have to be like super fancy pants. He doesn’t need to rhyme. Just state a one-liner. That was something you were thinking and it’s clear from your, from your story. Got it. Yes. I U point now. Oh, this is my favorite part.

    [00:12:42] Eileen: I’ll go quick. IU point. You can go back into iu. Sometimes it’s little of a dance. So there I was in the apartment, da da da da. So, but, so we call that the IU dance, but if we go straight through the framework, IU point, they, they, they [00:13:00] is the, Now, let me articulate. There’s a, a quote from Winston Churchill that said, nothing unites at people more than having a common enemy.

    [00:13:09] Eileen: Yes. Okay. So here is the moment that you can get the crowd the most engaged, because if you can identify an enemy, that’s also their enemy, bring their awareness to the enemy and be like, Everything in your life that’s gone wrong has been kinda like a result of this enemy. Like this is actually who you’re actually fighting.

    [00:13:35] Eileen: You’re not fighting yourself and you’re not fighting, um, your mom and dad. You’re not fighting who like these phantom, like this is actually, uh, you who’s is an enemy set against you. Okay? And when that happens, there’s something inside of us as humans and, uh, men and women we like are we want to. . Mm-hmm.

    [00:13:57] Eileen: We wanna fight and we want, we wanna [00:14:00] win . So we do. So we’re like, um, like think about just football and sports. It’s like we we’re programmed to be like us, be them, us for them, right? So give your audience someone to fight. Wow. Now what, what two things will happen here? , high emotions, sometimes anger, which is really great.

    [00:14:20] Eileen: Like if you can get the crowd like in a good way, in a good way, I’ll show you, I’ll show you. Get the crowd angry in a good way. Now they’re united against this enemy and now the crowd is united in and amongst themselves. So now they’re like, the crowd now becomes a un unified tribe. Okay? Right? Mm-hmm. . And so it’s, it’s like this is the best part when you can do this in the audience.

    [00:14:41] Eileen: Oh, so an enemy. So it’s a they So IU point, they Mm, they, mm. So, alright. This is so fun because what you wanna be thinking here is like, who is who was, [00:15:00] or is your they. Hmm. Let me give you some examples. When I was speaking at FHL a couple years ago, I did a they, which was, uh, the enemy in your mind. Now in church they use the devil a lot.

    [00:15:20] Eileen: So I was kind of playing off this idea cause it’s an external character that I was like, some people call it the devil. Some people call it um, uh, Satan. Some people call it the adversary. I don’t care what you call it. How many of you, okay, now I’m back to you have heard a voice in your mind that pulls you.

    [00:15:37] Eileen: from what you know that you are called to create, how many of you mm-hmm. have had that? Mm-hmm. , how many of you have felt, uh, resistance to publishing what you know you’re born to publish? How many of you had that? Uh, and I’m, I’m going back to you, you hear me going back into you? Mm-hmm. . Um, and then I go, I go one more.

    [00:15:57] Eileen: So now I’m doing what’s called the rule of three. How many of [00:16:00] you have felt, uh, I don’t know what I said. Uh, like. . I don’t know, just something pulling you back from the calling that you know you are meant to step into. How many of you, how many of you ever heard a voice like this? See now I’m doing crowd.

    [00:16:14] Eileen: Now I’ll show you. Crowd engagement. And by that time, the audience, every time I’m saying that is seeing them in the movie, they’re like, I’ve had the wait. There’s an enemy. Mm-hmm. in my, in my thoughts. Okay. . Now they’re starting to get like white hot and heated and this is what I want you guys to do. I make a they.

    [00:16:34] Eileen: Another speech I did. I was like, the system told you right. , go to school. Right? Go to college, get a job, and you’ll be wealthy. Right? How many of you grew up here in that lie? Mm-hmm. . So now, now I’m, I’m, I’m, uh, putting words in the enemy’s mouth. Okay. I hope this is making sense. 

    [00:16:52] April: This makes, okay. Perfect sense.

    [00:16:54] Eileen: Okay. All right. So then the, the capital off, but the, they is my favorite part, and that’s where you, you can get [00:17:00] ’em on their feet and like, they’re just, they’re just like, what? . Okay. And so, so they’re, they’ve got this, they, and then in the middle of the, they drop a sound bite, so in the middle. So you’ve got the, they, they’re freaking out.

    [00:17:17] Eileen: They’re like, I am Wonder Woman, and I am about to take the enemy down. That’s like how your audience is feeling right there, and you’re like, take ’em. Yeah, like go like now you’re just like, they’re in their story, they’re in their movie, and they are at war with this enemy, and you’re just. . Like, like what the, the guy in the back Go, go.

    [00:17:40] Eileen: Yeah, go. Just go. So then when, so in the middle of this white, hot, emotional heat, if you drop a sound bite, which is like a point, but it rhymes. Okay. They will go 

    [00:17:53] April: crazy like 

    [00:17:55] Eileen: bananas. Like, but like running around like, like screaming, like, [00:18:00] like what? Like say that again. You know, they’re writing it down as fast as they’re tweeting it out.

    [00:18:04] Eileen: Like it’s like taking screenshots of the thing. It’s like, it’s like, it’s like this is what the pattern was. Do they, all these speakers are, they’re doing this pattern in these speeches and you’re just like, and, and I, so, okay, so this is it. So then people are like, oh my gosh, how do I make a sound bite?

    [00:18:25] Eileen: And I’m like, okay, okay, . You’re like, oh my gosh. So I have a favorite secret cool website that musicians use, and it’s called rhyme And take some of your ideas, your points, things you say, go in there. have some fun with some alliteration. Uh, I’ll give you an example of one of mine. I actually love to do this ninja thing. Now. You guys know all my secrets. 

    [00:18:53] April: All of your secrets. , you could call a sound. You’re 

    [00:18:55] Eileen: amazing stack. So a soundbite stack is like where you use a quote of a famous [00:19:00] person, another quote from a famous person, and then you drop your quote. Sound bites. 

    [00:19:06] April: Oh yeah. That’s 

    [00:19:07] Eileen: so good. So, uh, let’s see. One soundbite stack is,

    [00:19:12] Eileen: So I’ll say something about like w Clemon stone. I’m like, uh, because w clemen stone, the number one enemy of wealth. I have this whole bit. And then I say, w clemen stone understood the number one enemy of wealth isn’t mindset, it’s delay. Hmm. How many of you have been delay how You see, I’m going back into the, how many of you have been delaying some things in your life?

    [00:19:33] Eileen: Napoleon Hill says it like this, that successful people make decisions quickly. and change their mind slowly. Unsuccessful people make decisions slowly and change their mind often and quickly. Mm-hmm. , I like to say it like this. Procrastination is the assassination of your destination. and when boom, I do that, then it’s like, yeah.

    [00:19:54] Eileen: So yeah, it’s like boom, boom, boom. And then soundbites stack. But you [00:20:00] can come up with your own soundbites. Mm-hmm. , it’s super fun. Think of yourself like a rapper or a songwriter or someone very creative and that you’ll see that the great speakers, it’s, it’s more like music. Mm-hmm. . So if you’ll do your signature story using this speaking framework, I guarantee.

    [00:20:21] Eileen: I just like, I, I could like bet money in it. People will come up to you and be like, that message changed my life. 

    [00:20:29] April: Wow. This podcast is going to change people’s lives and businesses. Wow. . So, okay, so I have questions. So first the delivering the framework and then you usually go over this, the iu them at, at the end.

    [00:20:48] April: That’s, that’s when after that, After the entire signature framework that you go through? Well, well, 

    [00:20:54] Eileen: what I’ll do is like, I’ll have people introduce the message and then while they’re telling their story, their [00:21:00] problems, which pay off, they do it in this way. Got 

    [00:21:03] April: it, 

    [00:21:03] Eileen: got it, got it. The idea, a way to always talk or a way to always, um, tell a story or a way to just communicate that’s very helpful for people, God, Eileen, because it’s clear.

    [00:21:17] Eileen: Um, You’re using a speaking tech technique called just high contrast. When you have the enemy now they’re like, they do it this way, but we do it like this. So you’re, you’re employing very helpful communication success habits when you, when you talk like this. So we’ll have them tell their story like that.

    [00:21:39] Eileen: Now we do a lot of role playing on. Give feedback cuz you know, pe you know, right? Yeah. Mm-hmm. . And 

    [00:21:45] April: it takes a, this, this whole entire process. First of all, um, thank you for taking the time to study all the people that you have done and then be so giving. In everything that you do, giving away the book for free.

    [00:21:59] April: Mm-hmm. , you [00:22:00] guys, I, I have read this is really incredible. Um, and in speaking and teaching us so freely and then obviously being here on the show, just pouring into us, we’re gonna, we’re gonna turn this into two podcast episodes, is so good. One, your ability to see these, this pattern and understand this, and then turn around and teach it, is an incredible gift.

    [00:22:20] April: Oh, thanks. So thank you for paying attention to your gift and then turning around and teaching it to. Hmm. I, I think that there are, obviously, there are so many different ways to, uh, to give a talk and give a teaching, but what you are teaching us is how to move people. Mm-hmm. . And that is, I believe, the missing component that many of our listeners have had.

    [00:22:46] April: in their becoming known strategy. Yeah. It’s, it’s, and even you guys, it doesn’t have to be a million people that you’re known with. It can be a hundred people that know you and you change, you change their lives. [00:23:00] This strategy that you talked about, this way of storytelling, Hmm. Truly moves people to action in.

    [00:23:08] April: What is so powerful about the way that you teach this and, and all of your ninja skills that you do with your clients, is that, It really does remove the speaker from being the spotlight. Yeah, and like I said in the beginning, I think there’s a lot of people that are hesitant to step into the quote unquote spotlight because they don’t wanna be in the spotlight, they want.

    [00:23:32] April: Their methodology or their change or whatever, whatever transformation they deliver to be the highlight. They don’t want to be that front person, but they do want to create change. And so there’s been some hesitation. I know, and I’ve talked to a lot of clients where there has been a significant level of hesitation because they wanna figure out another way to do it without having it for them to be the one standing up there.

    [00:23:54] April: What would you say to those people who. Are what they know. [00:24:00] They feel that pole. We talked about it. Mm-hmm. , you teach on it. You speak on it, that know that they are supposed to do this and their feet are stuck in cement. What, what would you say to that person who’s listening? 

    [00:24:14] Eileen: Yeah, I love that. Um, well, I think one thought that can be incredibly motivating and incredibly.

    [00:24:23] Eileen: um, energizing, making you want to do this more or, you know, speak on stages and podcasts and do all this stuff, is thinking about all of the people that don’t know what you know, right? They don’t know this tips, like they don’t have the steps, they don’t know the information and because they don’t have that information, to some degree.

    [00:24:48] Eileen: You’re experiencing what the Bible talks about, like, which is like people perish for their lack of knowledge. Mm-hmm. . So it’s, it means like there’s some part of their life that isn’t in fullness, isn’t in abundance, [00:25:00] isn’t in the kind of increase that they could be experiencing if they just knew like one or two things that, you know, and we discount and discredit our personal story because it’s so per, so unique to us.

    [00:25:16] Eileen: right? Yeah. Like this is my thing. I don’t even know if this would like even really help anybody, but when you start opening your mouth and taking, being vulnerable and taking that courageous step forward, and you start seeing that your story is the linchpin for thousands, maybe if not millions of people to experience greatness, which is kind of crazy.

    [00:25:42] Eileen: I mean, it’s not like, not to be like heaviness or. . There’s a heaviness to that, but it’s like an excitement. One person said it to me like this, and I’ll toss it back to you, April. They said, stop focusing on you. And what, you [00:26:00] know, what you, you keeping your story quiet? They said, start focusing on the prison that everyone else is in tormented because they haven’t heard what you.

    [00:26:12] Eileen: right? So it’s that calling toward contribution that I feel can unlock for people. Like just, uh, people need. People need, they need what you have. They need your story. And that’s, uh, it can be just like a never ending amazing addiction is just people coming up to you being like, thank you for ch thank you for that message.

    [00:26:35] Eileen: Thank you for changing my life. That’s what happens. right when you decided to speaker. Wow. Wow, 

    [00:26:41] April: wow. Um. , there’s so many responses I wanna say right now. Uh, I think that it’s important for our listeners, again, because I unpack everything. This show is not about me at all. Um, but I want to share with you guys something that happened to me in [00:27:00] this case.

    [00:27:01] April: and actually it was at a funnel hacking live. And I mean, all transparently. I don’t use ClickFunnel. Sorry, Russell. I mean, I just don’t, I just go and my friends are there. You’re there. You know, it’s, it’s great leadership. I love learning there. It’s just an amazing place to be. Anyways, my first year, there was only a couple years ago, two years ago, I think it was, you were speaking and I remember being there in the a.

    [00:27:25] April: I was actually standing behind you, I think, and Garrett White was speaking. Oh yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah. It was like going to church in there. Yeah. Um, but anyway, and I remember in that moment, hearing that you have to stop keeping it to yourself. And it was such a, it was such a moving event. I was actually bawling crying you guys in this conference around people I didn’t even really know.

    [00:27:51] April: Yeah. Um, actually I hardly knew any of ’em. Mm-hmm. and uh, and I was just this bawling, crying hot mess because I learned in that [00:28:00] moment that I could no longer sit on what I. Wow. And granted, I’ve had this podcast for five years, six years there. There’s a different level that I have been supposed to walk into, and so I remember that moment, right?

    [00:28:13] April: And I share that with you guys. I ended up sending out to my whole email list about how I ugly cried and Funnel Hagging live, and this is what I learned. I actually got more responses to that email than any other email I’ve ever sent out. But the, the message was that if once you feel that. You guys can’t go back.

    [00:28:34] April: I haven’t able to go back since once I knew and I heard that. I mean, to me it came from God, but whatever you guys believe, and we have listeners of all faith in here and you know, whatever that is, whatever that intuition is inside of you that says that, like Eileen saying, if you guys have heard this, th that is why I binge everything that Eileen puts out.

    [00:28:57] April: Because I know she’s feeding me [00:29:00] to the next level that I’m supposed to be at. That’s why I’m so excited about her being here on this show, because I can personally attest to what I learned, and I’m not even in Eileen’s paid programs yet. I mean, just the amount of information that I learn. So I, I share that story with you guys.

    [00:29:18] April: Because I want you guys to take a moment and tap into when that was for you. You’re sitting here listening to this episode. You already know that you’re supposed to be speaking and otherwise you wouldn’t have made it to the end of this episode. This wasn’t, this wouldn’t be a valuable use of your time.

    [00:29:36] April: Oh, and, and really hear what Eileen is saying and utilize this framework that you’ve learned here on this show to move forward and start taking action. And if you’re listening and you haven’t heard that yet, then maybe it’s time to press in. Whatever that looks like for you, and get really clear on whether or not this is an action you should take.

    [00:29:58] April: This isn’t for [00:30:00] everybody. We we’re, we’re not sitting here saying that everybody needs to be, you know, this amazing world game changing speaker, but we are saying for those of you who haven’t experienced it yet or aren’t sure, or you just feel stuck, you can’t move into that place where you know that you should be creating change based on the business that you have.

    [00:30:22] April: Then consider what Eileen is saying to you here. Tap into her ecosystem as we have. Wow. And, and learn from this wisdom. Hmm. Yeah. Because it will serve you 

    [00:30:37] Eileen: well. Yeah. Speaking is just the best feeling in the world, and also will help you give and contribute like you never have. and then you’ll also be crazy pants shocked at how much business you’ll start doing when you decide to take that step forward.

    [00:30:57] Eileen: That’s so good. April. 

    [00:30:58] April: Wow. [00:31:00] Super. Oops. It’s super good everything you’re saying. I was so excited about this episode. Yeah. Uh, these two episodes now, we’re gonna break ’em up for you guys. Okay. In summary, we have talked about the importance of using your voice to create change and to become known. We’ve talked about how to tap in and Eileen has given you the framework to craft your signature story.

    [00:31:25] April: Uh, holy moly. I mean, this is just amazing that what you guys have received here, and you should see my notes. I actually have front and back pages of notes, uh, and I can’t wait to, to get this out and transcribe this whole. You have that storytelling framework, and then on top of that you have the, the secret sauce that Eileen teaches to her exclusive clients on the iu, them punchline, and the three parts that she dropped for you on how to use [00:32:00] quotes from leaders.

    [00:32:01] April: Very, very sneakily in a perfect way. Put your little rhyming quote in there. If you’re like me, I have three teenage boys. I’m gonna give this to them to figure, to figure out my, my, my, my rhyme rap for whatever that’s gonna be. Um, or you can go to the web website that Eileen mentioned here. Um, I, I really can’t, words don’t even cover my gratitude for you being here on the show and sharing all of this wisdom.

    [00:32:26] April: Mm-hmm. with, with our listeners. Thank. so much. Oh, so fun. How can people connect with you and be part of your ecosystem? Like we. 

    [00:32:36] Eileen: Yes, I would love to stay in touch with all of you listening because I love April and I love like her people. I know, I’m sure you are amazing listening to this. So you can go to become a paid, you can access a training that I have.

    [00:32:50] Eileen: I go a little bit deeper in how to, I know, make the relationships to get on stages and connect with people who will invite you to even bigger stages. And that training is [00:33:00] super, uh, high value. And I also, if you want our. I’ll give you our free Yes. You want her book ? Um, find me on Instagram and message. My assistant will deliver it to you.

    [00:33:11] Eileen: Just pick, maybe just be like, April Beach, you’ll just message me. April Beach I’ll know. And then my assistant will send you. The book will be so helpful in helping you think through iu. They IU point a sound bite and then. Keep, keep me in touch. Let me know how you crush it 

    [00:33:29] April: up there. Mm. You can find her at Eileen Wilder on Instagram, guys.

    [00:33:33] April: Oh 

    [00:33:33] Eileen: yes. Sorry, Eileen Wild, my bad. Eagle. Eileen. 

    [00:33:36] April: Eileen Wild on Instagram at Eileen Wild. Yes. Perfect. Okay, and we’ll make sure all those links for you guys are in the show notes. Thank you so much again. Yes. I appreciate all of your time. I adore you. And just keep, keep letting them up. That’s great. Thank you.

    [00:33:51] April: Thank. Hey friends. All right. We are wrapping up. This is episode number 275 in both episode 2 74, and this [00:34:00] episode are with the One and only Eileen Wilder. This is part of a series that we’ve been delivering to you here on the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast called Becoming Known. And in these two episodes, Eileen unpacked these secrets that are proven ways where she and her students and the speakers she’s studied move audiences to take action.

    [00:34:23] April: And so if you are in that place, and I shared a little bit of my story of being moved to action and when I knew and I felt that calling, if you are in that place where you know you need to step out and speak for whatever reason that your feet. Felt like they were in quicksand for a while. Now maybe is the time to take that action as we are here.

    [00:34:44] April: You’re listening to this episode and it’s not by accident, and I want you to take action in implementing. So we did talk about a lot of things at the end of shows where we have guests, I love to work with you and help. Pinpoint, what is that one action step from [00:35:00] all the things that Eileen talked about that is going to help you move forward in this direction?

    [00:35:05] April: Many people don’t take action and inaction causes a failure before they’ve even tried. And I don’t want that to be you guys. I don’t want that to be our listeners. Okay, so step number one, obviously the super easy action you can take is to go to become a paid and connect with Eileen and download all the resources she has there.

    [00:35:25] April: If that’s the only thing you do, start there. Alright. Become a paid Go connect with Eileen and her team and just be part of their family and their ecosystem, and it’s just an amazing business community over there. Number two. Eileen was really generous in giving you guys a free copy of her book, million Dollar Speaker.

    [00:35:44] April: I have this book. I’m reading this book. I’ve binged this book. I have notes all over this book. I want you to have this book too. She was generous enough to give you guys a free copy. But I want you to grab it in a timely manner. So connect with Eileen on Instagram to get a free copy of her book. [00:36:00] You can follow her at Eileen Wild and all you have to do is DM her my name and then her assistant will know what that is and send out a free copy of the book.

    [00:36:08] April: So just DM her April Beach and they will n and then her team will send you, um, how to get a free copy of that. Okay. Those are two easy action steps. Now let’s get into, um, more of the thought process where a lot of people get stuck in their brain, uh, because we can’t decide on, on what we should do first.

    [00:36:28] April: The first thing that I recommend you do is think about that story like Eileen taught, like unpacking the Pixar methodology of storytelling picture. You see yourself even. It like a third person aerial view like you’re an angel flying over the situation, and there you are. Go back to the beginning of the story that you want to tell.

    [00:36:51] April: And of course I want that story to relate to the offer that you are engineering, the product that we’re selling. So [00:37:00] please make sure that you are very clear on the product that you were selling at the end of your campaign of becoming known through speaking. We need to make sure we have that engineered first, so, Think and make sure that you’re very clear on what you wanna become known for through your speaking.

    [00:37:18] April: What product or program that you have engineered or you’re in the process of engineering to, to drive people to take action about. And then picture that story in your mind of when that story began to unfold in how you came to the solution of creating that product or program or solution that you. So those are three action steps.

    [00:37:41] April: Number one, go to become a paid to dm. I lean steam and get a free copy of the book. And then the third thing is to be very clear about what you’re selling if you aren’t clear about your offer. That is what we do here at the Sweet Life Company. We help you engineer transformational offers and programs, courses, masterminds, [00:38:00] licensed programs.

    [00:38:00] April: We help. Build your certification programs. We help you build your genius product and your intellectual property to scale your business exponentially if you’re stuck there. Of course, cruise over to sweet life and that’s what we will help you with. But this show is all about your next step actions that you do after that in making sure that we’re very clear on what you wanna become known for.

    [00:38:24] April: And, and I’m just so grateful to Eileen in all the time that she spent with all of us here. Um, she is truly one of the greats and, um, I’m very, very, very happy that you are here at the end of this show. And, It is not, as I said by accident that you are. So this is episode number 275 here at the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast.

    [00:38:47] April: We have kicked off the next gen of the podcast. This is year six, and we are so grateful that you are here. Please take a moment to share this show. We do not have our advertising on this show intentionally because that would drive me crazy as a [00:39:00] listener, so we don’t advertise. We really rely on you guys to share these episodes and I appreciate you doing so and all of the show.

    [00:39:06] April: All of the resources, all of the links, all the instructions on how to get the free book and details about what Eileen talked about can be found by vi, by visiting suite life 2 75. Again, suite life 2 75. And if you forget everything else, you can just go there and we’ll make it easier for you and you can click on the links to connect with Eileen further.

    [00:39:31] April: All right, have an awesome day. I’m so glad that you guys are here. Thanks for listening.


    (Becoming Known) The Secret Framework To Build A Million Dollar Talk That Moves People To Action – with Eileen Wilder Part 1 (Episode 274)

    (Becoming Known) The Secret Framework To Build A Million Dollar Talk That Moves People To Action - with Eileen Wilder Part 1


    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for:

    Established coaches and consultants who are ready to take action and step into your next level of authority and influence through speaking. 



    This episode is for established coaches and consultants who are ready to take action and step into your next level of authority and influence through speaking, and for those who’ve felt the call to speak, but you’ve dragged your feet for one reason or another. 
    Eileen Wilder aka: Million Dollar Speaker, delivers a step by step workshop style two part episode and teaches you her winning framework for not only crafting your signature story but delivering talks that move people to action and even change the world. 
    Eileen taught so much gold that we’ve broken this episode into two. In this first episode #274 you’ll work with Eileen as she guides you to build your signature talk. In episode #275, Eileen breaks down the exact details of her formula to engage your audience, and move people to action in a way that the whole room is buzzing. 


    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Have your story board planned and the scene set for your signature talk
    2. Eileen’s winning framework and be able to apply it to your talk 
    3. Know that you can simplify your talk and create even more action
    4. Have Eileens Signature Talk Framework
    5. Know the secret sauce Eileen teaches her students to move audiences and bring massive emotion and action into the room
    Resources mentioned:

    DM the words “April Beach” to Eileen on Instagram to get a free copy of her book @eileenwild 

    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:45] April: Hi guys. Welcome back to another episode here at the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. I am so glad you’re here. You are definitely not here by accident. This show and the one after it, it, it is one of these divine moments where you may be moved to action that could change your [00:01:00] business forever and in six years. I’ve never actually told you that before, any episode. So listen up. Here’s what you can expect.

    [00:01:07] April: First of all, it was so good. That our guest expert poured so much into us. In this show, we actually broke it up into two episodes, so this is part one of part two. But all of these episodes happening right now. We now have a collection of six episodes are all part of our becoming known series. So the series of episodes running from 2 71 all the way up through these episodes.

    [00:01:29] April: And beyond are all about helping you establish your strategy to become known. And today’s expert is a one and only Eileen Wilder. If you don’t know her, she’s gonna share her story with you on this show. So I’m not gonna do that right now, but I want you to know that you’re in the presence truly of one of the greats.

    [00:01:44] April: She is known as the Queen of Stages. She is spoken with Tony Robinson, Russell Branson, Kevin Harrington, Dan Kennedy, and. As you hear her teach and the way she is going to take you through what is a true workshop here setting on this show, you’re gonna [00:02:00] understand that she is unlike any other, and I’m so glad you’re here, and I know she is so incredibly glad that you’re here as well.

    [00:02:08] April: So this is who this show is for, and this is how to prepare. This is for those of you who are established coaches, consultants, and experts, and you’re ready to scale your business up. You’re ready to step into thought leadership. You have a proven offer, methodology, framework, and strategy that we already know we have in place that we wanna sell on the backside of speaking.

    [00:02:28] April: If you don’t have that, Still listen to this show, but cruise over to sweet life and we will help you engineer your industry leading transformational programs and offers, license programs or certification programs. That’s what we do here. As many of you know, I just wanna make sure that you have that in place.

    [00:02:44] April: So as we’re diving into what we’re implementing here on the show, We know what you’re speaking towards and about. You have to have your offer. We need to know what you’re selling right in, in order to best utilize and implement what Eileen is teaching us here. [00:03:00] So again, this is for those of you guys who are established, and Eileen is gonna deliver a step-by-step workshop style that we’ve broken up into two episodes where she is gonna deliver you her winning frameworks for not only crafting your signature.

    [00:03:13] April: But how to deliver it, which is the goal. Like that’s where I feel like I get stuck. Like I can, you know, I’m up there and I speak and I talk, but I don’t know about you. My greatest fear is having people leave unchanged. So whatever that is for you, whatever cement you’ve been carrying in your feet, uh, regarding speaking on, on big stages and changing lives, you are in the right place.

    [00:03:38] April: All of the show notes for this show can be found by visiting suite life 2 74. And this is what you can expect at the end of these two shows, you’re gonna have your storyboard and you’re gonna understand how to set the scene for your signature talk, you are gonna know and have full awareness of Eileen’s super powerful signature [00:04:00] talk framework, as well as her secret framework of how to deliver your signature talk to move audiences.

    [00:04:06] April: A k a move mountain. So if that is what you were looking for, you were truly in the right place. If you’re new to the Sweet Life Podcast, welcome to our listener family. I’m so glad you’re here. We don’t have advertising on this show. We never have. We want you to be able to dive into these business trainings that you would pay thousands of dollars elsewhere for. So please, we ask that you do share this and Eileen has led with incredible giving. And I would want, I would love to have you help us get this episode into more and more people’s hands and spread her work that she’s continuing to do in helping all of us be able to spread our work that we do. What an amazing, give, give ecosystem here. And I am very, very glad that you’re here. So if you’re ready, let’s go ahead and dive into this show. 

    [00:04:52] April: All right, you guys. I am very excited to be joined by my friend Eileen, and I’ve been wanting to bring [00:05:00] Eileen before you here on this show for a long time because what she speaks about is something that I’m personally working on and looking to achieve.

    [00:05:09] April: And all you guys know, I share all the behind the scenes of the things I’m trying to do. But it’s very, very important for all of us, and that is using our voice in speaking to create change for other people. To serve other people, to help other people. And the approach that Eileen uses as she does this is so genuine.

    [00:05:32] April: It’s so, um, uh, absorbable. , it’s so when you’re sitting in the audience and Eileen speaking, she moves you, you know, uh, to action and levels up your IQ and, and helps you move in a way that maybe you didn’t necessarily have what it took to move before then. And so that’s why I’m really excited to have her on the podcast. So welcome to the Sweet Life Podcast, Eileen. I’m so glad that you’re [00:06:00] here. 

    [00:06:00] Eileen: Hi April. So pumped to be here. Yeah, I 

    [00:06:02] April: know. Really, really exciting. So today we’re talking about how to use your voice to become known, to establish thought leadership and how to do that through speaking, how to expand your work through speaking.

    [00:06:17] April: Can you give a little bit of a background story about how you got here, why you are the bees knee of teaching people how to do this now? , um, I, I hold up your. We’ll put it back in the, yeah. Hold up. Eileen’s book. I have a copy too sitting here, but there you go. How to become a million dollar speaker. There you go.

    [00:06:35] April: It’s awesome. All right, so share, share with our listeners. Mm-hmm. , how you got here and why. This is so important, uh, in, in your business and how you help others. 

    [00:06:48] Eileen: Oh my gosh, yes. Absolutely. Well, thanks again April. This is so cool getting to hang. So I got into, um, helping people become million dollar speakers just like two and a half years ago.

    [00:06:58] Eileen: So I actually was a [00:07:00] ministry for 18 years. I was a pastor, so I was a speaker. Uh, but I didn’t really iden, I identified more of a pa being a pastor and, and making no money. Particularly I was in nonprofit ministry. My husband was actually an Uber driver to support us in our nonprofit salary, which is literally nonprofit.

    [00:07:18] Eileen: But it was great because we, uh, we loved serving people. So many of our friends that, um, we’ve gotten to meet over the years are people that. Really want, they really want to make an impact, like a legitimate, I really want to leave this planet changing as many lives as possible. And that’s where I was. I was like, I mean, but then I found out through coming to a conference called Funnel Hacking Live, that I could, I could not only have a huge impact, but I could also make money as a speaker.

    [00:07:53] Eileen: So at that conference is where I got the strategy for how to do that. And in kind of less than a couple [00:08:00] years, we started doing multiple millions of dollars and now our clients do multiple millions of dollars using speaking as the primary way to get their voice and their message out to as literally as many people as possible.

    [00:08:13] Eileen: But at the same time, massive profit. So that’s what my passion is now, is releasing people into their calling. So if you’re listening, if you’ve like felt that thing, you know, you feel it. It’s almost an uncomfortability inside where you can’t, almost like you’re like, I have to get this out. , I have to get this message out.

    [00:08:32] Eileen: I have to get this book out. I have to get this story out. Um, so there’s a, we love to help people craft their signature message, which is what I’d love to do with you in the next couple minutes. I would love that by crafting their signature message and their signature story, it can transform the audience while you give it.

    [00:08:50] Eileen: So it’s, it’s just incredibly fulfilling work. Not scary at all, but it, and then to see. , we, we love to see table rushes at the end of our [00:09:00] signature message. We can cause a table rush to happen. Where people now they’re taking that next step with you and in your business and it’s just kind of like, I laid down last night and I was like, I like can’t believe this is my life now.

    [00:09:11] Eileen: Mm-hmm. like, it really wasn’t that long. Sometimes I tell, I tell my friend Russell, I was like, how was Uber driving? Like, Like, my husband was Uber driving. It was like two and a half years ago, right? Like that was like not that. Now we’re in this like, huge expansion. It’s like, I don’t know, 1.5 million. I never thought I could do something like that.

    [00:09:28] Eileen: So it’s just kind of crazy town. April, the opportunity that, uh, is there for somebody who wants to step forward and use their voice. Mm-hmm. 

    [00:09:38] April: told you guys, I’m sure many of you already know Eileen. Uh, if you don. . Well, now you’ve met and now you know why I love her. So, uh, for those of you who are listening, and you have been in the online coaching and consulting space and you’ve been doing the rat race and you’ve been chasing the things, and you’ve been trying to do all the things to get your work [00:10:00] to the surface, to get the, the transformation that you deliver to your clients, to the surface, And you have not really been able to do it.

    [00:10:09] April: You may be getting tired. Most of our listeners have been in business for a really long time and you guys are like the best kept secret and you may be getting tired. Look at what Eileen just said to you. Look at this case study. It’s been two years, two years ago. The rest of us in this space, we’re still using these old tactics and here comes Eileen, this fresh eyes, and she just goes for it cuz she sees this pathway that’s laid out before her.

    [00:10:31] April: So it’s really important that I really want. Like I am here taking notes, you guys. I have all my notes here as you know. I do, and we have guests on this show that to, to stop for a second wherever you are, or positive episode, or make sure you come back and listen to it because the steps we’re gonna talk about here are really, really powerful and these are proven.

    [00:10:50] April: So let’s go ahead and dive into that. Yeah. Thank you so much. I’m very excited about this. as people are considering, what the heck am I gonna say? Like, I [00:11:00] think I know what I’m gonna do. Or why does anybody care what I have to say? I just want them to buy my program or buy my product or whatever. You know what I mean?

    [00:11:08] April: Why do they need to know me? How do I present myself in a way that I’m relatable? Um, help our listeners go through that process of crafting that communication strategy. Yeah. 

    [00:11:19] Eileen: So good. A hundred percent. So, so the big thing is kind of recognizing. Like, your story is so powerful. Like if you’re listening to this, like the story of how you like, um, birthed the company that you have or created the product or the certification or the coaching program, like the story surrounding the origin story is like, Uh, is very, very important.

    [00:11:41] Eileen: And many people, just after hearing that story, uh, could they, they normally, they’re just like, oh my gosh, I want that . I want that . That’s like how it was when I first met April. I was like, I wanna know all the things that April knows and I want to buy all the things that [00:12:00] April has. Like, you know what I’m saying?

    [00:12:02] Eileen: So every one of you. So it’s kind of recognizing how do I, how do I articulate and unpack that story? So my favorite. , um, organization to study this for is actually Pixar because Pixar, every Pixar movie I have little kids, but they, every movie they release is like a blockbuster. and they’ve just crushed this formula for a story.

    [00:12:22] Eileen: So as you’re, as I go through this formula, think about your story because this is the nucleus of your signature message, is what I’m about to show you right now. The nucleus is pen your story. Okay? And what’s cool about the way I’m gonna teach it is what you’re gonna do as you tell your story is as you tell your story, the audience is gonna see the.

    [00:12:43] Eileen: Inside your story because the purpose of when you’re speaking to an audience is not to share, just not to talk about yourself, right? It’s to talk about their story. So you know that feeling when you’re in a movie, a really good one, and you’re just lost, like, [00:13:00] and you, you forget that you’re in this like dark room with other people, or you’re just literally captivated the entire time.

    [00:13:08] Eileen: If you do this, like, I’ll show you here. This is where the audience will get like swept up into hu as you’re sharing your story. They’re gonna be like having their own internal movie and epiphany happening, which is what causes such an emotional swell, which I’ll teach you in this training too. It causes such a, uh, Almost the audience starts in, in, when I’m speaking, they start erupting emotionally.

    [00:13:34] Eileen: Like the other day, April, I was at the biggest conference and um, and in eight minutes I short, I stared, I shared a short story. The audience jumped up, started jumping up on their feet. First it was a couple trickle, and then there was a couple little pocket, and then everyone, like it actually got, I’ve, I got outta control, like actually, so the audience starts shouting back at me like, Like, like a [00:14:00] really cool church service.

    [00:14:01] Eileen: And I was like, I actually was like, I had a moment before I was like, I literally don’t know what to do right now. 

    [00:14:07] April: Like, you’re turning around. Goodness, there’s something behind me that I don’t, 

    [00:14:11] Eileen: so, so it was so, but like the, if you can, you know’s the power of a story, the power of your story, it, your story has all the ingredient. to impact people in a sniper way. So let’s dive in. Okay. Let’s, yeah. 

    [00:14:26] April: Yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah. So, and yes, you’re right. I Pi Pixar method. Yeah. 

    [00:14:30] Eileen: Yeah. Okay, so I have this awesome glare, so I’m, so I’m gonna say it out loud. So the Pixar method is, what was the problem that you had? Like what was the problem? The drama.

    [00:14:46] Eileen: what was the challenge you were facing? Uh, so as an example, my challenge was I was in a small two bedroom apartment with three kids and my husband’s Uber driving to support us. [00:15:00] Okay. So what was the problem? That was my problem. And how did it make you feel? Hmm. . Hmm. So as an example, so if you’re, I kind of use these as like prompts.

    [00:15:10] Eileen: So some people like, pause me and like, so what was the problem? What did it, when you’re describing the problem, you wanna make it like a scene, like, I was here in this place doing this thing and I felt like, I felt like I was a total failure and I was never gonna figure this out. And I, I felt terrified.

    [00:15:33] Eileen: Here’s another, so you wanna use emotional? I felt terrified that my three kids would grow up in an apartment without a home and without grass. Like, I can still think about how, yeah. Frightening that was for me. April, like, I was like, oh my gosh, they’re never gonna be like able to play lacrosse out front or like, like, like they’re gonna grow up in this tiny apartment.

    [00:15:54] Eileen: uh, and I will also go insane because they’re so loud and like, it’s like [00:16:00] there’s, anyway, so the scene, what was the problem? What was the scene? How did you feel? 

    [00:16:06] April: All right. So you guys yeah. Be thinking about as Eileen’s guiding us through this. We’re using this as a workshop like we do here on this. . And so really be th saying it out loud, if you’re on the subway or you’re driving your car, you’re in the carpool lane.

    [00:16:20] April: Wherever you are, you’re listening to this. If you’re at the gym, picture this. Take a moment and yeah. So we can actually do this work together here on this show as Eileen’s guiding us. 

    [00:16:30] Eileen: Yeah. Yeah. So fun. So fun to think about, like what was, what was the problem? Like what was the scene and then how’d you feel?

    [00:16:37] Eileen: And then what is the story of the. , so there’s a solution that you found and describe what that looked like. Many times people have sometimes an aha moment when they’re reading something, or sometimes it’s perhaps something a mentor said, [00:17:00] or maybe you figured out like a system and you were like, oh my gosh, like if I just did this and this and this.

    [00:17:10] Eileen: So some, maybe sometimes it’s like a guide or a mentor showed you, but maybe you just like figured, stumbled across something happened. So you wanna think back like what happened? Like I walked into Funnel Hacky Live and I heard Russell talk about how I could impact the world and make money. And he taught me at the event how to make an offer, how to have like a.

    [00:17:29] Eileen: Something I could sell. And I was like, what? In the, what? I was like, I never thought, I dunno, I dunno why that had never crossed my mind, but it had, so I walked out and I was like, oh my gosh. Like I can make money, um, as like a coach. Like I ne that. So what happened for you though? That was like the pivotal moment.

    [00:17:50] Eileen: Okay. So there’s a solution that you found. So the problem, so. , and then you kind of wanna talk about it as like, almost like [00:18:00] this, like, and then one day or like suddenly or, but then I found a coach or a mentor and he said, so you wanna describe it almost similarly like a scene because people think in pictures, right?

    [00:18:14] Eileen: So they’re thinking, okay, so their solution now, oh, I, okay, I have, so, I’m so excited. I have so much. Okay, so now after, after the. , then you’re gonna, then you’re gonna do the payoff. Okay? Now the payoff is what showed up for you after you implemented the solution. It’s like, uh, and then I did this, and then, and you wanna describe it like first outwardly outward payoff, so it could look like, and then, , I set up the system like April, talk April.

    [00:18:51] Eileen: So April told me this and I set up the system and suddenly I’m working half as much, making three times as more. [00:19:00] 

    [00:19:00] April: So you wanna focus on the deliverables, like the tangible deliverables of that solution. I, I have my, my muted while you’re talking because my dog, my dogs are so excited about this. They’re, they’re barking.

    [00:19:12] April: So hearing Eileen talk, um, , uh, the tangible solutions is Nick. So that payoff first you’re saying we talk about those tangible solutions or that people can, people can measure and they can be like, oh my gosh, I only did this, or whatever. Yeah, yeah. Okay. 

    [00:19:28] Eileen: So, good. And then, um, and so kinda like, so what I like to say is like, what showed up for you in your outward, outward world?

    [00:19:37] Eileen: Like, did your business start experiencing some, some, some breakthroughs maybe. You know, some people I work with have a relationship offer and they like found the love of their life or you know, maybe their harmony in their home. You know, it could look like their blood pressure, whatever the results look like.

    [00:19:54] Eileen: Right? Right. And then people, so immediately right there, the audience is like, whoa. . I [00:20:00] want that. Now. They’re very, now that you’ve actually created desire for the solution, inadvertently, but then talk about the payoff that shows up internally. So this would be like, uh, the hero’s journey. Mm-hmm. in a, this is like for real people, hero’s journey for like real people payoff.

    [00:20:16] Eileen: Like, so did you have more peace? I re um, I remember April the day that somebody bought my first coaching program. , I think I sold it for like $297 , and I almost fell off my chair. I’m not kidding. I can still remember it. I was like, she was like, yeah, I, I’m in, I’m like, wait, 

    [00:20:38] April: what? What? What did you just say?

    [00:20:39] April: You are, are you sure? I was like, and it was 

    [00:20:41] Eileen: like the, the, like the, the, I don’t know, just the mind shift that somebody was gonna pay me money for the knowledge that was in my head. Mm-hmm. . Mm-hmm. . And when that happened, so now it’s outward payoff. This incredible sense of peace [00:21:00] came over me because now I felt like I had found a system.

    [00:21:06] Eileen: Hmm. Like a thing that I could rely on. I could do it again, right? And bring income in for my family. So this incredible piece, so this internal pay. Could free, could be incredible confidence, incredible sense of command, authority. It could be a number of emotional, like the internal result that you started experiencing, and that actually is what the audience wants more than the external payoff, right?

    [00:21:39] Eileen: Right. We actually want that more, right? So when you start talking about that, you’re increasing the tempera. Of desire. Let me bounce that back to you April and then I’ll talk about how to get the crowd prompt. 

    [00:21:48] April: Yeah, yeah, yeah. This is, this is so good. What The first thing I was actually thinking about as you were saying it, cuz this is something as you know I’ve been working on for a long time, is that,

    [00:21:58] April: When [00:22:00] people hear signature talk, signature story, sometimes they think that that has to cover a, a longer period of time. But as you were going through this framework here, which is genius is amazing. You’re genius as you know, I love you so much. Mm-hmm. , I’m going through and saying, wow, you know, I could craft this whole entire story for just one solution.

    [00:22:21] April: That’s a really powerful solution, and. , super honest, where I feel like one of the areas that I, and I have my signature talks and I, I speak, but. When we’re talking about really creating change through a powerful signature talk that you can become known for. Yeah. Like the series of podcast episodes we’re doing here right now, I’m realizing for myself, and hopefully you guys who are listening can take this from me, that it doesn’t have to be my story.

    [00:22:48] April: Since I was 13. We can talk about what just happened in a moment like Eileen shared, of where she was before this event, this hap that happened in where she is now. And [00:23:00] I think personally for me, I’ve been trying to fit too darn much in it. And as you’re saying this, it would be like Pixar covering all of the stories of all of the characters, of all of their journeys, rather.

    [00:23:12] April: One little dude who had a problem and he created this solution in one movie. Yeah, that’s what I’m getting from This is actual a pure simplification of understanding that you guys, you don’t have to share. everything in, in a bag of chips, right? Yeah. Mm-hmm. , we can share one thing about one problem, about one solution as long as it relates to the product and program you’re selling, right?

    [00:23:41] April: Absolutely. That’s what I’m pulling from this right now. I’m saying, wow. You know, I think that, I think I’ve overcrowded my signature talk probably for years. . 

    [00:23:52] Eileen: Wow. That, yeah, it’s so, um, and you got yeah. Simple, simple, simple, right? And it, and it’s amazing how a quick story, [00:24:00] now you can take the story and make it short and make it long, but the streamlined method of the, how Pixar does it starts to really engage the audience at all the lo all the levels.

    [00:24:11] Eileen: Because now they’re starting to, they’re seeing, I’ll, I’ll show you how to get them to see their story inside of it, but it’s like, it’s very clear. And the more important thing is it’s now, it’s created. Internal desire and what we like, like buyer’s momentum for what you’re gonna offer. 

    [00:24:26] April: Amazing. I absolutely love this. Okay, so we have this, we have this framework. Obviously this will all be in the show notes for you guys Well, and hit replay and, and played in slow motion. Yeah. And all this stuff. So now what do we do next? We’ve crafted the story. Where do we go? 

    [00:24:41] April: Alright, friends. Well, I am going to stop this show right here because what you don’t know. Is Eileen stayed with us for another 40 minutes, giving her entire behind the scenes framework of what to do in the process of delivering your signature talk and. [00:25:00] It will absolutely blow your socks off, and I wanted to make sure that we were giving you ample time to do the work that she already talked about in the higher level.

    [00:25:10] April: Signature message crafting and the next episode that we’re gonna break up for you. So part one and part two, this is all part of our becoming known series. Is going to take you through serious, very, very serious. I have three pages of notes here. Uh, . Very, very, um, tangible, actionable ways that you can deliver your talk.

    [00:25:35] April: And not only that, Eileen gives you information on how to get a free copy of her book and so many other resources and how to connect with her on Instagram. Um, I will drop this for you guys right now to get a free copy of Eileen’s book. Connect with her on Instagram. It’s at Eileen Wild. And DM her my name, DM her April Beach, and her assistant will know exactly what that [00:26:00] means.

    [00:26:00] April: And they’re gonna drop a copy for you, a link for you to grab a free copy of her book. Million Dollar Speaker. I am currently reading this book. It is amazing. It reveals in more, even more in depth, um, some of the secrets that Eileen teaches. And I wanna make sure you guys get that. action Item four right now is replay this episode on the importance of your signature story and how Eileen broke out the processes of how to craft your signature story and then grab her book in the meantime.

    [00:26:30] April: Again, at Eileen Wild on Instagram, DM her my name, April Beach, and they will send you a free copy of her book. Next week’s show is part two, where we’re gonna unpack the how to actually go about doing this, and we have so many more resources for you as well. Thank you so much for being a listener of this show.

    [00:26:49] April: Please show Eileen love and gratitude for all the information that she dropped here. Find her on Instagram. Share this podcast episode on your Instagram, on your LinkedIn, on your Facebook, wherever you [00:27:00] do. Um, she’s really, really pouring so much into all of us here in these episodes, and I, I won’t want to make sure that we continue to help her expand her reach and the work that she’s doing.

    [00:27:10] April: Alright you guys, this is episode number 274. All of the show notes can be found by going to sweet life seven. Four. I’ll see you next week.


    Podcast Guesting Strategies To Establish Thought Leadership – with Angie Trueblood and April Beach (Episode 273)

    Podcast Guesting Strategies To Establish Thought Leadership - with Angie Trueblood

    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for:

    Coaches and consultants who are ready to level up and become know, and are looking for higher level strategies to use podcast guesting to increase sales and expand their reach.


    This episode is part of our “Becoming Known” Series of curated shows and cherry picked experts to level up your brand and establish thought leadership in your space. 
    Today, we’re detailing a higher level strategy to use podcast guesting to grow your business. We all know that podcast guesting is a great way to be seen, but what we’re talking about today surpasses the basics of “how to pitch”. 
    Our guest expert Angie Trueblood (The Podwize Group), unfolds powerful strategies used by thought leaders to expand awareness of their expertise that you may not have considered. In this show Angie shares insider thoughts to approach shows, why you should reconsider your signature talk titles based on your objectives, how to research hosts and analyze if they’re a good fit and how you could actually be holding back your brand from growth based on your guesting strategy. 
    Don’t miss this episode if: 
    • You use podcast guesting as lead generation
    • You need to rise above the noise in your niche
    • You’re a coach, consultant or expert and it’s time to separate yourself form the everyday work and start moving to leadership
    • You have been pitching the big shows and it’s not working 


    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Understand immediate changes you need to make to your show titles based on your objective
    2. Rethink your biggest wish list shows and search for off-grid podcasts with more power for your brand
    3. Choose one action to implement that will move you towards faster recognition to become known
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:45] April: Hi you guys. Welcome to episode number 273. I am excited to bring this show particularly, It disrupts the way that most people are taught about podcast guesting.

    [00:00:59] April: So we’ve talked about [00:01:00] podcast guesting a lot here on this show, but this is for those of you that are really, uh, interested in working intentionally to use podcast guesting to become known. This is for those of you who are either new in business, but really this is primarily for those of you guys who are scaling companies.

    [00:01:16] April: All right? This show we talk about strategies to become known and establish yourself as a thought leader, not just to go on shows that have a ton of listeners, and, uh, hopefully get a couple of downloads of your PDF freebie. We’re beyond that and we’re talking about the Nick’s level of using podcast guesting for thought leadership and become known.

    [00:01:37] April: On this show. So if you are an established business, you’re in the process of scaling, you’re a coach, an author, a speaker, a consultant, a a niche service expert, and you want to make sure everybody knows that you are the the leader of a different way of thinking in a different space, or you have a methodology or you have a program that’s really leading [00:02:00] the way.

    [00:02:00] April: If you still feel like perhaps you’re that best kept secret, this is the show for you to listen. At the end of this show, you are gonna be given very specific implementation steps. We actually have an implementation section at the end of that, so make sure you hang out for that and you’re gonna know which shows are the right ones for you.

    [00:02:18] April: You’re even gonna rethink your podcast pitching topics, and we’re gonna talk about the power of networking and where to look for the right host. And the right shows for you. My guest today is a very good friend. We’ve been friends for quite a few years now. Since I’ve had this Sweet Life Entrepreneur podcast.

    [00:02:38] April: She has truly sent us the best guests that are, are just ready to deliver you guys gold. As a matter of fact, have you’ve been a listener for years? Quite a few of our amazing guests have come from this incredible woman and her team. This is Angie Trueblood that’s chatting with you here today on the show.

    [00:02:53] April: She’s the founder of the pod group and host of the Go Pitch Yourself podcast, and she uses her entrepreneurial [00:03:00] spirit, innovative thinking, and super connector powers to deeply support business owners who are using podcast guesting as the core. Of their business growth. Now, Angie, on a personal side, is super passionate about normalizing the voices of women in leadership positions, which she feels privileged to play an active role in through her work and kind of a funny little thing, Angie and I are both like, Bird watching dorks.

    [00:03:28] April: So over Christmas we were like sending each other these pictures of these like bird feeders that have cameras in them that you can like identify the kind of bird that’s eating on your bird feeder. Uh, so there’s just a little bit behind the scenes of, of how much we geek out. When we talk, whether it’s about ridiculous, uh, bird feeders or finding you guys the right shows to become known.

    [00:03:49] April: So if this is what you’re looking for, I promise you I don’t talk about bird feeders with her on this show. Just sharing a little behind the scenes with you guys, uh, then we’re gonna dive into it today. All of the [00:04:00] show notes can be found by visiting sweet life 2 73. This is episode number 273.

    [00:04:08] April: The show notes will contain the transcription. All of the downloads, the links to connect with Angie and the summary of what we talked about. So they are pretty valuable. If you haven’t been to our show notes, uh, it’s, it’s kind of a, a hidden patch of gold if you haven’t tapped into that. All right, so if you guys are ready, let’s go ahead and dive in with Angie Trueblood.

    [00:04:30] April: Hey you guys. I’m so glad that you’re here. I am here with my friend Angie Trueblood. And Angie has really been, uh, the guide for us in podcast guesting, as well as her company actually sends the best, my favorite podcast guest over, over to us. Anytime we get something from Angie and her team saying, Hey, listen, you know, you, you should really, I.

    [00:04:53] April: Person. We stop everything that we’re doing and we check it out. So today we’re talking about, and we’re continuing our [00:05:00] series on becoming known. This is episode number 273, and we are diving into the very specifics of why podcast guesting and how podcast guesting can advance your mission to become known.

    [00:05:14] April: And what we’re really gonna dive into today are some things that you probably don’t hear on most shows. How to be a podcast guest or expand your reach through podcast casting. So we’re gonna pull back the curtain, especially for those of you guys that are a bit more advanced in entrepreneurship and help you understand how do you po use podcast guesting to scale your company.

    [00:05:36] April: Angie, welcome. Thank you so much for being 

    [00:05:38] Angie: here. Thank you, friend. It’s so good to see you. 

    [00:05:41] April: I know, I know. We’re on video now, you guys Yeah, if you, if you aren’t watching us on video, I, I, as I said to Angie, we’re doing video, but we actually don’t have it up yet. , uh, we will by then, this will be on YouTube, so you should check it out on YouTube as well.

    [00:05:54] April: So, Angie, you know, when we talk about podcast guesting, it’s. obviously not a big secret. [00:06:00] The podcast guesting, there’s a great opportunity to become known. Mm-hmm. , but what, what are people not being told? What, what is the flow of the masses and what do we wanna talk about to dis today in a way to not necessarily disrupt that, but help our listeners to rethink and maybe catapult above the masses who, who are trying to be podcast.

    [00:06:23] Angie: Yeah, I think it’s a great question. Um, I think the primary thing that we see not happening in the industry is not enough focus being spent on being strategic with who people are pitching, and there’s a myriad of things within the pitches, but I think from a higher level business growth perspective, Really identifying the types of audiences that are going to move your business forward.

    [00:06:50] Angie: Also, identifying the types of hosts that are gonna help you be known and become an authority in a particular space are really important [00:07:00] pieces that I don’t always see happening out there in the podcast. Pitching and guesting conversations. Right. 

    [00:07:07] April: There’s so much pressure to, you know, be on EO Fire or you know, be on, um, online marketing Made Easy and be on these huge shows, and PR coaches teach you to work your way up to those shows.

    [00:07:21] April: But I love the conversations that you and I have about the fact that those shows aren’t really the winning places for many people who need to become known in established thought leaderships. What? You know, why is that? . 

    [00:07:36] Angie: Well, it’s interesting, um, a lot of the bigger shows candidly, are changing their model.

    [00:07:43] Angie: I mean, we could go on about this forever, um, but some of the sh show, the shows are charging to have guests come on. And to me that kind of shifts the intent of the podcast from getting in front of audiences to it being more of like a sponsored collaboration. So that [00:08:00] to me, for some of the bigger shows, is a whole different ball of wax.

    [00:08:05] Angie: I mean, I would say the niche piece of it, and that’s what we do really well. And I think it’s because internally I am a very big nerd. I love research. My background is in science. I just hired someone. She’s from a PR firm. They serve tech companies. So we’re a little nerdy over here at the Budweis Group

    [00:08:23] Angie: But really digging in and seeing. , what are some of these shows that might not have millions of downloads, but have a really engaged audience in a particular vertical? So for me, I even, I almost shift my verticals of who we positioned me as a guest on, like who we outwardly reach out to. Last year I had a big focus.

    [00:08:46] Angie: I wanted to guest on shows that were hosted by podcast producers so that I would have a relationship with producers so they could refer their clients. To us. It has worked in the sense that I’ve created [00:09:00] relationships with a lot of producers, but I’ve also found that a lot of people who have their own podcasts are a little cash strapped, especially if they have a producer and they’re not always willing to come up off of it, you know, to have another level of service provider.

    [00:09:17] Angie: But it was a great mm-hmm. experimentation for us. Um, where I see the best benefit is really identifying these niche. Complimentary service providers, so for your listeners who are scaling, they know who they serve, they know what they do for them. Finding people who serve that same audience but in a different way is really key to getting in front of an audience and actually having a really good shot of having your pitch accepted.

    [00:09:45] April: Right. . It’s a such an interesting strategy. And, and, and I think that there, there, like I said, there’s so much pressure about wanting to be on these really big shows, but what you’re saying and what we talk about is [00:10:00] the gold, like, you know, they, for that, like the riches are in the niches. Well, the podcast is actually, is the same thing and I love that, that.

    [00:10:06] April: I love that you’re talking about that. So our listeners really need to establish their goals in who the decision makers are. So as you guys are listening to this and, and trying to identify how to apply this to your business, I want you to think of your buyer. I want you to think of the person that is going to be making a decision.

    [00:10:26] April: About whether or not they buy your services. If you guys are listening and you’re still in what we call that scale level where you’re selling your coaching and your programs to other individuals, then where are they and where are they not being inundated in, you know, fire hose with people just like you, right?

    [00:10:47] April: Let’s 

    [00:10:47] Angie: talk about that. Yeah. I mean, a great exercise for your listener to do is make a list of the clients that you’ve coached before. I’m sure many are in the hundreds, so the ones that really [00:11:00] stand out in your mind that you were really successful, you saw breakthroughs. And you also enjoyed it. Also, if they send referrals your way, that’s a bonus too.

    [00:11:10] Angie: So make a list of those clients that you’ve had before and then really describe their industry. That’s one thing we do with all of our clients on our intake call is tell, I don’t wanna know that they’re 25 to 35 years old and interested in wellness. Like that’s cool, but tell me. If it’s a b2b, cuz we work with a lot of B2B clients.

    [00:11:33] Angie: Who are they? Like describe them, what industry are they in? Are they copywriters? Did you have this one client who was a Facebook ad strategist? And whatever you did for them was amazing. . Then we wanna find niche shows that are possibly talking to Facebook ad strategists or service providers, like virtual assistants, or, we have a client right now and she helps C-Suite leaders really kind of take [00:12:00] their style and use it as an asset to showing up authentically.

    [00:12:04] Angie: She works with hospital CEOs and law firm partners, so. Finding shows that are talking to attorneys and women in non-traditional spaces, really. So you gotta figure out who are the people that you love working with? Let’s start there because you obviously connect with them. So showing up on a show that is speaking to an audience of those people, they’re gonna pick up on your energy and then when they come to chat with you, you’re both gonna have that.

    [00:12:34] April: right. What a great example and thank you for sharing about your client and this triggers me to wanna share with you guys. So one of the things that the Pod Wise group helped us with is making a list of shows where people who want to license their content, In or create a certification program are listening.

    [00:12:56] April: And so these other shows, it’s not all online business. I have an [00:13:00] online business podcast. Right. Like Yeah. You know, pitching me on another podcast. It’s kind of a lot like mine doesn’t Yeah. Doesn’t make a lot of sense. Right. But where are those other places? What are those other podcasts or what are those other genres, if you will?

    [00:13:15] April: Mm-hmm. that, uh, that my higher level clients that are moving. Licensing content to companies and other businesses, um, might be listening. and they might not even be in the online business space. Yeah. And so that was a really good exercise for us to go to. They could be corporate consultants, you know, that, that want to do this.

    [00:13:37] April: So that was a really good exercise. And so that’s, go through that process like Angie said, and really identify and kind of break that mold that you’ve been told in. You know, just pitch to the big ones. Do the, what is it called? Like the PR ladder where you get bigger and bigger and bigger and bigger. And although that’s, , but sometimes the gold and we’re, we’re seeing this kind [00:14:00] of across the board.

    [00:14:00] April: It’s been a trend for the last eight 18 months that the bigger shows, the bigger programs, so that, you know, people just don’t really wanna be there anymore. They wanna be known. They wanna be in spaces where their people are, where they don’t feel like just a drop of water in the ocean. And so this totally aligns with that.

    [00:14:16] April: Okay. So let’s kind of switch. Yeah, 

    [00:14:18] Angie: go ahead. Well, a lot of the well known shows are catering to beginning business owners. So depending on what your service is, they’re not at a point unless you have a DIY offering. They’re not at a point they will. I mean, rightly so. I did it when I was new in business, but they are there to get as much free content as they can while they’re getting everything lined up.

    [00:14:41] Angie: But if you have packages that are multi thousands of dollars, you, I. I mean people that are business owners like you and I and your listeners, like, think of the shows that you are listening to. Are you listening to online marketing Made Easy? Maybe, but I’m not Anyone. Not anymore. . [00:15:00] Yeah. So you wanna, that’s why the niche piece is so incredible, because no matter what stage of business you’re in, who doesn’t wanna listen to a podcast that’s telling the ins and outs of your specific industry?

    [00:15:14] April: Right. Right, right, right. Yeah. Okay. So hopefully we have you guys rethinking what shows you’re pitching. Angie, I wanna I want you to speak, um, for a minute. You talked about it a little bit before about networking, but when, when we’re talking about becoming known, which is the purpose of this series, how can we use networking through podcasting to become known, uh, you know, regardless of of where the show is Now, let’s kind of switch gears a little bit into, to, to.

    [00:15:43] April: Area of gold that I don’t think that people talk about often enough. 

    [00:15:46] Angie: Yeah, I mean, it is one of my primary networking tools. I am currently most active on other people’s podcasts and LinkedIn, and it really just has to do with you seeing these interviews as an [00:16:00] opportunity to develop a relationship with a host that exists after.

    [00:16:05] Angie: The podcast interview goes live. So that’s the first piece of it is, and it comes back again to strategically choosing the types of shows you’re gonna be on. Maybe the show that you’re pitching is not hosted by, uh, someone that has a giant audience, but if, you know, they’re super connector. We’ve pitched shows recently to where the show is really not that big, but they, the host has a massive LinkedIn following, and so, That’s awesome.

    [00:16:34] Angie: Like let’s get connected with that person because you can interact with them and their network. So the host is one piece of it, and then you can drive listeners to actually connect with you, right? So I think that’s the beauty of podcast guesting and one way to stand out is to show up as a human, to show up as craving relationships and wanting to connect with others and guiding people, like at [00:17:00] this point in the interview.

    [00:17:01] Angie: Your listener knows that I’m active on LinkedIn, right? So it would be a natural thing after this interview, like connect with me on LinkedIn, send me a DM if you have a question about what we’re talking about. So that’s really two pieces, is encourage the listener and talk to the listener. Have them being active, participant in the conversation.

    [00:17:21] Angie: And then, I mean, the host is just priceless. 

    [00:17:25] April: Right. Oh my gosh. That is so smart. And I feel like, um, especially just a side note with LinkedIn and how active you have been on LinkedIn. I have, I have seen your networking on LinkedIn and how much you’re doing on there and it’s just, it’s just been a real game changer for you and I know a lot of other people as well.

    [00:17:43] April: So, um, definitely do connect with, with Angie on LinkedIn. We’ll make sure her LinkedIn profile information is in the show notes. Okay, so today we’ve talked about rethinking, becoming known through podcasting. We have talked about rethinking what everybody’s [00:18:00] saying about wanting to be on the big shows and really hunting for the gold in specific areas, specific niches.

    [00:18:06] April: And you talked about doing so in such a way that establish. Thought leadership in a space. Mm-hmm. . Um, how would you help our listeners understand or define thought leadership is defined in so many different ways. Um, but is there a specific strategy or a specific, how do I wanna ask this question? So it’s useful for our users.

    [00:18:30] April: If somebody says, I wanna be known as the x Y. Yeah. As a person who helps them connect to the right podcasts, what are your first steps to help them accomplish that goal? 

    [00:18:45] Angie: A lot of times what we do is elevate the talk topics that they typically. Bring to us. Uh, we recently had a jumpstart client where we create the strategy, the pitch list, the template, everything, and hand it over to them for their team to pitch.[00:19:00] 

    [00:19:00] Angie: And she came in, so she’s an operations consultant and she came in and had previously pitched herself occasionally. And there was a ton of how-to topics. And I went through and I was like, Nope, you’re not at this level anymore. Nope. The people you wanna work with don’t want to know this stuff. . So a lot of it is about up-leveling.

    [00:19:20] Angie: When I started pitching myself, it was all how to mm-hmm. , here’s like the five things to include in a pitch. It was very how to now we’re elevating into what’s the impact that guesting can have? How can you repurpose and not work yourself to death creating content? So think about to be a thought leader.

    [00:19:41] Angie: It really does. Revolve around having a different idea of your industry or a unique perspective that others don’t have. For us, it’s all about the relationships and the long-term impact it can have. Um, so I would encourage you listener, as you’re especially looking in the scale [00:20:00] phase and looking to connect with pretty high level decision makers.

    [00:20:04] Angie: Get yourself out of the how-to topics, like get yourself into the, this is what’s going on in our industry. This is the impact that the work that I do can have, and this is how we can impact your business, your company, your clients. Wow. 

    [00:20:20] April: That was. everything right there. Um, , I think if it, if you guys are here and you need to hit rewind and re go back 15 seconds, like three times and listen to what Angie just said because now we have wrapped it together in, in a very powerful fireball for you is change the shows you’re looking to pitch yourself on.

    [00:20:42] April: If you’ve been going after the masses. Look for hosts that are very industry specific and where your decision makers are, where your buyers. Know your buyers know if you’re going from the newbie buyer to the advanced [00:21:00] buyer. And finally, and this is gold. Seriously, this is amazing. Thank you for sharing that.

    [00:21:07] April: Change the topics that you are pitching. If you wanna level yourself up as a thought leader in your space. Get away from the basic how-tos, which might be. Um, what do they, what do you call it? Click bait, , you know? Yeah. Might be click bait ways, three 

    [00:21:22] Angie: topics to pitch a podcast . Right, right, right. 

    [00:21:24] April: Uh, and instead talk about things kind of like we’re talking about here in this show.

    [00:21:29] April: This show is not titled How to, how to Grow Whatever Your Business Through Podcast Casting. We did those shows four years ago. Right. Yeah. Now we’re talking about how to rethink podcast guesting and what people aren’t telling you about podcast guesting to truly establish thought leadership in your space and become known.

    [00:21:48] April: And Angie is our go-to person. I think I’ve made that really clear. Um, just really appreciate her work. Um, it, I also will say this, if your business is to the level where you have [00:22:00] teams pitching, Angie’s company is really great with that . Okay? So also if you’re listening, if you’re self pitching, that’s awesome.

    [00:22:08] April: Like keep it up, keep, keep up the work. Make sure that you’re being mindful about your pitching, and we’re gonna connect you with Angie and resources to do this if you’re to that place where you have your other, your teams. Pitching and you’re building teams to pitch you. Um, that’s really what we lean on a lot for Angie, and a lot of our higher level clients do that as well.

    [00:22:29] April: So, okay. Let’s, let’s wrap this all up. What, uh, what did I not ask you in this consideration of, of using podcast guesting to become known at a higher level that maybe I should have? Was there something that I didn’t cover that we would, we would be doing our listeners a disservice if, if we didn’t quickly hit.

    [00:22:47] Angie: I mean, I think a lot of it is then you get the interview and you show up to record. How can you stand out? How can people who are listening develop an understanding of who you are and how you serve? [00:23:00] And it is about storytelling. It is about sharing some of the specific examples that I shared today about the operations client, about the client that has, you know, working with attorneys.

    [00:23:12] Angie: Get a couple of those. Like I took notes before we popped on live because I knew the angle and the direction that our conversation was gonna take, and so you need to be prepared to create some depth to your stories because just sharing what you think. It doesn’t trigger the audience to picture you as a thought leader, but when I have clients that serve CEOs of hospital systems, that seems to elevate what I do and who I do it for.

    [00:23:44] Angie: So, especially as you’re stepping into thought leadership, have some higher level stories, higher level examples, kind of on cue in order to give more descriptors to your answers of question. 

    [00:23:58] April: Great, great. And, and people [00:24:00] connect so much better through stories as for sure as well. And, uh, and you. More credible for sure, even though we know you’re already credible.

    [00:24:08] April: Otherwise you wouldn’t be here listening to this show and figuring out how to do this. So we, we all know the three of us know you are super credible. We just wanna make sure everybody else that hears you knows that, that you’re super credible and you’ve helped other people before. 

    [00:24:20] Angie: Um, yeah, well, and stories.

    [00:24:22] Angie: I mean, that’s what I wanna listen to when I listen to a podcast. I don’t, I don’t need another how to at the moment. I need like, just gimme examples. I wanna hear what other people are doing. 

    [00:24:31] April: Right. I love that. I love that. All right, well thank you so much for being on the show today. Okay, so implementation.

    [00:24:37] April: Next steps. How do people connect with you? What, what is the best way? And guys, we will drop this in the show notes as well, but take a pause here for a second and go and connect with Angie where she’s about to 

    [00:24:51] Angie: tell you too. Yeah. How is that the best place to. Any way to connect with me is over on the website, the pod wise

    [00:24:59] Angie: It’s pod [00:25:00] wise, with a z slash hi there, and there will be links to learning about our services. We have them if you want us to pitch you, if you want us to prep what you or your team. Pitch you and we even have strategy sessions. Um, for those of you who are looking for like the actual pitch, because I know that is always a question I get even though we were not talking about it.

    [00:25:22] Angie: Um, there’s a download there so you can see pitches that my team and I have actually sent and my links for LinkedIn are there as well. So all the places that you might wanna connect depending on where you are in your journey is at the pod wises 

    [00:25:37] April: resources of gold. You guys, . All right, Angie, thank you so much.

    [00:25:41] April: Thank you for being my friend and somebody I know always tells me the truth about anything that we’re talking about in podcasting. Thank you for sending us some of the top notch best guests who have been here on this show. And thank you for pouring out so much gold to our listeners and always just freely giving first, and I just really 

    [00:25:59] Angie: appreciate [00:26:00] you for that.

    [00:26:00] Angie: Yeah, same too, friend. Thanks for having. 

    [00:26:03] April: Of course. All right guys, well, there you have it from the insider herself, Angie Trueblood with the pod Wise group. So let’s talk really quick about your implementation steps. First of all, I use Angie. I love her. Obviously she didn’t pay to be on this show. I asked her to come on here and be part of this becoming known series because I know she’s so incredibly valuable for you as.

    [00:26:25] April: Been for us. So definitely check out what they are doing over there, whether or not you’re in a position to work with them, get in their ecosystem because you’re gonna be glad you did. So let’s talk about your implementation steps after this show. What are we gonna do to implement? So here’s really quick wrap up for you.

    [00:26:44] April: This was a big concept we. It was a change of thinking to what you might have done before regarding podcast guesting. So pick one thing that you are going to do or think about or strategize from what we [00:27:00] talked about in this show. I can tell you right now as a team, we’re gonna be going back and making sure the titles of the shows that I am speaking on, the titles of the topics are, are, are not these basic topics.

    [00:27:12] April: based on our audiences that we work with. Now we’re gonna revisit our topics, which of course Angie and our team help us do as well. I think that that was a, a huge piece of gold in this show, but it depends on who you guys are trying to reach, right? So if you’re trying to reach those people that are new to your space, whatever it is you do, then those how-tos are amazing.

    [00:27:36] April: If you’re trying to use this show to establish thought leadership for yourself, then let’s rethink the topic. So you are pitching in what you’re saying on the, on the shows that you become a guest on. Let’s help you to make sure that you are helping others rethink, and therefore that’s gonna level you up more towards thought leadership in your space.

    [00:27:57] April: And of course, solve the, uh, [00:28:00] the, the goal that we’re talking about here, which is becoming. So if that, if you’re good to go and you think your titles are great, what else can you do? You can start researching shows that are very niche specific, very, uh, not necessarily very smaller shows, but smaller shows that have a good engagement.

    [00:28:19] April: Check out their social media handles. Check out, their LinkedIn. LinkedIn has just been so hot, especially for the last couple of of months, especially the last 18 months. So find out how much interaction is happening with those shows. It doesn’t matter if they don’t have a gazillion downloads, if they have an interactive audience in, like Angie said, a host that has a bigger following that has a relationship with our listeners.

    [00:28:42] April: That could be the, the gold target that you’re going after as far as podcast guesting. That’s your implementation wrap up. Thank you so much for listening to this show. I’m April Beach. If we don’t know each other, it’s so great to meet you. Uh, you can find all the information that we shared from this [00:29:00] episode by going to

    [00:29:05] April: This is episode number 273. And all the other resources we have for you are at All right, you guys have a fantastic day. Talk to you soon.


    (Becoming Known) How To Build A Press Worthy Personal Brand – with Brielle Cotterman (Episode 272)

    How to Gain Press by Building Your Personal Brand


    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for:

    This episode is incredible for entrepreneurs who are ready to scale by gaining media attention.


    If you’re looking to grow your personal brand and increase sales then using press is a smart avenue.  There are many ways to approach and land proper publicity. In this episode we talked to Brielle Cotterman  about how to build a foundation of celebrity and a press worthy personal brand through crafting stories. 


    Brielle breaks down her profitable storytelling framework and you will walk away from this episode knowing the three stories every entrepreneur must have in their bank to grow your business through press, and gain attention of highly sought after media.In this show we also break down the foundation of celebrity and the aspects of your business that you  want to have designed and structured before you move into the strategies here. 


    This is an excellent  episode for entrepreneurs who are ready to scale by gaining media attention. In order to leverage the  

    training taught in this episode you must have your online offers engineered that are ready to scale and a complete client journey laid out and ready to go. If you don’t have those things in place yet visit


    At the end of this episode you will: 

    1. Know the Foundations of Celebrity
    2. Know the three stories that every entrepreneur must have
    3. Learn Brielle’s profitable storytelling format
    Resources mentioned: 
    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:



    [00:00:44] April: Hi you guys. Welcome back to the show. I’m so glad you’re here for the NextGen of the Sweet Life Entrepreneur in Business Podcast and all the shows that I have lined up for you for the next five years. All of everything we’re gonna be talking about today can be found at [00:01:00] And all of our faithful listeners, you guys know that this is where you come to for business coaching and strategy that other coaches will charge you thousands for. 

    [00:01:09] April: Today’s episode is very powerful. My friend Brielle Cotterman is here and we’re gonna talk about how to create a press worthy personal brand. Who is this for? This is for those of you guys who are scaling your business. So we’ve already done a good job creating your offers. We have the client journey engineered. We know what’s gonna happen to all of the people we’re bringing into your business, after you earn media and press attention, after you speak on stages, that part is ready to go.

    [00:01:35] April: And now we’re talking about how to actually get you onto those stages, how to actually earn that media attention and what you’re gonna say in those, opportunities. You know, today, Brielle’s gonna break down her entire framework for the stories that you tell from stages. And this is a different approach to getting media in earning press like we’ve talked about here on this show.

    [00:01:56] April: And my other friends teach that we’ve actually had guests on this [00:02:00] show. Totally different approach. And what we’re talking about today, in my opinion, is really a prerequisite to the work you would do when you start the actual pitching process. Very, very, very important foundational work, so I’m very glad that you guys are here.

    [00:02:14] April: If we don’t know each other yet, I’m April Beach. I am the host here on the show and founder of the Sweet Life Company. And I’m a business architect and offer engineer, so I help experts, coaches, consultants, authors, and speakers scale their business online by creating million dollar programs, courses, trainings, license programs, and certification programs that lead them to high profit. Deep impact in the work they’re doing with the lifestyle freedom that they want. And I am so very glad that you’re here. You can always apply to work with us by cruising over to 

    [00:02:48] April: So let me tell you about our amazing, amazing guest today, Brielle Cotterman. She’s actually been in our community and in top our clients and worked with our clients. She’s actually gonna share one of our shared [00:03:00] clients that we have here. We’re gonna share some of the numbers here on this show about the impressions and the exposure that this client received because they have the things in place that we’re talking about here on this show. So we’re gonna give you some case studies from an actual client that. Is currently in the process of working with both of us. 

    [00:03:17] April: Brielle, for the record, is a TEDx speaker, a publicity experts and celebrity maker. She’s been the better part of the last decade helping clients craft and scale dream careers to seven figures and beyond by leveraging their personal stories and passions in order to create speaking, speaking tours. Author, award-winning books, procure media placements, and inspire millions of people, millions of people that need to hear their story. She’s a survivor of attempted murder and domestic violence and advocate for a world where intimate partner abuse is not tolerated, and survivors are met with empathy, 

    [00:03:51] April: On the business side again, her are regularly featured in Forbes, Fast Company, Martha Stewart Living. She just [00:04:00] got one of our clients in, Cosmo, in GQ. It’s not in her bio, but that just happened. Um, and I’m sure she’s done that before too. NBC, CBS, In Style Magazine and so many other, media and press publications and it’s because of her fantastic approach that you’re gonna hear here today. Hear, here, today on the show, she’s been married for just over a year to the love of her life, and they live on a horse boarding farm, uh, which is amazing. Absolutely gorgeous with three children and many, many animals. So they’re very, very excited about their life. They, they’re truly living the. I can’t wait for you to get to know Brielle today on the show if you don’t, and to hear and implement what she says. So again, all the show notes can be found by going to Click on the podcast and this is episode number 272. So let’s dive into the show.

    [00:04:52] April: Hello Friends, it is 2023 when we are recording this show and this is a Next Gen of the Sweet Left Entrepreneur [00:05:00] Podcast and there was no better person who I have been wanting and needing to record a podcast episode honestly for a very long time with then my friend Braille Cotterman, who is here today. And I just wanna kick off the year right, kick off the year strong, and dive in with Brielle and welcome you to the Sweet Life family.

    [00:05:19] April: We’re really kind of a family of listeners here, of entrepreneurs that grow together by listening to amazing experts in applying what you teach us on the show. So welcome here to the show. Give everybody a short introduction of yourself and, and why you are in this place to lead other women. 

    [00:05:36] Brielle: Thank you, April. I appreciate it. As you know, I am honored and always super excited to be a part of anything that you’re doing. So it’s lovely to be here with you today. So I am a publicity expert and a celebrity maker. I’m a TEDx speaker. I’ve been in the PR world for more than a decade, and prior to that I was in C-suite level sales and marketing.

    [00:05:59] Brielle: [00:06:00] Uh, I’ve been a professional speaker on behalf of charitable organizations, and before that I competed in the Miss America Organization. So combine all of these talents, experiences, this unique skillset that I have, compiled along the way, and that’s what puts me in the position to help women and men like yourself, you know, incredible entrepreneurs with a cause step onto the world stage and share their story, not only to impact the world, but also their bottom line.

    [00:06:35] April: Wow. I love that. And I, I can’t wait to dive into what we’re gonna unpack here today. So today we’re talking about building a press worthy personal brand. And before we actually dive into how to go about doing this, and, and the reasoning behind it, which I can’t wait for people to hear, what you’re gonna talk about today is, can we talk about some of the mindset issues where maybe some leaders.

    [00:06:59] April: Aren’t [00:07:00] necessarily leaning into this, do they? Do people not believe that they, that their story is valuable? Or what are some of those blocks for any of our listeners that are thinking, wow, I’d love to do that, but I can’t because of what are maybe some of those lies or blocks that people may be telling themselves, so we can just get those out of the way before we even dive into nailing this objective.

    [00:07:19] Brielle: Yeah, so absolutely what I see all the time in April. So many people who are kind of like nose to the grindstone, building their business, creating their brand, and then they look up one day and they realize, if I wanna get where I really want to be, I have to have a personal brand that supports what I’m doing because people now care about me because I am the CEO O or I’m the founder, or you know, I’m in this place.

    [00:07:43] Brielle: And so with that, like you said, comes a whole host of mindset things, and that can be as much as. Not wanting your whole life to be public, not wanting, um, you know, to air your dirty laundry, so to speak. But there are [00:08:00] ways of sharing and telling stories that don’t include all of the details that are very inspirational and.

    [00:08:07] Brielle: You know, it also, a part of that is stepping onto the world stage means something different for everyone. That doesn’t necessarily mean that people are going to recognize you when you walk down the street, but what it does mean is you are taking advantage of the opportunities that we have right now in the world.

    [00:08:26] Brielle: Whether that’s media, whether it’s podcasting. Speaking, you know, whatever that piece might look like for you. And we are using that as this really phenomenal marketing tool to be able to leverage who you are and what you stand for. And in doing so, support the ultimate success of your business. So there are mindset issues around that, and I think that that’s the, the one that I hear the most.

    [00:08:49] Brielle: You know, when it comes to story, it’s either, oh, I have so many stories, I don’t know where to begin. Or, the other camp is, I don’t know that my story is, would even matter to. 

    [00:08:59] April: [00:09:00] Right, right, right. I can resonate with both of those sides. 

    [00:09:03] Brielle: Yeah. 

    [00:09:03] April: Just so you know, I, I have thought both of those things and, um, so I’m very excited and, and grateful for your leadership for, for me as well. Okay. So today diving into building a press worthy personal brand, what actually is a press worthy personal brand? Let’s start there. 

    [00:09:20] Brielle: Yeah. So when you think about organizations, it’s very important to remember that information that is shared by an individual converts seven times faster than information that’s shared from a corporation or an organization. And what that means is if you are the ceo, you are the face of your organization, you are a leader, and you are sharing content, information that it’s, it doesn’t have to be exactly the same as what your organization shares, but it’s in support of it. So basically, you think. That press worthy personal brand is the brand that is an authentic representation of who you are and what you stand for, what makes you [00:10:00] unique, and it allows you to intersect with the values, mission, and vision of your organization.

    [00:10:06] Brielle: So really a personal brand. Everybody has one. I always say that some people, you know, they’re like, oh, well I haven’t taken the time to create it. Well, you have one. It’s just whether or not you are curating that personal brand, and we always say that a personal brand is how you leave people feeling how they feel after they’ve had an interaction with you.

    [00:10:27] Brielle: Maybe they see you speak on the stage, or maybe they listen to your podcast or check out your website or your social media, or maybe they read an article that you’ve written, and chances are there is not a cohesive lens there. That’s what I run into most of the time with people who are really successful leaders, advocates, entrepreneurs.

    [00:10:45] Brielle: And even in the C-Suite. And of course, we want that sort of information that’s coming from you, who you are, what you stand for, what makes you unique to be a true representation of your heart. [00:11:00] 

    [00:11:00] April: Hmm. Wow. Okay. So I think all of our listeners right now are saying, yes, I, I, that’s what I want. And that’s different than maybe what that I, I thought that it was mm-hmm. and I, I feel like even the way that you explained it takes a lot of pressure off of some people that feel like it’s really all about them. It’s actually not all about them. It’s really just about, like you said, how they make people feel and how that resonates in their, with their work in the mission that they’re doing and and forwarding the work of their company and obviously building relationships as well.

    [00:11:33] April: And so you said, so what you see. Is it, it’s not cohesive across all of those outlets. Is that usually the case in when people come to you and they’re saying they might have this per, they might give this sort of impression off in, in this place and this and this place is, do you find that people are inconsistent with their brand across platforms?

    [00:11:55] Brielle: Absolutely. And well, not just their, uh, I’m with their [00:12:00] personal brand. The thing that I find the most is that people don’t understand how they are interpreted, perceived, or recieved so. 

    [00:12:09] April: Got it. 

    [00:12:09] Brielle: We hear all the time. Share stories. Share stories, you know, I mean, it’s constant. Um, one, I see a lot of people not sharing the right stories, and two, I see them not sharing stories in a way that our minds easily comprehend, recall, and can share. So anytime we share a statement or a fact, when we wrap that in a story, it’s more than 70 times as likely to be remembered. 

    [00:12:40] April: That’s amazing. I love that stat. Okay, . It just blows my mind every single time, but it’s also not surprising. So let’s talk about, what do you mean when you say foundation of celebrity? We haven’t brought it up here yet in this podcast and, and I’d love to dive into that first. You speak all the time and you help entrepreneurs and leaders all the time [00:13:00] establish their foundation of celebrity. What actually is that? 

    [00:13:04] Brielle: So basically that is a thorough examination. My personal brand, how does my personal brand support, uh, what it is that I’m doing professionally or with my advocacy or that my organization is doing?

    [00:13:18] Brielle: And then, , the, not only the stories that go along with that, but making sure you have a sound business. You know, honestly, you help clients and people to develop a large portion of that foundation of celebrity. Because here’s the deal. When we talk about a press worthy brand, what is a press worthy brand?

    [00:13:36] Brielle: It’s going to capture attention. Okay? It’s going to get GQ and Cosmo and Forbes and Business Insider to say yes. But if we get all of those incredible, publications to say yes, what’s going to happen if we have nowhere to push them? We have nowhere for those people to go or when they get there. It’s confusing.

    [00:13:56] Brielle: We want people to be able to take one step closer to you in a [00:14:00] way that is easeful and makes total sense. For your ideal client and really for who your ideal client hopes to be. And that’s something you know that you and I share from our perception of who are we speaking to when it comes to marketing, and that’s definitely what we look at.

    [00:14:16] Brielle: So foundation of celebrity, you’ve gotta have a sound business, you’ve gotta have that client journey. When the different points of entry, when they come into your space, how are they going to take one step closer to you? It’s phenomenal to get GQ and Cosmo. But if we get GQ and Cosmo and people come to your site and then they’re struggling, like, what, what do I do next? You know, people, we, we lose them and that’s not at all what we wanna do. So, um, having that foundation of celebrity looks a, it’s a lot more complex than just being able to give a really incredible interview and knowing how to show up on television, what to say and how to say it. But it’s the behind the scenes that really matters when it comes to making an impact on your bottom [00:15:00] line.

    [00:15:01] April: Mm-hmm. Mm-hmm. Yeah, and I, I believe that there are so many people that do actually put themselves out there that don’t have those business structures in place. And that’s exactly what you’re saying that you see as well. 

    [00:15:12] Brielle: Absolutely. 

    [00:15:12] April: All everybody, so foundation of celebrity, you guys, when you get out there and, and we want you out there. We want you telling your story, which we’re gonna dive into next. We want you to have this. Amazing personal brand, but let’s also make sure that the rest of your business is in place and ready for the attention, and really like a sponge to be able to absorb that work that you do when you put yourself out there, when you earn press and, and you speak on stages.

    [00:15:38] April: So now that we have the foundation lead, foundation of celebrity, the reason why you need a personal brand, all of these things. Something you said earlier really hit home for me, and it’s something that I’ve struggled with for years, is how to actually take my experiences and turn them into stories where, people [00:16:00] understand it’s not about me or even my story so much, but how do we make it so that other people can see themselves in our stories and then take that next step with us?

    [00:16:11] April: And it is something I am the first one to admit. I’ve struggled with this. For years and years and years. And so I would love for you to help all of us just really understand how to move into this direction. You have an amazing framework. I know, but let’s talk about stories a little bit. What do we say We got up there on stage. What? And then what do we say? 

    [00:16:31] Brielle: So, you know, we all know stories are memorable. That’s the way we’ve been teaching since the beginning of time. Our. Human brains are really literally hardwired to learn through story. And story does two things. It creates connection and it inspires action. And those are only stories that are told. Well, April. And so that’s the thing. It’s. You know, most of us, by the time we are in a place where people begin to, and when I say people, I mean [00:17:00] like press and like, you know, those massive numbers like we, we were talking about before, 85 and a hundred million people that are consuming content of our clients.

    [00:17:10] Brielle: They begin to care about our stories when we’ve lived a lot of life typically. And so sorting out what are the stories to tell. Doing that from the perspective of I wanna tell a story that’s gonna create connection and inspire action, and I wanna inspire the right action. Um, you know, you mentioned earlier it’s not just about pitching.

    [00:17:31] Brielle: So it’s not just about pitching the media, it’s not just about getting the win, it’s about being prepared and knowing. When I do get this media win, am I going to do myself more good than harm by telling the right stories and having that foundation of celebrities. So that’s a big piece. You know, taking your own experiences and looking for moments in time that are transformational.

    [00:17:54] Brielle: So that’s my. That’s always my best advice when you begin to break down, and we have three [00:18:00] stories that we recommend everyone tell, but you know when you begin to assess and you look at that, we want to show people who you are through your story rather than tell them so. That’s the, that’s one of the biggest mistakes I see people make all of the time.

    [00:18:16] Brielle: They wanna list their whole resume. You know, they wanna go through this whole laundry list of, well, I’ve done this and I’ve accomplished that, and blah, blah, blah. And really, at the end of the day, your consumers and your media decision makers, they don’t care. They wanna, they want a real person. Yeah. They wanna create connection.

    [00:18:33] Brielle: Mm-hmm. , um, you know, we talk about no, like, and trust and more than it’s, these are new numbers too. Um, more than 86% of all consumers say a brand’s authenticity is one of their, the reasons for their major, major decision making when it comes to buying or not buying. .

    [00:18:54] April: Wow. Wow. So when we talk about these stories and [00:19:00] we get up on stage, whether it’s an online stage or an offline stage, or somebody is writing an article about us and um, In a magazine, um, or, or even when somebody’s talking about us or a, a business partner is talking about us and saying, Hey, you should really go to Brielle or whoever.

    [00:19:17] April: Um, how do we craft these stories so that people remember how do we actually build these stories? You have this amazing framework. I know that you’ve taught our clients in, in one of our private settings before, and it’s just so powerful, and I can’t wait for our listeners to hear this. You call it the profitable storytelling framework. Is that correct? 

    [00:19:37] Brielle: Yeah, yeah. So our profitable storytelling format, but, and there’s three stories that we ask every brand to be telling, because most of us have a million stories, and I love to ask people to create a story bank. Once you master the profitable storytelling format, you’re gonna have three foundational stories to your personal brand.

    [00:19:54] Brielle: But beyond that, develop a story bank because you are going to have opportunities with social, [00:20:00] you’re gonna have opportunity for your email list, for articles. You know, you’re gonna be able to pull some of those additional stories. And once you really master the format, then you should be able to keep this log, develop this bank.

    [00:20:12] Brielle: Just make a a Google Doc and just drop them in there. And, and not only will you. You know, does it make this incredible piece of kind of like your media playbook, but it also is inspiring. so when you think about story, we talk about a breakthrough story. So, We call it that because it helps you to break through the noise, but it’s typically based around a major breakthrough of transformation.

    [00:20:36] Brielle: And then we also ask for you to tell a business zone of genius story. Why are you the very best at what it is that you’re doing? And then we ask you to tell your passion story and just one caveat there. , 99% of all entrepreneurs, when we ask what their passion is, they say what it is that they do, um, with their work, and we ask you to choose something different.

    [00:20:59] Brielle: [00:21:00] So I’m a wild friend, champion equestrian. I live on a farm. I know you are passionate, you love the ocean and the beach and all of those things. And so telling a story that allows people to create there because where those three stories intersect. , that’s really where your soulmate level clients live, and that’s, you know, we all wanna be working with the people who inspire us and light us up. So that profitable storytelling format helps us to do that, and it makes it super simple. 

    [00:21:27] April: Okay, so three stories were the breakthrough story, the zone of genius story, and the passion story. 

    [00:21:33] Brielle: Yes. 

    [00:21:34] April: That is so powerful. And are these big huge stories or are these just little moments in time? That or, or doesn’t matter Is really, is, is what we’re looking at here.

    [00:21:44] Brielle: So the way we ask our clients to do that is we ask you to take the three stories and distill them down to three bullet. So, you know, if you are in a format where you have a 45 minute podcast interview, or you’re giving a keynote, [00:22:00] potentially you can bring in a lot more details, a lot more of the rise intention in the story, so to speak.

    [00:22:07] Brielle: Um, But really you should be able to distill it down to its simplest format because I can’t tell you April how many times I have had people booked for a five minute television segment and then breaking news happens, and then their segment gets cut down to a minute and 45. So the simplistic storytelling format that I’m getting ready to share really seems so simple, but it is how our brains are hardwired to interpret and remember and share stories.

    [00:22:41] Brielle: So it is using what we know from a psychological perspective and leveraging that it’s using the information that we have learned. You know, centuries of teaching, communicating, marketing, all of the things that humans are doing with [00:23:00] stories. So use what we know and leverage that instead of working against it.

    [00:23:05] April: Wow. All right. So hopefully your wheels are spinning you guys, and if you’re taking notes listening to this, uh, you’re, you’re a smart cookie , you can always come back and replay it again. Um, so let’s dive into that storytelling format. , what does this actually look like and how do you guide entrepreneurs through this process?

    [00:23:22] Brielle: So anytime we’re talking about, um, our profitable storytelling format, we look at three pieces to every story. Like I mentioned earlier with the breakthrough story. We wanna begin with what is that transformational moment? So what is the climax of the story? Take us to that moment in time. I did a workshop recently live, um, with an incredible group of women in Nashville and called one of them up onto the stage and we were able to workshop some of her stories and, you know, cuz she was one of those girls that was like, I don’t, I don’t have a story. I don’t know, you know, I’m great at what I do, but I, my story’s not gonna affect [00:24:00] anyone. Um, there’s two things to remember. 

    [00:24:03] Brielle: One, your story does not have to be filled with drama and trauma to make a difference. And to make an impact and to inspire. It does not have to be that sell everything and move to Bali moment. You know? Um, just your story and the authentic interpretation and conveyance of that story really can inspire action and allow people to take ownership of their own story as well. 

    [00:24:29] Brielle: And then two, you know, this is a woman who I was workshopping with who has accomplished incredible things in her lifetime, created amazing foundations and organizations and sh we can, through telling a story, we don’t have to say. she’s tenacious, she is creative, she’s accomplished all of these things. We can show people that through a very well told story, and that’s what the profitable storytelling format does. 

    [00:24:59] Brielle: So you [00:25:00] begin dissecting your stories, thinking of what are transformational moments in time? What is a moment in time that I can take people to, that’s the climax. So that’s the second piece of the story. And then just very simpl. Who was I before and who was I after? So who was I before? That’s the exposition. The start of the story. This is going back to like 10th grade literature, you know, English composition. How should a story arc be created? Who were you before the tension rises?

    [00:25:29] Brielle: Then there’s the climax or the major transformation in the story, and as the tension. you, it is, you are sharing your rise. And then the climax, you know, the, the tension falls after the climax because here you are now. And so every story, each one of those three foundational stories for your brand should be told using your profitable storytelling format. So who are you before major transformation or climax? Take us to that moment in time, and then who are you [00:26:00] after? 

    [00:26:01] April: Mm. And with that format, is there usually, um, you know, some time and break. It obviously depends on the different venue. If, if somebody’s being interviewed on the Today Show, there isn’t gonna be that back and forth conversation, but is in some settings, do we craft that story as well for people who are the listeners who are the audience to have a moment to relate or resonate or absorb in the actual delivery of these stories.

    [00:26:26] April: And, and have them even workshop internally. Is that part of something that you feel like is important, is finding those break points where the listeners to the stories can, I don’t even know if it’s actually like a break point in the speaking, but do you, is that actually really identified through the whole entire story, or are there periods of time in which maybe there will be trigger where it’s like, does this relate to you or do you, do you see this happening in you?

    [00:26:50] April: I don’t necessarily ask questions like that. I think it depends on who your audience is. Here’s one thing that you have to remember, and I love that you used this example. When you see people on [00:27:00] Good Morning America, when you see people on Jimmy Kimmel Live, you have to understand that their foundation of celebrity is strong.

    [00:27:08] Brielle: Okay? This did not just happen on accident. They do not show up looking like a million bucks, knowing how to sit, how to speak, what stories to. How to get a laugh. They do not just show up this way. There is a lot of preparation and a lot of work that goes into ensuring that they are going to have. That, you know, knock it out of the park moment when they’re on Good Morning America and on Jimmy Kimmel Alive and a story that is told well, does not require us to ask our audience to reflect story that is told, well, touches that person in their heart and creates a connection.

    [00:27:47] Brielle: And then you don’t have to ask them to please remember this or you know, this is how the, when you think of me think of the story, you don’t even have to make that ask because you’re just one human being speaking to another. I. [00:28:00] 

    [00:28:00] April: That’s fantastic and your framework is so powerful and you guys listening to this, our clients have taken Brielle’s framework and we have a shared client that Brielle said that Brielle has just gotten on crazy press in and this woman knows how to tell her story. And she is absolutely amazing at it Exactly because of, of the guidance that she’s received in this process of training to do it. And so when we’re talking to people who aren’t that far along, let’s talk about people who are just starting out. Um, W and you said it’s really important to have the most, you know, at least one of these stories, the zone of genius story. Um, you know, the breakthrough story. Which one do you feel like is the most important as it relates back to their business for them to craft first? Is it dependent on the entrepreneur or is, do you find one across the board for the, that’s the best one for them to lean into? 

    [00:28:54] Brielle: The breakthrough story is the most important.

    [00:28:57] April: Okay. All right. Makes sense. 

    [00:28:58] Brielle: Because like I said, whether [00:29:00] you are, you know, a C-suite executive and you are crafting your fir, your personal brand for the first time because you’re getting attention and you realize now that’s important. Or you are an entrepreneur who has built this business and you look up and you’re like, okay, well if I wanna scale to the next level, I have to kind of step up behind the curtains and I’m gonna have to do some media.

    [00:29:21] Brielle: I’m gonna have to do some podcasts. I’m gonna have to go on some stages. Regardless of where you are, the breakthrough story is really what allows people to know who you are and what you stand for. Think of the breakthrough story as the story of your why. And that’s kind of, you know, that hot button word, uh, question. Tell us about your why. You know, all of those things. We can all rattle off a long list of the reasons why we do things or don’t do things or things are important to us. But imagine if you can share that in a story. 

    [00:29:54] Brielle: There again, that becomes 70 times more memorable and we’re thinking about in this contemporary [00:30:00] world where there is so much noise in the marketplace, there are so many different things that you can buy, product services, people out there. And what we are really doing is we are helping people to create that contemporary word of mouth. So thinking back to, you know, when I was, when I was growing up, if I wanted to buy. anything. You know, if I wanted to buy a new sweater, I would wanna call up one of my girlfriends or my cousin and say, you know, where did you get that? That’s so cute. And they would ra make a recommendation? Oh, we’ll go down to the square and that sort of thing. 

    [00:30:38] Brielle: You know, cuz we were all buying things in person and mm-hmm. now we have this incredible ability to create that. Level of top of mind marketing and that same level of word of mouth endorsement and third party verification by being featured in the publications [00:31:00] that are ideal consumer and who they hope to be, where they are consuming their content. So if they are a devout reader of Business Insider and Business Insider chooses to feature you and they could have chosen anyone.

    [00:31:13] Brielle: You are literally putting yourself in that exact same position, so they are now giving you that endorsement. Just like when I used to call up my cousin and ask her what I should go by. 

    [00:31:23] April: I love that. All right, and so what are the next steps for our listeners? They are gonna go through and see this in the show notes, and obviously we’ll make sure that they can connect with you as well, but they’ve gone through this process. They’ve, first of all made a. Is this important to them? Is this something that they have maybe dragged their feet on for one of those mindset issues or the, the lack of confidence in the beginning that we talked about In this show, you’ve brought them very clearly through understanding why everybody needs to pay attention to their personal brand, 

    [00:31:54] April: not why everybody needs a personal brand. I love that you’ve. Love that you said that too, because we all do have a [00:32:00] personal brand. I even remember talking to my, my three little boys going to elementary school and when they’re, you know, the kids that they hang out with and the clothes that they wear, that’s like, you know, their little brand and that affects us and we’ve all been doing it. We all are aware of, of how we come across and how we make each other feel. I, and I was just recalling a conversation actually last week with one of my kids about this new kid in school and that every, everybody was being mean and he had a choice of of who he is gonna be.

    [00:32:29] April: Right. And that’s the brand of who he is. That’s what he’s known for. And it’s so interesting how we don’t even identify that as a young age, but we’re all quite aware that how we show up and the stories we tell and who we are to other people and the influence that we have in any situation, whether it’s a large situation or a small situation, really does affect our lives and our businesses.

    [00:32:52] April: And so, uh, you teach. Getting pressed different than anybody I know. All right, I’m gonna say this [00:33:00] here. So the way that Brielle does this, you guys, and we’ve done tons of episodes and I have lots of friends that talk about how to land big press deals, and there are ways that we can talk about pitching press and doing media kits and all these things.

    [00:33:15] April: None of that can be talked about until we have mastered and done what Brielle is talking about here. Because that is the action of, of going out when there’s so much more from a foundational level that needs to be discussed and decided upon. And you as a leader, and I’m saying this to me too, you know, and, and I have received a lot of press in the past and I knew none of this.

    [00:33:42] April: And so I feel like. , this process was a huge missing link in my history of understanding. And that there, that my impact on the exposure that I had received in the past could have been [00:34:00] so much better, so much greater. I mean, and this is a long time ago, guys. This is like 12 years ago. Okay? So I’m gonna now age myself.

    [00:34:07] April: You know, when I first really started receiving big press, right? But now it’s different. Now it’s even more important because it’s so noisy and it’s so loud and everybody’s out there screaming me, me, me. But those that are able to craft these powerful stories and to create this celebrity foundation, like Brielle is saying, here are the ones that it’s, it’s like we’re gonna be separating oil from water.

    [00:34:35] April: We’re talking a lot about that. I really feel like that’s gonna be the theme of 2023 is separating those who are just out there doing it from those that are committed to the way they’re going about running their businesses. Um, and so I, I really love and appreciate this conversation so much, Brielle, and I know our listeners are gonna love us too.

    [00:34:54] April: And what a great way to kick off the year. It doesn’t matter when you’re listening to this, um, but, you know, kick off the [00:35:00] year and really roll forward in our commitment to ourselves in. in our calling, if that’s kind of like a cheesy word, our calling. But really I believe that this is an important conversation to have in that journey to gaining media attention and and being on podcast. So what else did I not ask that I need to be asking for people to be able to take action from this show? 

    [00:35:22] Brielle: Well, one of the things that I wanna touch on real quickly, April, is what you just said, what you just pointed out. That’s the reason why people traditionally. Upset with their PR firms. We’re not a traditional PR firm.

    [00:35:36] Brielle: We’re more like an executive level finishing school, coupled with a. PR agency that gets you those incredible opportunities to use as a marketing tool. So, you know, we look at everything from personal brand through how do we incorporate and really fuse that marketing plan with a strategic PR campaign and.

    [00:35:59] Brielle: You [00:36:00] know, it’s exactly what you said. There are ways to pitch the media. There are ways to go out there and get featured, but if you don’t have a strong foundation, if you’re not doing you’re, you could be doing yourself more harm than good . And so, you know, there are so many different pieces from image all the way through to how do you leverage that media, and I think really every single person who has an interest in pursuing media and whether or not you have an interest or you just recognize the importance of it, is starting to dissect and refine and define those three foundational stories.

    [00:36:36] Brielle: Because if you begin telling those, you are going to begin to create consistency, even if there hasn’t been consistency in your own personal. Once you identify those three stories and you can begin to tell them, I think that’s the very first important strong step towards standing out and creating that press worthy personal brand.

    [00:36:59] April: thank you. [00:37:00] Thank you so much. Thank you for your leadership here and your leadership to my clients and in our programs, and how much you, um, give your time to come in and work with our clients too as well. So for people to find you. And move forward. You guys have the Celebrity Incubator coming up, but people are gonna, you know, people listen to podcasts forever.

    [00:37:19] April: So if you’re listening to this in the beginning of 2023, you guys have Celebrity Incubator, so let’s talk about how they can find you as far as, um, you know, are evergreen links, so they always are able to access you and learn more about what’s going. 

    [00:37:34] Brielle: Yes, it’s always my name. It’s my name. It’s Brielle Cotterman, B R I E L L E, and it’s Cotterman, C O T T E R M A N, on Insta, on LinkedIn, on Facebook, and that is our actual U R L.

    [00:37:49] Brielle: So that is always the best way to find us and what’s going on with our agency and all the incredible things that our clients are doing in the world as. [00:38:00] 

    [00:38:00] April: Thank you so much, Brielle. So glad you’re here. 

    [00:38:03] Brielle: Likewise. Thank you my friend. 

    [00:38:05] April: Okay guys, great show with Brielle. Now we have 60 seconds to implement. What is one thing that you’re gonna take from this show and start and do today? So whether it is, do you remember those three stories? She said that everybody needs to have the breakthrough story, the zone of genius story or the passion story. Which one of those do you already? And if you don’t have one, maybe your call to action for yourself today is just to create and determine what that breakthrough story is going to be. All right? So I know sometimes you can’t do all the things we talk about on the show, but I want you to walk away and I want you to take action on one thing so that we can always keep moving your business forward. Again, all the show notes are 

    [00:38:44] April: If you find yourself in a place where you’re not ready for this, because we haven’t engineered your offer ecosystem in the client journey and your actual programs yet, then you can also find out how you can apply to work with us so we can get you ready to then apply what we’re talking about on today’s show. All right, you guys be. [00:39:00] And I’ll see you next week.



    (Becoming Known) How To Expand Your Reach, Increase Sales and Become a Thought Leader (Episode 271)

    Becoming Known: How To Expand Your Reach, Increase Sales and Become a Thought Leader




    This episode is for those in Phase  2 – 4  of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™

    Who is this episode for/Summary:

    This episode is for those of you who are moving into higher levels, more impact, bigger stages, more influence, more income, more impact. If you’re an established coach, consultant, speaker, author or niche service expert, and it’s time to move up. 
    In this episode, we kick off with the most powerful things you must have in place before you start your “becoming known” campaign. We’ll cover a short check list of foundations and  work on your strategy to become known. You’ll receive a list of action items and also a list of strategic decisions, including how to make these choices and where to start. 
    It’s hard to become known when you’re head down in your work. You’re busy taking care of your clients, not telling everyone about the work you’re doing. You just do the work, and hope people will tell their friends about your awesomeness. 
    Or, perhaps you do have a huge social following? You’ve mastered the art of communication, you love being on your social platforms and your following has grown, but now it’s time to become known on the next level to move up, not only move forward. 
    This series of shows breaks down proven strategies from the Greats, that you can leverage today to become known, establish leadership and rise above the noise, or break into new noise, with guests Brielle Cotterman, Eileen Wilder, Angie Trueblood, and more…
    Let’s get going… 
    At the end of this episode you will: 
    1. Have a punch list of assets you need to have in place before you start your “becoming known” campaign
    2. Have clarity on how to use the next 5 SweetLife Podcast episodes to your advantage (so you don’t pay a coach $$$ to tell you what you’re getting here for free) 
    3. Plot your Becoming Known course and start moving your business in that direction now 
    4. Have the steps to build your leading method you’ll become known for
    Resources mentioned: 

    8 Steps to Create  Your Signature Process, Coaching Method, or Framework –

    Apply to work with us

    April Beach on LinkedIn

    SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

    Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

    Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

    Need faster business growth?

    Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

    Full Show Transcript:


    [00:00:00] You are listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast with business mentor and entrepreneur activator April Beach, connecting great people with great people to do great things. That is dope. Today I’m giving you a framework. I love you. This transformation process, you say, here you go. Yes, this is it.

    [00:00:26] Everything you just said, April, wow, that is the best business architecture and business engineering. I’ve never really thought of it like that, but right away when you said that, Thank you, April. I appreciate you, dude. Yeah. 

    [00:00:44] Hi you guys, and welcome to the kickoff episode of a new mini-series we’re doing called Becoming Known. You are in the right place if you’re an established coach or a consultant and you have used a lot of these PR and influence and awareness [00:01:00] strategies in the past. But now it’s time to move up. Not only move on with your business, but move up. So let me explain to you exactly what we were talking about in this show.

    [00:01:10] This is the kickoff of our little mini-series called Becoming Known. We have some powerful treats coming up for you in addition to what we’re talking about here today. In the future, you are going to hear from the greats like Eileen Wilder. We have two episodes where Eileen breaks down her entire million dollar speaking framework in a workshop format for you that is coming.

    [00:01:33] You also get to hear from Angie Trueblood, which she is, in my opinion, the number one podcast guest placement strategist. She’s absolutely amazing, and Brielle Cotterman, who is a PR, an influence strategist, is gonna be here as well. All of these. Are partnering here with us on the Sweet Life Podcast throughout this little miniseries to help you have strategies that you can take to the bank to become known [00:02:00] and expand your reach and increase your sales and become a thought leader in your space.

    [00:02:04] You’re gonna hear my little dog barking. He’s not feeling well next to me, so welcome to behind the scenes of. The Sweet Life Entrepreneur Podcast. This is episode number 271. And so all of the show notes that we’re talking about can be found by visiting sweet life Click on our podcast button and this is episode number 271 where we’re gonna detail every single thing we are talking about here for you on the show.

    [00:02:29] Now, who is this episode four and who is this series for? Let me make sure you’re in the right place. We have a lot of shows for beginning business owners, but that is not who this series is for. This is for those of you who are established coaches, established consultants. You’ve been doing what you’ve been doing for a while, and it’s time to move you up to higher levels, higher levels of influence, higher levels of impact, higher levels income. 

    [00:02:57] The strategies that we’re talking about in this [00:03:00] becoming known series are not the basics, like how to pitch yourself to be a podcast guest. We have those episodes here for you, though you can just very easily search how to, how to become a podcast guest and tap into those shows. These are for those of you guys that are ready for higher levels in more income, and what does this actually look like for you?

    [00:03:20] It looks like you are now at this place where you find in your professional life where it’s time for us to engineer that next level of your business. That next business model that you want to take you into the next 3, 5, 10 years. This show in t